AS/400 SYSTEM OPERATIONS System Administrator Tasks

© 1998-2001 Electronic Data Systems Corp. All rights reserved.

1

System and Equipment Overview Table of Contents

OVERVIEW ................................................................................... 3 COMPUTER BASICS.................................................................... 4 Hardware ................................................................................. 4 Software................................................................................... 4 CPU - Central Processing Unit................................................. 4 Storage/Memory....................................................................... 5 Terms....................................................................................... 5 SYSTEM UNITS ............................................................................ 7 Models C, D, E, F - Ivory (Tan) Boxes...................................... 7 200/400 Series Black Box ...................................................... 11 300/500 Series - Black Box.................................................... 13 600 Series Black Box ............................................................. 15 700 Series Black Box ............................................................. 17 170 Series Black Box ............................................................. 19 TERMINALS................................................................................ 21 Dumb [DUM] Terminals.......................................................... 21 Power-On / Off ....................................................................... 21 Offline Setup .......................................................................... 21 Online Setup .......................................................................... 22 P.C. – PERSONAL COMPUTER ................................................ 23 Power-On............................................................................... 23 Power-Off............................................................................... 23 PC Message Indicators .......................................................... 23 SSS Devices .......................................................................... 24 USE THE KEYBOARD................................................................ 25 SIGN ON ..................................................................................... 27 Sign Off ...................................................................................... 27 AS/400 MAIN MENU (MAIN)....................................................... 28 DEALERLINE XL MAIN MENU (DMM000) ................................. 31 SYSTEM REQUEST MENU ........................................................ 33

April 2000

System and Equipment Overview

1-i

Table of Contents

PROMPTABLE FIELDS (F4) ...................................................... 37 TCP/IP AND TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTERS .......................... 38 SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW - EXERCISE.............. 39

1-ii

System Administrator Tasks

April 2000

OVERVIEW

System and Equipment Overview
OVERVIEW
This chapter provides basic information you will need to operate your AS/400. • • • • • • • • Computer Basics System Unit and Control Panel Workstations Use the keyboard Sign on and off the system AS/400 Main Menu, DEALERLINE Main Menu, System Request Menu Function keys and the command line and promptable fields Printers

April 2000

System and Equipment Overview

1-3

COMPUTER BASICS

COMPUTER BASICS
Computer is derived from the word compute, in other words, to calculate. There are three basic types of computers distinguished by their physical size and capacity: • Microcomputer • Minicomputer • Mainframe

Hardware
Hardware is the physical components of the computer or the things you can touch. Hardware components include: - Keyboard - input device for the user to communicate with the computer - Monitor - output device for the computer to communicate with the user - Printer - output device used to produce hard copies of data - System Unit - AS/400 - Keyboard, Monitor, and Printers, are considered Peripheral devices.

Software
Software is the programs or instructions which enable the computer to do various functions. Software includes: - Operating System (OS/400) - programs which control the interaction between the hardware and software - Application Software - programs which are used to manipulate user information (i.e. DEALERLINE XL)

CPU - Central Processing Unit
The CPU is the "brain" of the computer which processes information. (All information is processed in the CPU.) All of the terminals are cabled to communicate with the CPU.

1-4

System Administrator Tasks

April 2000

COMPUTER BASICS

Storage/Memory
There are three types of storage: Temporary Storage (CPU main memory) Permanent Storage (DASD or hard drive) DASD is defined as Direct Access Storage Device - DASD is a disk unit (hard drive). A hard disk (hard drive) is present in a PC (personal computer). External Storage (diskette, tape, or optical drive) Optical drive is also called a CD ROM.

The metric system is used to quantify storage. A bit is a binary digit in the binary numbering system. A byte consists of 8 bits which is equivalent to one character. 8 bits = 1 byte = 1 character K (Kilo) = 1,000 M (Mega) = 1,000,000 G (Giga) = 1,000,000,000 Examples: 128KB = 128,000 bytes = 128,000 characters 8MB = 8,000,000 bytes = 8,000,000 characters

Terms
Upgrade/Software - Load newly enhanced software. Upgrade/Hardware - Additional drives - memory upgrade - new AS/400 system . ATF - Acronym for Application Temporary Fix. Identifies new application software distributed by EDS.

April 2000

System and Equipment Overview

1-5

1-6 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . After receiving the EOD tape. Auxiliary storage is all addressable storage (DASD) other than main storage. after the release is loaded on the customer's system. If the release is too large to EOD. When a release is EOD. the release is electronically downloaded to the customer. Remote Site – Another store that is connected to the Host Site (using the same AS/400) using NT routers. customers can load the tape anytime during the day. If the release fails. the customer can select the release to run when selecting the DEALERLINE nightly backup to run. Operating System (OS/400) . the tape in inserted into the tape drive and LODRUN TC is typed at a command line (see chapter 4 for more detailed information). Most of EDS releases can now be loaded using an EOD process. Initial Program Load (IPL) – Initial Program Load is the process that loads the Operating System (OS/400) into main storage from auxiliary storage. the system will automatically back out of the release and the system will be up and running the next morning. the same as if the release was electronically downloaded (EOD).The Operating System (OS/400) is a group of IBM licensed programs which allows you to interface with the AS/400 through menus or commands to control and allow for system activity. checks the internal system hardware. The release will then process with the DEALERLINE nightly backup. To load an EOD tape. modems. Host Site / Remote Site Host Site – Physical location of the AS/400 – this is the main location.COMPUTER BASICS PTF . A temporary solution to. and prepares the system for user operation. the release displays on the EOD screen. After the download is complete to the customer. the release will display on the EOD screen.Acronym for Program Temporary Fix. or bypass of. It takes about 10 to 20 minutes for the EOD tape to be loaded on the customers AS/400. Release (Updates) .Identifies the version of software to be loaded on your system. It takes several days for the EDS Automotive Retail Group (ARG) to download a release to all facilities. A dedicated system is NOT required on the customer's AS/400 during the process of electronically downloading software (release). An error message that states the release failed prints at the system printer. a problem in an IBM licensed program. After the EOD tape is loaded. Again. and or remote controllers which use data circuits (telephone lines) to connect to the Host site. then the release is sent to customers on an EOD tape. it displays on the EOD screen. a dedicated system is NOT required.

SYSTEM UNITS SYSTEM UNITS Models C.IPL 03 Start IPL FUNCTION/ DATA DISPLAY Enter Secure Auto SELECT SWITCH ENTER BUTTON 9402 Control Panel POWER LIGHT Select Manual Normal KEYLOCK SWITCH Enter Secure Auto Power On Functions Delayed Off 02 03 04 11 POWER SWITCH Select Enter O1 Display Selected IPL Select IPL Start IPL Lamp Test System Reference Code Processor Active System Attention SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT Normal Manual KEYLOCK SWITCH Function/ Data 01 Secure Auto SELECT SWITCH ENTER BUTTON FUNCTION/DATA DISPLAY April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-7 . F .Ivory (Tan) Boxes 9404 Control SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT 9406 Control Panel Processor Active System Attention POWER LIGHT POWER SWITCH POWER SWITCH Power On Delayed Off POWER LIGHT Power On Processor Active System Attention Delayed Off S/M SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT FUNCTION/ DATA DISPLAY SELECT SWITCH ENTER BUTTON Function 01 Select 02 03 04 11 Function O1 Display Selected IPL Select IPL A .IPL Start IPL Lamp Test System Reference Code Data Function Manual Normal Data 01 KEYLOCK SWITCH Functions O1 Display Selected IPL04 Lamp Test 02 Select IPL 11 System Reference Code A . D. E.

IPL 03 Start IPL 04 Lamp Test 11 System Reference Code 7 Select Manual Normal 11 8 Enter Secure Auto S/N XXXXXXXXX 10 Unit Emergency On Off 9 1-8 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .SYSTEM UNITS System Unit Control Panel C .F Models (9402 Model has an On/Off Button) 1 2 3 Processor Active System Attention Power on Delayed off 4 5 Function 01 Data B 6 Functions 01 Display Selected IPL 02 Select IPL A .

F Models system unit functions): ! 1. April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-9 . Enter Function Button This button is used to initiate the function currently selected by the Select Switch. 4. 7. Typical program activity will cause this indicator to blink. Power Switch This switch is used to power on or power off the system unit. its main use is to display an eight character system reference code when IPLing (Initial Program Load) or when a system error occurs. Power Ready Indicator This green indicator is "lit" whenever the processing unit power supply is on. Data Display This screen typically displays the single letter 'B'. Processor Active Indicator This green light is lit when programs are being run by the processor. 2. Models C thru F Ivory (Tan) Boxes are Non-RISC. 6. Select Switch This switch is used to select the function that is to be performed when the Enter button is pressed. The Control Panel consists of the switches and indicators used by the system operator to start up the system and monitor it for problems. Function Display The Function Display shows the function information that has been entered. 8. This screen typically displays '01'. 3. However. This indicator also blinks when the system unit is being powered on or off. 5. When this indicator is lit more information about the error encountered is provided in the Data Display. The left two positions indicate the number that is selected using the Select switch. The Control Panel provides operators and service representatives access to system control panel functions (refer to the previous pages for a diagram of the C . The operating System will be version V3R2M0.SYSTEM UNITS The center of the AS/400 CPU is the System Unit Control Panel. System Attention Indicator This amber indicator is lit when the system encounters a problem that requires operator intervention.

This switch controls the power supplied to the system unit. This switch should normally always be on. System Unit Serial Number You may be required to give the system unit serial number to your service representative or marketing representative to ensure that you receive the proper service and products. Keylock Switch This switch uses a unique key assigned to your system to select or limit the start up or shut down processing that is permitted. 10. 11. Manual Normal only Secure Auto Secure (locks control panel on the system unit) Manual (Attended IPL) Normal (Unattended IPL) Auto (this position will not allow you to start the system when doing an IPL unattended) 1-10 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . The Keylock may be set to one of four positions. and is not intended for use as a power-on and off switch. Emergency Power-Off Switch The Emergency Power-Off switch is provided for emergency power-off . It has priority over all other controls.SYSTEM UNITS 9.

Your function /data display will be set with 01 BN. 2 POWER PUSH BUTTON 1 POWER-ON LIGHT 4 SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT 3 PROCESSOR ACTIVE LIGHT Function/Data 01 BN 5 FUNCTION/DATA DISPLAY Enter 6 ENTER PUSH BUTTON 7 SELECT PUSH BUTTONS Function/Data 01 BN Enter A BLACK DOOR COVERS THE CONTROL PANEL ON THE 200/400 SERIES BOX. B. and D can be selected in Manual (M) mode or in Normal (N) Mode.SYSTEM UNITS 200/400 Series Black Box *This system does not have a keylock on the control panel. Types A. C. Function 02 allows you to select eight possible combinations of IPL (Initial Program Load) modes and types. THE FOLLOWING IPL/CODES DISPLAY ON THE DOOR: 01 02 03 04 11 DISPLAY SELECTED IPL SELECT IPL START IPL LAMP TEST SYSTEM REFERENCE CODE April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-11 .

The operating system will be version V3R7M0 or higher. When this indicator is lit more information about the error encountered is provided in the Function Data Display. The operating system will be version V3R2M0. Typical program activity will cause this indicator to blink. Processor Active Light This green light is lit when programs are being run by the processor. Enter Push Button This button is used to initiate the function currently selected by the Select ↑ ↓ Buttons. 4. Power On Light This green indicator is "lit" whenever the processing unit power supply is on. 5. System Attention Light This indicator is lit when the system encounters a problem that requires operator intervention. 1-12 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . Function/Data Display This screen typically displays '01 BN' However. 6. its main use is to display an eight character system reference code when IPLing (Initial Program Load) or when a system error occurs.SYSTEM UNITS The Control Panel provides operators and service representatives access to system control panel functions such as the following (refer to the previous page for a diagram of the 200/400 series system unit functions): ! 1. Power Push Button This button is used to power on or power off the system unit. The 400 also has an optical drive [CD ROM]. The 200 Black Box is a Non-RISC processor. 2. 3. Select Push Buttons These Select ↑ ↓ buttons are used to select the function that is to be performed when the Enter Button is pressed 7. The 400 Black Box is a RISC processor.

These panels on the 300/500 Series Box are BLACK.SYSTEM UNITS 300/500 Series .Black Box 4 SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT 3 PROCESSOR ACTIVE LIGHT 1 3 Processor Activity 2 Low High Low High KEYLOCK 8 4 2 POWER PUSH BUTTON Manual Normal Auto Secure 9 MODE BUTTON 1 POWER-ON LIGHT Function/Data Mode Enter 6 ENTER PUSH BUTTON 5 FUNCTION/DATA DISPLAY 01 BN 7 SELECT PUSH 01 02 03 04 11 Processor Activity Low High Low High Display Selected IPL Select IPL Start IPL Lamp Test System Reference Code BUTTONS Manual Normal Auto Secure Mode Function/Data Enter 01 02 03 04 11 Display Selected IPL Select IPL Start IPL Lamp Test System Reference Code A BLACK DOOR COVERS THE 300/500 CONTROL PANEL. April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-13 .

1-14 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . Mode Button This Button is used to change Modes [Manual. 5. The 500 Black Box is a RISC processor. Enter Push Button This button is used to initiate the function currently selected by the Select ↑ ↓ Buttons. Secure] for IPLs. 4. Plastic Black Key Keylock The plastic key card is used to unlock the Mode button so the Mode can be changed from Normal to Manual. 3. System Attention Light This indicator is lit when the system encounters a problem that requires operator intervention. The operating system will be version V3R7M0 or higher. 2. 6. The 500 also has an optical drive [CD ROM]. When this indicator is lit more information about the error encountered is provided in the Function Data Display. 7. its main use is to display an eight character system reference code when IPLing (Initial Program Load) or when a system error occurs. Normal. Reloads. 9.. Power On Light This green indicator is "lit" whenever the processing unit power supply is on. The 300 Black Box is a NON-RISC processor. etc. and Install of Licensed Internal Code and Operating System. Select Push Buttons These Select ↑ ↓ buttons are used to select the function that is to be performed when the Enter Button is pressed. Power Downs. The operating system will be version V3R2M0. Processor Active Light This green light is lit when programs are being run by the processor. Typical program activity will cause this indicator to blink. Power Push Button This button is used to power on or power off the system unit. 8.SYSTEM UNITS The Control Panel provides operators and service representatives access to system control panel functions such as the following (refer to the previous page for a diagram of the 300/500 series system unit functions): ! 1. Function/Data Display This screen typically displays '01 B' However. Auto.

SLIDE THE DOOR UP/DOWN.SYSTEM UNITS 600 Series Black Box 7 SELECT PUSH BUTTONS 6 ENTER PUSH BUTTON 5 FUNCTION/DATA DISPLAY 01 BN ↑ ↓ Enter Function 01 02 03 04 11 Display Selected IPL Select IPL Start IPL Lamp Test System Reference Code 4 SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT 3 PROCESSOR ACTIVE LIGHT POWER PUSH BUTTON 1 POWER-ON LIGHT 2 ↑ ØØØØØØØØ ↓ Enter Function 01 Display Selected IPL 02 Select IPL 03 Start IPL 04 Lamp Test 11 System Reference Code A CLEAR DOOR COVERS THE CONTROL PANEL ON THE 600 SERIES BOX. TO OPEN/CLOSE. THIS PANEL ON THE 600 SERIES BOX IS BLUE. April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-15 .

1-16 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . Power Push Button This button is used to power on or power off the system unit. ! The 600 Black Box is a RISC processor. 6. 3. Typical program activity will cause this indicator to blink. When this indicator is lit more information about the error encountered is provided in the Function Data Display. 2. 7. its main use is to display an eight character system reference code when IPLing (Initial Program Load) or when a system error occurs. Function/Data Display This screen typically displays '01 BN' However. Enter Push Button This button is used to initiate the function currently selected by the Select ↑ ↓ Buttons. 4. Power On Light This green indicator is "lit" whenever the processing unit power supply is on.SYSTEM UNITS The Control Panel provides operators and service representatives access to system control panel functions such as the following (refer to the previous page for a diagram of the 600 series system unit functions): 1. Select Push Buttons These Select ↑ ↓ buttons are used to select the function that is to be performed when the Enter Button is pressed. Processor Active Light This green light is lit when programs are being run by the processor. The operating system will be version V3R7M0 or higher. System Attention Light This indicator is lit when the system encounters a problem that requires operator intervention. The 600 also has an optical drive [CD ROM]. 5.

SYSTEM UNITS 700 Series Black Box 7 SELECT PUSH BUTTONS 6 ENTER PUSH BUTTON 5 FUNCTION/DATA DISPLAY 01 BN ↑ ↓ Enter Function 01 02 03 04 11 Display Selected IPL Select IPL Start IPL Lamp Test System Reference Code 4 SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT 3 PROCESSOR ACTIVE LIGHT POWER PUSH BUTTON 1 POWER-ON LIGHT 2 ↑ ØØØØØØØØ ↓ Enter Function 01 Display Selected IPL 02 Select IPL 03 Start IPL 04 Lamp Test 11 System Reference Code A CLEAR DOOR COVERS THE CONTROL PANEL ON THE 700 SERIES BOX. SLIDE THE DOOR UP/DOWN. April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-17 . TO OPEN/CLOSE. THIS PANEL ON THE 700 SERIES BOX IS RED/ORANGE.

6. The 700 also has an optical drive [CD ROM]. 3. 2. Processor Active Light This green light is lit when the processor is running programs. 4. The operating system will be version V3R7M0 or higher. Power On Light This green indicator is "lit" whenever the processing unit power supply is on. 1-18 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .SYSTEM UNITS The Control Panel provides operators and service representatives access to system control panel functions such as the following (refer to the previous page for a graphic of the 700 series system unit functions): 1. Power Push Button This button is used to power on or power off the system unit. its main use is to display an eight character system reference code when IPLing (Initial Program Load) or when a system error occurs. System Attention Light This indicator is lit when the system encounters a problem that requires operator intervention. When this indicator is lit more information about the error encountered is provided in the Function Data Display. Typical program activity will cause this indicator to blink. 5. Function/Data Display This screen typically displays '01 BN' However. 7. ! The 700 Black Box is a RISC processor. Select Push Buttons These Select ↑ ↓ buttons are used to select the function that is to be performed when the Enter Button is pressed. Enter Push Button This button is used to initiate the function currently selected by the Select ↑ ↓ Buttons.

SYSTEM UNITS 170 Series Black Box Function/Data 01 BN Functions FUNCTION/DATA DISPLAY 5 7 6 3 4 SELECT PUSH BUTTONS ENTER PUSH BUTTONS PROCESSOR ACTIVE LIGHT SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT 01 Display Selected IPL 02 Select IPL 03 Start IPL 04 Lamp Test 1 1 S y s Enter 1 2 1 POWER-ON LIGHT POWER BUTTON SERIAL NUMBER 2 Function/Data Functions 01 02 03 04 11 Display Selected IPL Select IPL Start IPL Lamp Test System Reference Code Enter 1 2 A BLACK DOOR COVERS THE 170 SERIES BOX. THIS PANEL ON THE 170 SERIES BOX IS RED. April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-19 . WITH A CLEAR WINDOW OVER THE CONTROL PANEL.

SYSTEM UNITS The Control Panel provides operators and service representatives access to system control panel functions such as the following (refer to the previous page for a graphic of the 170 series system unit functions): 1. When this indicator is lit more information about the error encountered is provided in the Function Data Display. Power Push Button This button is used to power on or power off the system unit. Processor Active Light This green light is lit when programs are being run by the processor. The operating system will be version V3R7M0 or higher. Power On Light This green indicator is "lit" whenever the processing unit power supply is on. 4. Select Push Buttons These Select ↑ ↓ buttons are used to select the function that is to be performed when the Enter Button is pressed. Typical program activity will cause this indicator to blink. 5. 6. Function/Data Display This screen typically displays '01 BN' However. 1-20 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . Enter Push Button This button is used to initiate the function currently selected by the Select ↑ ↓ Buttons. 2. 3. ! The 170 Black Box is a RISC processor. System Attention Light This indicator is lit when the system encounters a problem that requires operator intervention. The 170 also has an optical drive [CD ROM]. 7. its main use is to display an eight character system reference code when IPLing (Initial Program Load) or when a system error occurs.

the Power button returns to the same position). April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-21 . but there is no floppy drive.TERMINALS TERMINALS Dumb [DUM] Terminals A dumb [DUM] terminal has no brain of it’s own. is there will be 24 function keys on the keyboard. Update Serial Number 2. Offline Setup To access offline setup: 1. printer and workstation address and printer emulation type can be found in here among other options. CD drive. Test Workstation – This area can be used to set the workstation to 132 columns. Customize workstation Terminal mode. Some of the new IBM terminals have a base that looks like a processor. To power off: 1. the Power button returns to the same position). 3. then power off of the terminal. 2. Be sure power switch is in the 1 position (on newer terminals. or tape drive. Be sure the power switch is in the 0 position (on newer terminals. The power light goes out. The green power light displays after the device is powered on. Press and hold the Space bar while powering on the terminal . Three options display: 1. 3. Power-On / Off To power on: 1. Release the Space bar when the Offline Menu displays (approximately 30 seconds). Sign off. 2. One way to tell if your are using a dumb terminal. 2. it receives all of it’s information from the AS400.

TERMINALS Online Setup To access Online Setup: 1. these contain options such as cursor style. Depending on the model. Setup Display Setup Printer Setup Input Devices Color Palette Setup Calculator Usually the first two options are used. Press the Setup key on the left side of the keyboard. autodim and print key. different options display. 3. for example: 1. we can change the cursor mode simply by positioning the cursor on the desired mode and pressing the Space bar. 1-22 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . 2. 5. For example in Setup Display. 4. 2. row/column indicator.

The power light goes out. floppy drive.C. 2. The green power light will display after the device is powered on. session.C. – PERSONAL COMPUTER P. April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-23 .C. One way you can tell if you are using a PC is if the keyboard has 12 function keys and a hard drive unit is attached (processor) and there is a CD drive. Power-On 1. this means the AS/400 recognizes the PC. PC Message Indicators The following symbols display at the bottom of the PC screen when the PC is emulated to the AS/400: SA II IM KS KB – – – – – System Available [This must be highlighted. Be sure the Power push button is in the OUT position (on newer PCs the Power button returns to the same position). GM Access also requires a P. press the Insert key again.to remove Insert Mode.” Other “hot keys” might be Ctl+ ESC or Alt + Tab. etc. 2. Power-Off 1. Spreadsheets. users very often like to “hot key” between the AS/400 and another P.P. – PERSONAL COMPUTER Not only can a PC be used as a workstation. MW – P. the Power button returns to the same position). a command/job is being processed. you are using a PC.C. it can be used for using MSWord. The power must be on for both the monitor and the processor. or tape drive. Insert text mode – This is highlighted when the Insert key is pressed . The power must be on for both the monitor and the processor.] Message Waiting Input Inhibited. Be sure the Power push button is in the IN position (on newer PCs.C. Holding down the Alt key and then pressing Esc is the most common “hot key. the screen will be locked until processing completes. Caps lock activated Characters are stored in type ahead memory and will display when the current activity is finished.

– PERSONAL COMPUTER SSS Devices These devices are P. 1-24 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . and diagnose other types of vehicle performance problems through the use of the TECH2 (Portable Diagnostic Tool). systems used by Saturn stores in the Service Department. Technicians use this system to perform engine control system repairs. It actually is a large gray and red steel cabinet with a Computer in it. The SSS is a Service Stall System.P.C.C.

F1 becomes F13. This action does not delete any information previously typed. F3 becomes F15. The key location on your keyboard may differ.usually Shift/Tab). This action does not delete any information previously typed. to press F13. Press Print/Print Scrn to print what is currently displayed on your screen. Press both the Shift and Roll keys together to move information up or down the screen or press the PageUp or PageDown keys. Press Field Exit or Field + to accept the information you have just typed (both keys perform the same function. Each time you press Backspace the cursor moves back one space.USE THE KEYBOARD USE THE KEYBOARD The following table describes the most commonly used keys. F2 becomes F14. To press F21. press the Shift and Roll ↓ keys simultaneously to move toward the end of the information or press PageDown if you are working at a PC. press and hold the Shift key and press F9. While the Shift key is pressed. Press Backspace to move the cursor back one character at a time. Press Back Tab to move the cursor to the beginning of the previous field. • The typed information is right-justified (moves to the right side of the field). This action causes the following to occur: • The characters to the right of the cursor (in the active field only) are deleted. Press the Shift and Roll ↑ keys simultaneously to move toward the beginning of the information or press PageUp if you are working at a PC . • The cursor moves to the beginning of the next field. Key(s) Tab Key Back Tab Key Function Press Tab to move the cursor to the next field. press Shift plus a Function key to perform a function if the Function key is F13 through F24. • If More or a + sign displays at the bottom of your screen. the Field + key is normally used for numeric fields). Backspace Key Delete Key Field Exit Key/Field + Key Enter Key Reset Key Print Key/Print Scrn Shift/Roll Keys or PageUp/Page Down Keys April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-25 . Keyboard errors are identified by a four-digit message flashing at the bottom-left corner of the screen. etc. the character the cursor is on is deleted. however. you have reached the end of the information. Each time you press Delete. Press Enter to accept the information you type or to choose an option from a menu. Press Reset to correct a keyboard error. For example. • If Bottom displays at the bottom of your screen. (PCs . If you are using a PC. press and hold the Shift key and press F1. The copy of your screen is also referred to as a “Print Screen”. Printing the screen is very useful when you need to research a screen error or system message. Press Delete to delete information.

For PCs. right. Use this key to respond to system messages (e. The System Operator message screen displays. Dashes will display at the bottom of the screen. type 6 and press Enter. press the Shift and SysReq keys simultaneously. The F1 key is the same as the Help key. To respond. F1 is the Help key. Loading the next tape volume).g.USE THE KEYBOARD Key(s) Cursor Movement Arrow Keys Function Press the Cursor Movement Arrow keys to move your cursor to the left. Press the Help key to view additional help information about AS/400 system messages that display on your screen. The Numeric key pad can be used when you type numerical information. up or down. System Request is used in SALESLINE XL and SERVICELINE XL to bookmark. ↑ ↓ ← → Help Key Numeric Keys System Request Key 1-26 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . then.

. : Workstation ID. . : Your User Name . . . Program/procedure . . . . . Signing on to the system initiates an interactive job. . . . . . . type SIGNOFF and press Enter. Menu . At Your Password field. . If you type an incorrect User ID and Password more than three times. 3. EEEEEEEEE DDDDDDDD SSSSSSSSS EEEEEEEEE DDDDDDDDD SSSSSSSSS EEE DDD DDD SSS EEEEEEEEE DDD DDD SSSSSSSSS EEEEEEEEE DDD DDD SSSSSSSSS EEE DDD DDD SSS EEEEEEEEE DDDDDDDDD SSSSSSSSS Dealer Systems Software Version 4. . .4 EEEEEEEEE DDDDDDDD SSSSSSSSS (C) Copyright 1994. Sign Off Signing off the system ends an interactive job. . At a command line. April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-27 . . type your password and press Enter. . the Sign On screen displays. : Subsystem . These are two ways to sign off: • Or • Type the Sign Off option number from a main menu (usually 90) and press Enter. . . 2. . . . . Your Password . See the next sections. All rights reserved (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. . . . Depending on how the user ID is setup. . . type your user identification code (User ID) and press Field Exit. . . the system varies off the workstation. . 1980 1998 S1020334 QINTER W5 The name of the subsystem that the workstation is currently running in – QCTL is the subsystem for the system console and QINTER is the subsystem for all other workstations. At Your User Name field. Serial Number of the AS/400 Sign On System . You can assign any main menu to a User ID so this screen automatically displays after sign on. . Current library . AS/400 MAIN MENU / DEALERLINE MAIN MENU. . . .SIGN ON SIGN ON When you turn on the power to your workstation. . . . . . . the AS/400 Main Menu or the DEALERLINE Main Menu displays. . Workstation ID 1. . . . . . . . .

7. 8. 10. 1-28 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .AS/400 MAIN MENU (MAIN) AS/400 MAIN MENU (MAIN) After signing on. The AS/400 Main Menu (MAIN) displays eleven options that access AS/400 Main Menus. QSECOFR should only be used for System Saves and IBM operating system upgrades. When the IBM User ID QSECOFR is used to sign on to the system. 5. the menu currently displayed will be assigned as your initial menu. 1998. User tasks Office tasks General system tasks Files. and folders Programming Communications Define or change the system Problem handling Display a menu Information Assistant options Client Access tasks AS/400 Main Menu System: S1020334 90. 6. 1980. 11. 2. 4. MAIN Select one of the following: 1. the AS/400 Main Menu will automatically display. these menus are used by EDS Representatives for troubleshooting. 3. Sign off Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F23=Set initial menu (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. When you press F23. F13=Information Assistant F23. the AS/400 Main Menu or the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000) displays.changes the initial menu that automatically displays after signing on. Set initial menu. . QSECOFR should NEVER be used for daily work. libraries. 9.

below that is an arrow (===>). F23=Set Initial Menu. is used to identify each menu. Provides assistance when entering or selecting a command. type an option number or a command. Located below the Command Line are the Function Keys applicable to the menu. Message Line Located below the Function Keys is the area of the screen that displays messages. When you press F23. Command Line Function Keys April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-29 . As with all menus. At the command line. the menu title is AS/400 Main Menu. F13=Information Assistant. In this case. the menu currently displayed will be assigned as your initial menu. one of the following happens: • Another menu displays • A command prompt displays • An informational screen displays • A command is executed Located below the menu options is the Selection or command prompt. In this case. F3=Exit. Ends the current task and returns to the screen you started from. located in the upper left corner. To the right of the arrow is the Command Line. A menu tile at the top center identifies the menu. Cancels the current menu and returns to the previous menu. F9=Retrieve. F4=Prompt. MAIN is the menu ID for the AS/400 Main Menu. when you type an option at the command line and press Enter. Accesses IBM User Support and Education Menu. Displays the last command you typed and executed from the command line (and any parameters you selected). Press F23 to change the initial menu that automatically displays after signing on. F12=Cancel.AS/400 MAIN MENU (MAIN) The following table describes the fields on the AS/400 Main Menu (MAIN): Field Menu ID Menu Title Menu Options Description A unique menu ID. Menu options let you choose the general task you want to perform when you do not know the name of the AS/400 command that performs the same task.

Option 6 . Option 5 .Problem Handling This option allows you to start solving general system problems. You can also work with security through this area. and what is new in the current release of the AS/400 system.Office Tasks This option allows you to process text.Client Access Tasks Select this option for user and/or administrative tasks associated with Client Access Tasks. how to comment on AS/400 information. and Folders Allows you to work with user data files. display or change your library list.Programming This option allows you to complete programming tasks by using the options from the programming menu. display or send messages.Information Assistant Options This option will tell you where to look for AS/400 information. Option 10 . and change your user profile.General Systems Tasks This option allows the following tasks to be completed on all jobs on the system: • use communications • use security • monitor and control jobs • monitor and control messages • display statuses • display system messages • save objects • restore objects Option 4 . install or request hardware device information.Display a Menu This option allows you to select the menu screen to see rather than selecting the menu by option number.Communications Allows you to control and configure your communications network.Define or Change the System This allows you to configure. Libraries. Option 3 . Option 8 .Files. Option 7 .User Tasks Allows you to complete tasks related to your own job. Option 11 .AS/400 MAIN MENU (MAIN) Option 1 . Option 9 . for example display or change your job or output field. 1-30 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . libraries and folders. submit batch jobs. Option 2 . handle documents and folders and manage other office activities.

7. DMM000 DEALERLINE XL Main Menu Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 5. The DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000) displays nine options that allow you to access the DEALERLINE XL applications. DEALERLINE XL Version 90. BUSINESSLINE PARTSLINE SRS PARTS SERVICELINE REPORTLINE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SALESLINE GM DEALER COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM RAPID 2000 23. 8. 6. Sign Off Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-31 . 9.DEALERLINE XL MAIN MENU (DMM000) DEALERLINE XL MAIN MENU (DMM000) After signing on. 4. either the AS/400 Main Menu or the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000) displays.

F3=Exit. changes the initial menu that automatically displays after signing on. As with all menus. the menu title is DEALERLINE XL Main Menu. Cancels the current menu and returns to the previous menu. F16=AS/400 Main Menu. the menu currently displayed will be assigned as your initial menu. Ends the current task and returns to the screen you started from. Displays the last command you typed and executed from the command line (and any parameters you selected). To the right of the arrow is the Command Line. DMM000 is the menu ID for the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu. A menu title at the top center identifies the menu. Message Line Located below the Function Keys is the area of the screen that displays messages. when you type an option at the command line and press Enter. F9=Retrieve. When you press F23. located in the upper left corner.DEALERLINE XL MAIN MENU (DMM000) The following table describes the fields on the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000): Field Menu ID Menu Title Menu Options Description A unique menu ID. one of the following happens: • Another menu displays • A command prompt displays • An informational screen displays • A command is executed Located below the menu options is the Selection or command prompt. below that is an arrow (===>). Accesses IBM User Support and Education Menu. is used to identify each menu. In this case. Command Line Function Keys 1-32 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . type an option number or a command. F23=Set Initial. Located below the Command Line are the Function Keys applicable to the menu. displays the AS/400 Main Menu. At the command line. Menu options let you choose the general task you want to perform when you do not know the name of the AS/400 command that performs the same task. F13=Information Assistant. F4=Prompt. In this case. F12=Cancel. Provides assistance when entering or selecting a command.

To display the System Request Menu: 1. Note: If you are using a PC. ! Options 1. Transfer to previous system 13. Start system request at home system 14. Press and hold the Shift key. Press Enter. April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-33 .. 2. 4. Display messages 5. End previous request 3. Start system request at previous system 11. Send a message 6. The System Request menu displays the following options displaying and responding to system messages: System Request Select one of the following: System: S102PCXM 1. Transfer to home system Selection ===> F3=Exit F12=Cancel ( ) OPYRIGHT IBM ORP 1980 1999 More. or Alt+ Esc. it could also be Shift + Esc. press Alt + SysReq Depending on key mapping. 3. 2. 1999 Bottom. System Request Select one of the following: 90. Display system operator messages 7. alternative sign on. Sign off System: S1039845 Selection ===> F3=Exit F12=Cancel (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP. and 6 are the most common options used from the System Request menu. Press and hold the Sys Rq / Attn key. Display sign on for alternative job 2. 1980. Display current job 4. Display work station user 10. Release both keys.SYSTEM REQUEST MENU SYSTEM REQUEST MENU Display and respond to system messages..

type the menu option number for the function or procedure you want to perform. F12=Cancel.SYSTEM REQUEST MENU The following table describes the fields on the System Request menu: Field Menu ID Menu Title Menu Options Description The System Request menu does not have a menu ID. A command line is not available from the System Request menu – only a selection line. F3=Exit. A menu title at the top center identifies the menu. Ends the current task and returns to the screen you started from. Menu options let you choose the general task you want to perform when you do not know the name of the AS/400 command that performs the same task. the menu title is System Request. In this case. At the Selection Line. Located below the Selection Line are the Function Keys applicable to the menu. Only menu options can be used from the System Request menu. Cancels the current menu and returns to the previous menu. Selection Line Function Keys 1-34 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .

Display work station user This will show you the user and workstation information for this terminal.SYSTEM REQUEST MENU Option 1 . Option 7 . The system name located in the upper right corner of the System Request menu indicates the current system on which the interactive job was running when you presses the System Request Key. Option 11 – Transfer to the previous system Use this option to suspend the job at the current system and transfer back to the alternative interactive job on the previous system (the source or client system for the current system).Display system operator messages This will display any messages delivered to the system. The default is to display the System Request menu on the previous system.only use to end inquiry functions. The system name in the upper right corner of the System Request menu indicates the current system on which the interactive job was running when you pressed the System Request Key. The home system either displays the System Request menu or starts the program specified in the SRQ10PGM keyword on the Start Pass Through (STRPASTHR) command. The previous system either displays the System Request menu or starts the program specified in the SRQ10PGM keyword on the Start Pass-Through (STRPASTHR) command.End previous request If you are in the middle of a job you wish to end and there is no Function or Command key to Exit or Cancel.Display sign on for alternative job This allows you to run multiple sessions from one terminal. this is an alternative. Option 10 – Start System Request at previous system Use this option to suspend the job at the current system and transfer back to the previous system (the source or client system for the current system).) Option 3 . This information is beneficial for troubleshooting. The system name located in the upper right corner of the System Request menu indicates the current system on which the interactive job was running when you pressed the System Request key. They include forms changes and media needs. April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-35 . (Do not use to end batches . It is recommended this option NOT be used! Option 2 . the Sign On screen displays. Option 6 . Option 13 – Start system request at home system Use this option to suspend the job at the current system and transfer back to the home system (the first system on which you entered the pass-through command). Option 4 .Display messages This will allow you to view messages sent to your user ID or workstation.Send a message This allows you to send messages to users and/or workstations. The default is to display the System Request menu on the home system. Option 5 . If there is no alternative interactive job currently running.Display current job This option gives details about the job you are running.

The system name in the upper right corner of the System Request menu indicates the current system on which the interactive job was running when you pressed the System Request key.SYSTEM REQUEST MENU Option 14. the Sign-On screen displays.Transfer to the home system Use this option to suspend the job at the current system and transfer back to the alternative interactive job on the home system (the first system on which you entered the pass-through command). 1-36 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . Option 90 .Sign off Select this option to end current job. If there is no alternative interactive job currently running.

. Position the cursor at any field that displays an asterisk and press F4 to display the list of valid field entries. . . The Initialize Tape (INZTAP) screen displays. . . . . . there is a list of valid field entries you can display and choose from. . . . _______ *NONE *BLANK *MOUNTED *YES Name Character value. . . This screen includes a list of possible field entries: Initialize Tape (INZTAP) Type choices. .PROMPTABLE FIELDS (F4) PROMPTABLE FIELDS (F4) If a field on any screen displays an asterisk (*). *MOUNTED *YES. . . . . At a command line. . With your cursor positioned at the Tape Density field. . . *QIC120. : CHARACTER Tape density . . . April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-37 . New volume identifier New owner identifier . *DEVTYPE *EBCDIC *REWIND *NO *DEVTYPE. . . . . . .. . Type the correct tape density at the Tape density field. . . press Enter. . Volume identifier . . . . . . .. . . . . type INZTAP and press F4. . *QIC525 *EBCDIC. *FIRST Tape density . *UNLOAD *NO. . . . . . press Field Exit then Enter. . . . *YES F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys F5=Refresh F12=Cancel Bottom F13=How to use this display 2. Check for active files . . press F4. The following screen displays: Specify Value for Parameter DENSITY Type choice. press Enter. . . . *ASCII *REWIND. . Type . . . . . Character value. Clear . . *DEVTYPE *QIC120 10000 *QIC525 16000 *QIC1000 *QIC2GB *QIC3040 *FMT3480 38000 *FMT3490E F3=Exit F5=Refresh *CTGTYPE *FMT3570 *FMT3570E *FMT3590 *FMT3590E 1600 3200 6250 *FMT2GB 43200 *FMT5GB *FMT7GB F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys 3. . . For example: 1. . . . . . . Tape device . . Code . End of tape option . . *NO. . *NONE. . . .

(This Stand Alone printer would use CAT5 cable and be connected through a hub.129. A TCP/IP printer communicates through a network controller which would create a virtual device description. The connectors on the parallel cable are about 2 inches wide and are rectangular in shape. The twisted pair cable will be connected to a balun which is a 6 inch cable that on one side has a twinax connector on it. The cable connection for a serial printer will either be a twinax cable or twisted pair cable.TCP/IP AND TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTERS TCP/IP AND TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTERS EDS uses TCP/IP and TWINAX ATTACHED printers – the difference between the two is how the printers communicate with the AS/400. T-connector or may be connected directly into a twinax connector on the printer. this card allows the printer to communicate with the AS/400. TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTERS set ups for printers. and then signoff of the workstation that you believe the printer is parallel to and then power off the workstation.129. An easy way to find out if the printer is parallel is to leave the printer powered on. An example would be port 1 address 5. the exception would be a printer attached to an external LAN adapter card such as a Mark Net Pro card. gray or beige in color and is approx.82. 1. A TWINAX ATTACHED printer communicates through a workstation controller card. TCP/IP Stand Alone printer CABLE will ALWAYS be CAT5 to a hub. (Parallel cable for a Laser printer can have a maximum length of 10 ft.) Usually a TCP/IP printer is a Laser printer. and has a controller address with a port/address. ONLY). the printer should initialize/response as if it was just powered on. The back of the terminal or PC has a printer port and this is where the parallel cable is connected to from the printer. A TCP/IP printer needs an I/P address (Internet Protocol) – an example of an I/P address is 10. 2. and needs an I/P address (an example of an I/P address is 10. Parallel Attached Printer – Parallel attached printers receive all of their information from the terminal or PC they are physically connected to – the printer address must be set up in the terminal or PC the printer is physically connected to.82. 1-38 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .110 TCP/IP Printers are considered a NETWORK printer.110). and the other side has a RJ45 end on it. The twinax cable has about a ½-inch wide round silver connector and is either connected to a pigtail. Serial Printer – (Stand Alone) Serial Printers receive their printer address and information from a serial card or I/O card. then power the workstation back on. Laser printers will have a menu option on the control panel that allows an I/P address to be configured and will also have an I/O card installed. The printer is connected to the terminal or PC by a bi-directional parallel cable which is usually black. 6 ft to 25 ft in length.

_____ C. C. List one way to sign off your terminal. Name 3 pieces of equipment considered peripheral devices.EXERCISE 1.EXERCISE SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW . _____ B. you should: _____ _____ _____ _____ 3. At the Main Help Menu In the middle of an application At the sign-on screen At a command line 4. and to display a list of valid field entries if a field has an asterisk (*). _____________________________________________________ 6. D.SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW . A. C. _____ D. What does OS/400 stand for? _________________________ At the end of each work day. _____ F9 F23 Display the last command you ran from the command line End the current task and return to the display from which the task was started Display additional fields for a command. Before you can turn off a workstation. ___________________________ ___________________________ ___________________________ April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-39 . B. Indicate which key to press to solve each of the conditions below: F3 F4 A. D. Change the initial menu (the first menu you see after you sign-on) in your user profile 5. Sign off the workstation Power down AS/400 Perform an IPL All of the above 2. it must be: _____ _____ _____ _____ A. B.

The AS/400 Processor Active light indicates: _____ A. How can you tell if a printer is parallel or serial attached? 13.SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW . _____ _____ True False 10. If the cursor keeps blinking on a dumb terminal and you find it annoying. ___________________________ ___________________________ 8. _____ B. How can you tell if your system is using a RISC Processor? 12. _____ C. What is a CPU? The contents of permanent storage are lost when the AS/400 is powered off. What is the difference between a Host Site (main store) and a Remote Site? 1-40 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .EXERCISE 7. Name 2 types of software programs found on your AS/400. how do you change the cursor to a solid block? 14. 9. A system problem has occurred Users are signed on to the system CPU activity is occurring 11. What is an I/O card? What does it do? Is it on a parallel attached or serial printer? 15.

Or From any menu. Keyboard. and you will be unable to end the job. printer. This is the IBM program that works in the background managing your system. False. 6.Exercise 1. 4. you may need to end the job that was processing or vary the workstation back on before it is usable. DEALERLINE Application Software. A = F9 B = F3 C = F4 D = F23 At a command line. monitor. 14. type SIGNOFF and press Enter. The Central Processing Unit (CPU) is the "brain" of the computer which processes information. C. Press the Setup key on the left side of the keyboard and go into Setup Display. job that was processing can become locked up. 2. C. type the option number to Sign Off. Position the cursor on the desired cursor mode and press the Space bar. The system has a CD ROM Drive OR the Operating System is V3R7 or higher.EXERCISE Solutions to System and Equipment Overview . a serial connector is about a ½ inch wide. Also turning the workstation off and back on will indicate the printer is parallel attached if the printer jumps when the workstation is powered back on. 9. 8. The easiest way is to look at the connectors. 12. 15. 13. If the Sign On screen does not display after the workstation is powered off. You should sign off your workstation whenever you leave it unattended. The Remote Site is connected to the main store by modems and data circuit (telephone line). Operating System. CPU activity is occurring 11. Also. 5. An I/O card allows a serial attached printer to communicate with the AS/400. A. 10. April 2000 System and Equipment Overview 1-41 . 3.A parallel attached printer has a connector that is about 2 inches wide. 7. Operating System/400. The Host Site (main store) houses the AS/400.SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW .

.

.

..................... 8 Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series ............. 27 IPL........ 26 Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power-On............................. 11 Power Down Due to Pending Emergency...................................................................................................................................... 1 BEIGE BOX MODELS C........ POWER UP / DOWN ............................................................. 25 Forced Power Down ................ 18 Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power-On........................EXERCISE... E.................................................... 4 Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off ................................ 3 Control Panel Graphics ............... 7 Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power-On. F ... 22 Control Panel Graphics .............................................................................................. 30 April 2000 IPL.............................................................. 3 Power Down Due to Pending Emergency.....2 IPL/Power Up/ Down Table of Contents OVERVIEW. 22 Power Down Due to Pending Emergency........ D..................... 11 Control Panel Graphics ................................................ 23 Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off ....................................................................................................................... Power Up / Down 2-i ................................................................................... 19 Black Box 300/500 Series ............................................................................................... 6 Forced Power Down ........................ 15 Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off .............. 17 Forced Power Down .............

2-ii System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .Table of Contents This page intentionally left blank.

See the Backups chapter for more information. it loads the Operating System (OS/400) into main storage from auxiliary storage. checks the internal system hardware. An IPL should be performed once a week. If you choose the option to perform a DEALERLINE nightly backup. It is recommended a DEALERLINE Nightly Backup with a power down be completed once a week by selecting the Power Down with DEALERLINE Backup option. Before performing an IPL. the backup must be submitted to run after 22:00:00. If the DEALERLINE nightly backup procedure requires a second tape cartridge. Power Up / Down OVERVIEW An IPL (Initial Program Load) starts the AS/400. and prepares the system for operation.m. The system console must always remain powered on during any IPL. you can also select an option to schedule a DEALERLINE nightly backup to process first. with a Power Down. the second tape cartridge must be loaded and the message to load the second tape must be answered before 5:00 a.OVERVIEW IPL. then an IPL [Backup with Power Down]. April 2000 IPL. Power Up / Down 2-1 . these should not be any system activity – the system should be dedicated. An unattended (normal) IPL can be completed by the System Administrator regardless if the AS/400 is powered On or Off.

OVERVIEW This page intentionally left blank. 2-2 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .

F BEIGE BOX MODELS C.IPL 03 Start IPL 04 Lamp Test 11 System Reference Code Data Function Manual Normal Data 01 KEYLOCK SWITCH Functions O1 Display Selected IPL 02 Select IPL A . D.BEIGE BOX MODELS C. D. E. E. F Control Panel Graphics 9404 Control Panel SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT Power On 9406 Control Panel Processor Active System Attention POWER LIGHT POWER SWITCH POWER SWITCH Power On Delayed Off POWER LIGHT Processor Active System Attention Delayed Off S/M SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT FUNCTION/ DATA DISPLAY SELECT SWITCH ENTER BUTTON Function 01 Select Function O1 Display Selected IPL 02 Select IPL A .IPL 03 Start IPL 04 Lamp Test 11 System Reference Code FUNCTION/ DATA DISPLAY Enter Secure Auto SELECT SWITCH ENTER BUTTON 9402 Control Panel POWER LIGHT Select Manual Normal KEYLOCK SWITCH Enter Secure Auto Power On Functions Delayed Off POWER SWITCH Select Enter O1 02 03 04 11 Display Selected IPL Select IPL Start IPL Lamp Test System Reference Code Processor Active System Attention SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT Normal Manual KEYLOCK SWITCH Function/ Data 01 Secure Auto SELECT SWITCH ENTER BUTTON FUNCTION/DATA DISPLAY April 2000 IPL. Power Up / Down 2-3 .

unplug the AS/400 electrical cord). Complete the following steps to power down the system (from power on) to prepare for a pending or imminent emergency or disaster. After the electrical work is complete or the natural disaster is over. The power light will begin to blink. 5. The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter D) that will change during the power down.BEIGE BOX MODELS C. The screen will go blank in approximately 2 to 4 minutes. D. 4. F Power Down Due to Pending Emergency These steps are for powering off Beige Box Models C. If you are unable to use a workstation to power down the AS/400. Wait for the Power light on the AS/400 to go Off. 3. you can force the AS/400 down by using the control panel – go to step 4. c. or F. 2. 6. go to step 2. MSECOFR. At a command line. force the AS/400 down using the control panel: a. continue to step 7. If you are unable to use a workstation to power down the AS/400. E. E. D. Push the white Power switch down. and power to the building is restored. to Delayed Off. Sign on at the system console with a user ID that has security officer authorization. 2-4 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . type PWRDWNSYS *IMMED and press Enter. 1. or if electrical power is being shut off due to transformers being replaced. then continue to step 5. for example a hurricane. Wait for the Power light on the AS/400 to go Off. If this is an emergency that you only have minutes or seconds to prepare for. Unplug the electrical cord from the wall outlet for UPS (if no UPS. Turn the Key on the AS/400 control panel to Manual. for example. Power Off UPS (if the AS/400 is attached to a UPS). b.

the Sign On screen displays at all terminals left powered on. Verify 01 B displays in the Function/Data window. then power On UPS. 15. Verify the system console is powered on. The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter C) that will increment during the IPL. Verify the power light on the AS/400 is Off. Sign onto the system. F 7. Verify the Key on the AS/400 control panel is set to Normal. April 2000 IPL. 8. or the AS/400 electrical cord is plugged back into the wall outlet. address 0 in QCTL subsystem. D. Push the white Power switch up. plug the electrical cord back in the wall for the AS/400. The switch returns to the center position and the power light blinks momentarily. If no UPS. 9. E. After the IPL is complete (approximately 20 to 30 minutes). 13. ! The system console is the device at port 0. 10. plug the electrical cord back in the wall outlet for UPS. continue to step 9 to begin an Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off. Power Up / Down 2-5 . 16. then stays lit.BEIGE BOX MODELS C. After the power is restored to the building. 11. After UPS is powered on. 14. 12.

! The system console is the device at port 0. F Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off These steps are for Beige Box Models C. Verify the power light is Off. the Sign On screen displays at all terminals left powered on. E.BEIGE BOX MODELS C. Push the white Power switch up. 7. 6. 8. Verify the system console is powered on. then stays lit. D. Verify the Key on the AS/400 control panel is set to Normal. Verify 01 B displays in the Function/Data window. Light is off (possibly due to a power failure). or F. The switch returns to the center position and the power light blinks momentarily. D. 4. The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter C) that will increment during the IPL. address 0 in QCTL subsystem. Follow these steps to IPL the AS/400 when the Power 1. After the IPL is complete (approximately 20 to 30 minutes). 3. E. Sign onto the system. 2-6 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . 5. 2.

or F. The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter D) that will change during the power down. ! a. AND if you are instructed by an EDS Representative. The power light will begin to blink. Using the IBM manuals. E. D. e. 6. This procedure should only be used if all devices are locked up and/or the amber system attention light is on. After the power light goes off. Press the Select button to display Function 12. D. After reading the description of all steps/procedures are completed. locate the SRC codes. F Forced Power Down These steps are to force a power down for Beige Box Models C. Power Up / Down 2-7 . 4. Push the white Power switch down. Press the Enter button. b. Record the SRC numbers for Function 11. Record the SRC numbers for Function 12. to Delayed Off. 5. The amber system attention light will be on. 2. Record any Service Reference Code (SRC) numbers in the Function/Data window. 1. 3. Verify the power light is On. April 2000 IPL. turn the Key on the AS/400 control panel to Normal. Do not power down if SRC numbers display in the Function/Data window AND the amber system attention light is NOT on. the code. then follow the instructions for an Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off. d. c.BEIGE BOX MODELS C. verify Turn the Key on the AS/400 control panel to Manual. E.

Press F5 until the following message displays: (No jobs to display). wait until they complete before continuing. At a command line. The following message should display near the center of the screen: (No jobs to display). D.BEIGE BOX MODELS C. At a command line. Backup DEALERLINE Database Power Down System. type WRKSBSJOB QBATCH and press Enter. Complete the following steps to perform an unattended (normal) IPL. if the AS/400 is already powered-on: 1. E. F Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power-On These steps are for powering on Beige Box Models C. a. once a week. 2-8 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . and no jobs are processing. MSECOFR. Ensure all users are signed off the system. b. for example. including SALESLINE users. D. 2. have the corresponding user(s) sign off the system. If any jobs display. It is recommended an unattended IPL from Power On be performed from the Backup Menu (SAM100). The following procedure explains how to perform an unattended (normal) IPL. E. Sign on at the system console with a user ID that has security officer authorization. The following message should display near the center of the screen: (No jobs to display). or F. Press F5 until the following message displays: (No jobs to display). If any jobs display. type WRKSBSJOB QINTER and press Enter. option 2.

as the Function. wait until these jobs complete before continuing. April 2000 IPL. . . .. E. S1025232 Work with Subsystem Jobs Subsystem .. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with spooled files Job Opt Job User Type GMXS_SVR POLLDCS MSECOFR BATCH POLLDCS POLLPREP MSECOFR BATCH POLLPREP POLLRAPID MSECOFR BATCH POLLRAPID MSECOFR BATCH 5=Work with 13=Disconnect -----Status----ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE 6=Release 7=Display message Function PGM-CA4000CL Function PGM-CDPOLLCL PGM-CDPOLLCL DLY-16:30:00 DLY-16:30:00 PGM-CRPOLLCL PGM-CRPOLLCL Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F9=Retrieve F11=Display schedule data ! 3. . type WRKSBSJOB DLCOMMSBS and press Enter.. ..BEIGE BOX MODELS C.: DLCOMMSBS Type options. . At a command line. . . . or GMXS_SVR. . If the function is not DLY.. If Job POLLPREP displays with DLY. press Enter. POLLRAPID or POLLDCS displays with PGM. F c. on these jobs. . as the function. or PGM. D.. and no other jobs display. .. continue to step 3. . Power Up / Down 2-9 . Verify the key on the AS/400 control panel is set to Normal.. . . .

IPL source . . . . . Leave the terminal powered on. . . b. . *IMMED and At the Delay time. c. . displays at all terminals After the IPL is complete (approximately 20 to 30 minutes). 2-10 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . . D 5. . 6. . . Restart after power down . *IMMED 3600 *YES *PANEL *CNTRLD. . . . At the How to end field. leave the default value *PANEL Press Enter to begin the power down with restart (IPL). Sign onto the system. *YES *PANEL. in place of the default value. .BEIGE BOX MODELS C. . The Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) screen displays. Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) Type choices. E. a Sign On screen left powered on. if *CNTRLD field. . A. . At a command line. D. The Function Data window displays numbers that will increment during the IPL. e. if *CNTRLD . . d. B. . Complete the following : a. type PWRDWNSYS and press F4. type *YES At the IPL source field. *NOLIMIT *NO. *IMMED Seconds. . . F 4. . leave the default value 3600 At the Restart after power down field. . 7. . . How to end . press Enter. type press Field Exit. Delay time.

WITH A CLEAR WINDOW OVER THE CONTROL PANEL. 1 2 THIS PANEL ON THE 170 SERIES BOX IS RED. April 2000 IPL. Power Up / Down 2-11 .Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series Control Panel Graphics 170 Series Box Function/Data 01 BN Functions FUNCTION/DATA DISPLAY Select push buttons 01 02 03 04 Enter Push Button Processor Active Light System Attention Light Enter Display Selected IPL Select IPL Start IPL Lamp Test 11 System Ref ere nce Co de 1 2 POWER-ON LIGHT POWER BUTTON SERIAL NUMBER Function/Data Functions 01 02 03 04 11 Display Selected IPL Select IPL Start IPL Lamp Test System Reference Code Enter A BLACK DOOR COVERS THE 170 SERIES BOX.

Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series 200/400 Series Box POWER PUSH BUTTON POWER-ON LIGHT SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT PROCESSOR ACTIVE LIGHT Function/Data 01 BN FUNCTION/DATA DISPLAY Enter ENTER PUSH BUTTON SELECT PUSH BUTTONS Function/Data 01 BN Enter A BLACK DOOR COVERS THE CONTROL PANEL ON THE 200/400 SERIES BOX. THE FOLLOWING IPL/CODES DISPLAY ON THE DOOR: 01 02 03 04 11 DISPLAY SELECTED IPL SELECT IPL START IPL LAMP TEST SYSTEM REFERENCE CODE 2-12 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .

THIS PANEL ON THE 600 SERIES BOX IS BLUE. SLIDE THE DOOR UP/DOWN.Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series 600 Series Box SELECT PUSH BUTTONS ENTER PUSH BUTTON FUNCTION/DATA DISPLAY 01 BN ↑ ↓ Enter Function 01 02 03 04 11 Display Selected IPL Select IPL Start IPL Lamp Test System Reference Code SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT PROCESSOR ACTIVE LIGHT POWER-ON LIGHT POWER PUSH BUTTON ↑ ØØØØØØØØ ↓ Enter Function 01 Display Selected IPL 02 Select IPL 03 Start IPL 04 Lamp Test 11 System Reference Code A CLEAR DOOR COVERS THE CONTROL PANEL ON THE 600 SERIES BOX. April 2000 IPL. Power Up / Down 2-13 . TO OPEN/CLOSE.

2-14 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series 700 Series Box SELECT PUSH BUTTONS ENTER PUSH BUTTON FUNCTION/DATA DISPLAY 01 BN ↑ ↓ Enter Function 01 02 03 04 11 Display Selected IPL Select IPL Start IPL Lamp Test System Reference Code SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT PROCESSOR ACTIVE LIGHT POWER-ON LIGHT POWER PUSH BUTTON ↑ ØØØØØØØØ ↓ Enter Function 01 Display Selected IPL 02 Select IPL 03 Start IPL 04 Lamp Test 11 System Reference Code A CLEAR DOOR COVERS THE CONTROL PANEL ON THE 700 SERIES BOX. SLIDE THE DOOR UP/DOWN. TO OPEN/CLOSE. THIS PANEL ON THE 700 SERIES BOX IS RED/ORANGE.

The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter D) that will change during the power down. Press the Enter button again. type PWRDWNSYS *IMMED and press Enter. then go to step 5. Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows below the Function/Data window) until 02 displays in the Function/Data window. At a command line. Complete the following steps to power down the system (from power on) to prepare for a pending or imminent emergency or disaster. 1. for example. force the AS/400 down using the control panel: a. The screen will go blank in approximately 2 to 4 minutes.Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series Power Down Due to Pending Emergency These steps are for powering off the Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series. or if electrical power is being shut off due to transformers being replaced. e. 4. for example a hurricane. 2. f. Press the Enter button. Power Up / Down 2-15 . b. Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows below the Function/Data window) until 02 B M displays in the Function/Data window. ! g. If a zero ( ) and a flashing question mark ( ) display on the right side of the Function/Data display. c. 02 displays in the Function/Data window. Press the Enter button. April 2000 IPL. 3. Wait for the Power light on the AS/400 to go Off (light next to the white Power button). MSECOFR. If this is an emergency that you only have minutes or seconds to prepare for. 02 B M displays in the Function/Data window. d. If you are unable to use a workstation to power down the AS/400. Press the White Power button. press 0 ? the white Power button again. Sign on at the system console with a user ID that has security officer authorization. you can force the AS/400 down by using the control panel – go to step 4. go to step 2. If you are unable to use a workstation to power down the AS/400.

complete the following: a. If 01 B N or 02 B N does not display. Press the white Power button on the AS/400. the Sign On screen displays at all terminals left powered on. 6. The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter C) that will increment during the IPL. 5. or the AS/400 electrical cord is plugged back into the wall outlet. c. e. plug the electrical cord back in the wall for the AS/400. 2-16 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . then stays lit. Unplug the electrical cord from the wall outlet for UPS (if no UPS. Press the Enter button. Verify the power light is Off (light next to the white Power button). unplug the AS/400 electrical cord). 11. After the power is restored to the building. 10. 9. The Power light blinks momentarily. The system console is the device at port 0. Verify 01 B N or 02 B N displays in the Function/Data window. After UPS is powered on. Arrows below the Function/Data Press the Select button (Up or Down window) until 02 B N displays in the Function/Data window. b.Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series Wait for the Power light on the AS/400 to go Off (light next to the white Power button). 7. ↑ ↑ ↓ ↓ 12. and power to the building is restored. 8. continue to step 11. 13. 02 displays in the Function/Data window. plug the electrical cord back in the wall outlet for UPS. Press the Enter button. or Down Press the Select button (Up Arrows below the Function/Data window) until 02 displays in the Function/Data window. Power Off UPS (if the AS/400 is attached to a UPS). After the IPL is complete (approximately 15 to 30 minutes). address 0 in QCTL subsystem. • • If 01 B N or 02 B N displays. Sign onto the system. Press the Enter button again. then power On UPS. 14. After the electrical work is complete or the natural disaster is over. continue to step 9 to begin an Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off. 02 B N displays in the Function/Data window. d. ! Verify the system console is powered on. continue to step 7. Open the control panel door on the AS/400. 15. If no UPS.

Power Up / Down 2-17 .Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off These steps are for Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series. 3. light is off (possibly due to a power failure). Press the Enter button again. April 2000 IPL. Open the control panel door on the AS/400. Press the Select button (Up or Down Arrows below the Function/Data window) until 02 displays in the Function/Data window. e. The Power light blinks momentarily. d. 5. Verify the Power light is Off (light next to the white Power button). ! Verify the system console is powered on. 02 B N displays in the Function/Data window. • • If 01 B N or 02 B N displays. b. c. complete the following: a. ↑ ↑ ↓ ↓ 4. f. Press the Enter button. 7. The system console is the device at port 0. Press the Enter button. the Sign On screen displays at all terminals left powered on. address 0 in QCTL subsystem. Arrows below the Function/Data Press the Select button (Up or Down window) until 02 B N displays in the Function/Data window. The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter C) that will increment during the IPL. continue to step 3. 2. then stays lit. After the IPL is complete (approximately 15 to 30 minutes). 02 displays in the Function/Data window. Write down the SRC code in the Function/Data window. Verify 01 B N or 02 B N displays in the Function/Data window. If 01 B N or 02 B N does not display. Sign onto the system. Follow these steps to IPL the AS/400 when the power 1. Press the white Power button on the AS/400. 6.

verify b. 2-18 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter D) that will change during the power down. (The amber system attention light will be on. then follow the instructions to perform an Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off. Press the Enter button. Press the Enter button again. 2. record the information and Verify if any error messages display at the system console. ! a. Using the IBM manuals. 02 displays in the Function/Data window. 7. Record any Service Reference Code (SRC) numbers in the Function/Data window or from the system console screen. Verify the power light is On (green light next to the white Power button). 3. locate the SRC codes. Press the Enter button. 02 B M displays in the Function/Data window. 1. Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows below the Function/Data window) until 02 B M displays in the Function/Data window. Open the control panel door on the AS/400. 4.) Do not power down if SRC numbers display in the Function/Data window AND the amber system attention light is NOT on. If a zero ( ) and a flashing question mark ( ) display on the right side of the Function/Data display. 10. 6. change the system back to Normal Mode by changing the Function/Data window to 02 B N. Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows below the Function/Data window) until 02 displays in the Function/Data window. If error messages display. 5. the code. • • immediately inform a Hardware Specialist. 8. If no error messages display at the system console. After reading the description of all steps/procedures are completed. This procedure should only be used if all devices are locked up and/or the amber system attention light is on. After the power light goes off. continue to step 2b. ! Press the White Power button. 0 ? press the white Power button again. 9.Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series Forced Power Down These steps are to force a power down for the Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series. AND if you are instructed by an EDS Representative.

once a week. Ensure all users are signed off the system. type WRKSBSJOB QBATCH and press Enter. Complete the following steps to perform an unattended (normal) IPL. option 2. b. have the corresponding user(s) sign off the system. If any jobs display. It is recommended an unattended IPL from Power On be performed from the Backup Menu (SAM100). and no jobs are processing. If any jobs display. At a command line. wait until they complete before continuing. if the AS/400 is already powered-on: 1. The following message should display near the center of the screen: (No jobs to display). The following procedure explains how to perform an unattended (normal) IPL. type WRKSBSJOB QINTER and press Enter. April 2000 IPL. Backup DEALERLINE Database Power Down System. for example MSECOFR. Sign on at the system console with a user ID that has security officer authorization. a. including SALESLINE users. At a command line. Power Up / Down 2-19 . Press F5 until the following message displays: (No jobs to display). 2. The following message should display near the center of the screen: (No jobs to display). Press F5 until the following message displays: (No jobs to display).Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power-On These steps are for the Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series.

does not display. . 02 B N d. . 01 B N or 02 B N displays in 01 B N 01 B N or or 02 B N 02 B N displays. • • If If a. as the Function. . or GMXS_SVR. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with spooled files Job Opt Job User Type GMXS_SVR POLLDCS MSECOFR BATCH POLLDCS POLLPREP MSECOFR BATCH POLLPREP POLLRAPID MSECOFR BATCH POLLRAPID MSECOFR BATCH 5=Work with 13=Disconnect -----Status----ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE 6=Release 7=Display message Function PGM-CA4000CL Function PGM-CDPOLLCL PGM-CDPOLLCL DLY-16:30:00 DLY-16:30:00 PGM-CRPOLLCL PGM-CRPOLLCL Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F9=Retrieve F11=Display schedule data ! 3. Press the Enter button. Press the Enter button. .. If the Function is not DLY. . S1025232 Work with Subsystem Jobs Subsystem .: DLCOMMSBS Type options. . continue to step 3. 02 Press the Enter button again. or PGM. continue to step 4. . . . At a command line. . b. . . POLLRAPID or POLLDCS displays with PGM. and no other jobs display. e. Verify the Function/Data window. complete the following: Press the Select button (Up or Down Arrows below the Function/Data window) until 02 displays in the Function/Data window. as the Function.. .... .. type WRKSBSJOB DLCOMMSBS and press Enter. .. 02 B N displays in the Function/Data window. on these jobs.Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series c. 2-20 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . c. displays in the Function/Data window. wait until these jobs complete before continuing. Press the Select button (Up window) until ↑ ↓ ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows below the Function/Data displays in the Function/Data window. If Job POLLPREP displays with DLY.. press Enter. Open the control panel door. .

*IMMED Seconds. . *FULL *PANEL. Power Up / Down 2-21 . b. press Enter. A. . *NOLIMIT *NO. . . Delay time. At the How to end field. a Sign On screen displays at all terminals left powered on. . *IPLA *PANEL. . . . type PWRDWNSYS and press F4. if *CNTRLD . f. leave the default value 3600. . type At the IPL source field. *YES *PANEL. . 5. After the IPL is complete (approximately 15 to 30 minutes). . IPL source . Delay time. How to end . . . Sign onto the system. press Enter. . . . *SYS.Black Box 170/200/400/600/700 Series 4. c. type *YES ! d. . At the Restart after power down field. Or Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) Type choices. . Depending on the operating system. *YES *IPLA. *IMMED and At the Delay time. At a command line. At the Restart type field. How to end . B. . one of the following Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) screens displays. Restart after power down IPL source . leave the default value Press Enter to begin the power down with restart [IPL]. . . in place of the default value. . if *CNTRLD . . 7. Leave the terminal powered on. April 2000 IPL. If the operating system is V4R1M0 or higher. Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) Type choices. . *IMMED 3600 *YES *IPLA *PANEL *CNTRLD. . *IMMED Seconds. A. Restart options: Restart after power down Restart type . *IMMED 3600 *YES *PANEL *CNTRLD. . . if *CNTRLD field. D This screen displays if the operating system is V3R7M0 or lower. The Function Data window displays numbers that will increment during the IPL. B. 6. the Restart type field will display. e. D This screen displays if the operating system is V4R1M0 or higher. *NOLIMIT *NO. . . Complete the following: a. . . type press Field Exit. . . . .

2-22 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .Black Box 300/500 Series 300/500 Series Black Box 300/500 Series Control Panel Graphics Processor Activity 1 Low High SYSTEM ATTENTION LIGHT 2 Low High KEYLOCK 3 4 Manual POWER PUSH BUTTON Normal Auto Secure Mode MODE BUTTON ENTER PUSH BUTTON POWER-ON LIGHT FUNCTION/DATA DISPLAY Function/Data Enter 01 BN SELECT PUSH 01 02 03 04 11 Processor Activity Low High Low High Display Selected IPL Select IPL Start IPL Lamp Test System Reference Code BUTTONS Manual Normal Auto Secure Mode Function/Data Enter 01 02 03 04 11 Display Selected IPL Select IPL Start IPL Lamp Test System Reference Code A BLACK DOOR COVERS THE 300/500 CONTROL PANEL. These panels on the 300/500 Series Box are BLACK.

If you are unable to use a workstation to power down the AS/400. Press the Enter button again. Power Up / Down 2-23 . At a command line. for example a hurricane. you can force the AS/400 down by using the control panel – go to step 4. d. Complete the following steps to power down the system (from power on) to prepare for a pending or imminent emergency or disaster. Verify the Black Plastic Keylock key card is in the keylock. Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down displays in the Function/Data window. Press the Enter button. Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows to the right of the Function/Data window) until 02 B displays in the Function/Data window. The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter D) that will increment during the IPL. c. i. g. h. f. e. then go to step 5. Wait for the Power light on the AS/400 to go Off (light next to the white Power button). force the AS/400 down using the control panel: a. April 2000 IPL. If you are unable to use a workstation to power down the AS/400. 2. 1. Press the Enter button. Press the white Power button. 02 displays in the Function/Data window. 3. go to step 2. 02 B displays in the Function/Data window. Wait for the Power light on the AS/400 to go Off (light next to the white Power button). MSECOFR. If this is an emergency that you only have minutes or seconds to prepare for. for example. press 0 ? the white Power button again. or if electrical power is being shut off due to transformers being replaced. 4. type PWRDWNSYS *IMMED and press Enter. b.Black Box 300/500 Series Power Down Due to Pending Emergency These steps are for powering off the Black Box Series 300/500. Sign on at the system console with a user ID that has security officer authorization. ↓ Arrows to the right of the Function/Data window) until 02 ! If a zero ( ) and a flashing question mark ( ) display on the right side of the Function/Data display. The screen will go blank in approximately 2 to 4 minutes. Change the Mode to Manual by pressing the Mode button until the Manual light is on.

plug the electrical cord back in the wall for the AS/400. Verify the system console is powered on. verify the Black Plastic Keylock card key is in the keylock. 16. 02 displays in the Function/Data window. The Power light blinks momentarily. then stays lit. e. 12. Press the Mode button until the Manual light is On. the Sign On screen displays at all terminals left powered on. To change the Mode. Press the Enter button again. 6. ! The system console is the device at port 0. The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter C) that will increment during the IPL. 2-24 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . and power to the building is restored. c. plug the electrical cord back in the wall outlet for UPS. continue to step 9 to begin an Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off. 02 B displays in the Function/Data window. Unplug the electrical cord from the wall outlet for UPS (if no UPS. Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows to the right of the Function/Data window) until 02 B displays in the Function/Data window. Verify the Mode is set to Normal. Sign onto the system. 9. Verify the power light is Off 10. If 01 B or 02 B does not display. or the AS/400 electrical cord is plugged back into the wall outlet. • • If 01 B or 02 B displays. continue to step 12. continue to step 7. Open the control panel door on the AS/400 (right side). 11. Press the Enter button. 15. 13. After UPS is powered on. Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows to the right of the Function/Data window) until 02 displays in the Function/Data window. then press the Mode button until the Normal light is on. After the electrical work is complete or the natural disaster is over. 14. unplug the AS/400 electrical cord). Press the white Power button on the AS/400. 8. 7. f. d. Press the Enter button. b. address 0 in QCTL subsystem. Press the Mode button until the Manual light is On. Verify 01 B or 02 B displays in the Function/Data window. then power On UPS.Black Box 300/500 Series 5 . g. complete the following: a. (light next to the White Power button). After the power to the building is restored. If no UPS. After the IPL is complete (approximately 15 to 20 minutes). Power Off UPS (if the AS/400 is attached to a UPS).

c. verify the Black Plastic Keylock card key is in the keylock. Verify the Mode is set to Normal. e. Power Up / Down 2-25 . Follow these steps to IPL the AS/400 when the Power 1. 02 B displays in the Function/Data window. To change the Mode. Verify 01 B or 02 B displays in the Function/Data window. 7. Press the white Power button on the AS/400. 3. Press the Mode button until the Manual light is On. Sign onto the system. then stays lit. Open the control panel door on the AS/400 (right side). Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows to the right of the Function/Data window) until 02 B displays in the Function/Data window. Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows to the right of the Function/Data window) until 02 displays in the Function/Data window. address 0 in QCTL subsystem. 2. Verify the power light is Off (light next to the white Power button). ! The system console is the device at port 0. Write down the SRC code in the Function/Data window. If 01 B or 02 B does not display. After the IPL is complete (approximately 15 to 20 minutes). f. Press the Enter button. 8. • • If 01 B or 02 B displays. g. 02 displays in the Function/Data window. 4. continue to step 4. 5. 6. light is off (possibly due to a power failure). complete the following: a. The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter C) that will increment during the IPL. Press the Enter button again. April 2000 IPL. then press the Mode button until the Normal light is on. h. b. Press the Enter button. d. Press the Mode button until the Normal light is On. Verify the system console is powered on. The Power light blinks momentarily.Black Box 300/500 Series Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off These steps are for powering on Black Box 300/500 Series. the Sign On screen displays at all terminals left powered on.

the code. Using the IBM manuals.Black Box 300/500 Series Forced Power Down These steps are to force a power down for the Black Box Series 300/500. then follow the instructions to perform an Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power Off. 2. Record any Service Reference Code (SRC) numbers in the Function/Data window or from the system console screen. Change the Mode to Manual by pressing the Mode button until the Manual light is on. continue to step 2b.) Do not power down if SRC numbers display in the Function/Data window AND the amber system attention light is NOT on. 8. 3. AND if you are instructed by an EDS Representative. Press the Enter button. 02 B displays in the Function/Data window. Press the Enter button again. Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows to the right of the Function/Data window) until 02 displays in the Function/Data window. 5. 0 ? press the white Power button again. 10. Open the control panel door (right side). locate the SRC codes. ! Press the white Power button. (The amber system attention light will be on. 7. After the power light goes off. 9. ! a. If no error messages display at the system console. change the Mode back to Normal by pressing the Mode button until the Normal light is on. 1. After reading the description of all steps/procedures are completed. The Function/Data window displays numbers (prefixed with the letter D) that will increment during the IPL 12. verify b. 2-26 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . This procedure should only be used if all devices are locked up and/or the amber system attention light is on. 11. If a zero ( ) and a flashing question mark ( ) display on the right side of the Function/Data display. record the information and Verify if any error messages display at the system console. 6. 02 displays in the Function/Data window. Press the Enter button. Verify the power light is On (green light next to the white Power button). If error messages display. Verify the Black Plastic Keylock key card is in the keylock. • • immediately inform a Hardware Specialist. 4. Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows to the right of the Function/Data window) until 02 B displays in the Function/Data window.

a. 2. if the AS/400 is already powered-on: 1. If any jobs display. Ensure all users are signed off the system. The following message should display near the center of the screen: (No jobs to display). If any jobs display. At a command line. April 2000 IPL. It is recommended an unattended IPL from Power On be performed from the Backup Menu (SAM100). Press F5 until the following message displays: (No jobs to display). Power Up / Down 2-27 . Sign on at the system console with a user ID that has security officer authorization. At a command line. The following procedure explains how to perform an unattended (normal) IPL. type WRKSBSJOB QBATCH and press Enter. type WRKSBSJOB QINTER and press Enter. Backup DEALERLINE Database Power Down System.Black Box 300/500 Series Unattended (Normal) IPL from Power-On These steps are for the Black Box Series 300/500. including SALESLINE users. b. have the corresponding user(s) sign off the system. The following message should display near the center of the screen: (No jobs to display). wait until they complete before continuing. and no jobs are processing. once a week. MSECOFR. Press F5 until the following message displays: (No jobs to display). for example. option 2. Complete the following steps to perform an unattended (normal) IPL.

POLLRAPID or POLLDCS displays with PGM. c. 02 displays in the Function/Data window. continue to step 6. ..Black Box 300/500 Series c. Press the Enter button. At a command line. 5. 4. . Verify the Mode is set to Normal. Press the Select button (Up ↑or Down ↓ Arrows below the Function/Data window) until 02 B displays in the Function/Data window. Press the Enter button again. Verify 01 B or 02 B displays in the Function/Data window. . S1025232 Work with Subsystem Jobs Subsystem . f. Press the Mode button until the Manual light is On. . 02 B displays in the Function/Data window. complete the following: a. b.. . 2-28 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . Open the control panel door.... e.. continue to step 3. . or PGM. type WRKSBSJOB DLCOMMSBS and press Enter. . . . Press the Enter button. If 01 B or 02 B does not display. . Verify the Keylock card key is in the keylock. • • If 01 B or 02 B displays. . g. on these jobs.. If Job POLLPREP displays with DLY. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with spooled files Job Opt Job User Type GMXS_SVR POLLDCS MSECOFR BATCH POLLDCS POLLPREP MSECOFR BATCH POLLPREP POLLRAPID MSECOFR BATCH POLLRAPID MSECOFR BATCH 5=Work with 13=Disconnect -----Status----ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE 6=Release 7=Display message Function PGM-CA4000CL Function PGM-CDPOLLCL PGM-CDPOLLCL DLY-16:30:00 DLY-16:30:00 PGM-CRPOLLCL PGM-CRPOLLCL Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F9=Retrieve F11=Display schedule data ! 3.: DLCOMMSBS Type options. If the function is not DLY. . or GMXS_SVR. . as the function. . d. Press the Mode button until the Normal light is On. press the Mode button until the Normal light is on. and no other jobs display. wait until these jobs complete before continuing.. as the Function. press Enter. To change the Mode. . . Press the Select button (Up ↑ or Down ↓ Arrows below the Function/Data window) until 02 displays in the Function/Data window.

At the Restart type field. 7. IPL source . Complete the following: a. A. . . If the operating system is V4R1M0 or higher. B. The Function Data window displays numbers that will increment during the IPL. B. . *IMMED 3600 *YES *PANEL *CNTRLD. . type At the IPL source field. press Enter. . . Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) Type choices. *FULL *PANEL. *NOLIMIT *NO. . Restart options: Restart after power down Restart type . *SYS. . How to end . *YES *IPLA. April 2000 IPL. *IMMED 3600 *YES *IPLA *PANEL *CNTRLD. *YES *PANEL. type PWRDWNSYS and press F4. How to end . displays at all terminals After the IPL is complete (approximately 15 to 30 minutes). . if *CNTRLD field. At the Restart after power down field. At the How to end field. . if *CNTRLD . c. . Delay time. . a Sign On screen left powered on. leave the default value Press Enter to begin the power down with restart [IPL]. Restart after power down IPL source . . if *CNTRLD . . . D This screen displays if the operating system is V3R7M0 or lower. type press Field Exit. e. . press Enter. in place of the default value. . Power Up / Down 2-29 . . . . *NOLIMIT *NO. Delay time. *IMMED Seconds. the Restart type field will display. . Sign onto the system. *IPLA *PANEL. . . one of the following Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) screens displays. . *IMMED and At the Delay time. . 9. b. . . At a command line. . D This screen displays if the operating system is V4R1M0 or higher. *IMMED Seconds. . . Or Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) Type choices. A. . . . Leave the terminal powered on. . leave the default value 3600. 8.Black Box 300/500 Series 6. Depending on the operating system. . f. type *YES ! d.

B. Initiate Power Loss Input Processing Language Initiate People Leaving Initial Program Load 2. _____ C.D. How often should you IPL your AS/400? _____ _____ _____ _____ A.EXERCISE IPL. _____ A.EXERCISE 1. To do an unattended IPL. _____ C.IPL. _____ B. _____ B. C. Toggle the power switch on the AS/400 control panel Execute the PWRDWNSYS command with *IMMED option Unplug the AS/400 5. B. If the system needs to be powered down immediately. POWER UP / DOWN . D. You should verify there is no activity on the system before powering down. _____ B. Once a day Once a week Once every two weeks Once a month 2-30 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . Normal Manual Service 3. POWER UP / DOWN .E. or F model? _____ A. what is the recommended procedure? _____ A. C. Identify the terminal to be powered on prior to an IPL: _____ A. True False 4. D. What do the initials "IPL" stand for? _____ _____ _____ _____ A. System console Workstation 6. _____ B. which position should the key be in on the control panel of a C.

2. 3. Less often could cause system performance degradation. 6. April 2000 IPL. POWER UP / DOWN . Power Up / Down . 5. A.EXERCISE Solutions to IPL. B. A. If you don't. Power Up / Down 2-31 . D. complete an IPL weekly. you may lose data. For best performance. A. An IPL should also be completed using the DEALERLINE nightly backup option. B. 4.Exercises 1.IPL.

EXERCISE This page intentionally left blank. 2-32 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .IPL. POWER UP / DOWN .

................................................ 2 System Save ............................................................................. Tape Cartridge................................................................................................................................................................................3 Backups Table of Contents OVERVIEW.......... 10 DEALERLINE Nightly Backup With Power Down ........... 2 MEDIA ........................................... 16 SYSTEM SAVE............................................................. 4 Initialize a Tape Cartridge................. 3 CD ROM [Optical Drive].......... 1 TYPES OF BACKUPS ................. 10 DEALERLINE Nightly Backup – Schedule Start Time ........................Exercise ........................................... 4 Initialize a Diskette ........... 7 Display Contents of a CD............... 2 Diskettes........ 21 Backups ............................................................................................................................................ 2 Tape Cartridges......................... 2 DEALERLINE Nightly Backup ....................................................................... or Diskette................................................................................ 8 Troubleshooting....................... 9 DEALERLINE NIGHTLY BACKUP........................ 30 April 2000 Backups 3-i ...............................................................................................................................................

Table of Contents This page intentionally left blank. 3-ii System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .

If there is a fire. April 2000 Backups 3-1 . or any other disaster. A DEALERLINE nightly backup should be completed each night.OVERVIEW Backups OVERVIEW DEALERLINE nightly backups and system saves are used for disaster recovery. A system save should also be completed after loading and applying a DEALERLINE software release. a hard drive fails. after completing an operating system upgrade. with a power down should be completed once a week. A System Save should be completed once a month (for example. A DEALERLINE nightly backup. or after any major change to the hardware or software on your system. your backups are critical to reload all software on your AS/400. schedule a system save on the Monday after month end has been completed).

High Capacity Media 1. hold the diskette parallel to the ground. MEDIA ! • • • • • The type of media used depends on the AS/400 system at the retail facility.TYPES OF BACKUPS TYPES OF BACKUPS There are two types of backups – a DEALERLINE Nightly Backup and a System Save. Ivory (Tan) Boxes C-F Models have a diskette drive (no CD drive). Gently push the diskette all the way into the diskette drive (label up). Black Box 400 and 500 Series do not have a diskette drive. High Density. except spool files. All libraries.0 MB Capacity 1024 Byte Format (this is the directory to the diskette) To insert the diskette into the computer. The Device ID is OPT01 for the CD ROM drive. Black Box 170. Diskettes • 5 1/4" Used in C .F Models and 200 Series. This DEALERLINE Nightly Backup saves your day-to-day activities.F Models Double-Sided. and 700 Series do not have a diskette drive. they have a CD ROM drive. Black Box 300 Series do not have a diskette drive (no CD drive). 3-2 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . System Save A System Save saves all files and data. The Device ID is OPT01 for the CD ROM drive. is saved. Double Density Media 1. Black Box 200 Series very rarely will have a diskette drive (no CD drive).2 MB Capacity 1024 Byte Format (this is the directory to the diskette) Or • 8" Used in C . All AS/400 systems have TAPE DRIVES. they have a CD ROM drive. Most use tape cartridges for the nightly backup and system save. then close the drive door. DEALERLINE Nightly Backup A DEALERLINE Nightly Backup saves all files in DBLIBR (Data Base Library) except for labor time guides (however labor time guides can also be saved if the option to save table data is selected within the DEALERLINE Backup). as well as your dealership's customization. 600.

(170. Look for type. This is the tape drive model.0 Gig Magnus 13. 700.0 Gig Magnus 2.5 Gig Magnus 1. type WRKDEVD TC and press Enter.0 Gig DC6525 DC6150 DC6250 DC6250 DC6150 DC6525 DC6250 DC6150 DC6150/DC6250 DC6525 Magnus 1. 600. 600. 500.0 Gig Magnus 2. 300. CANNOT use any tape smaller than a 13 Gig to write to (SAVE) on a 6386 tape drive. 500.0 Gig Magnus 2. The tape type should be listed somewhere on the tape label or the box it was packaged in. QIC1000 *DEVTYPE/*QIC2GB *DEVTYPE/*QIC2GB 6346 6347 6348 6380 2GB tape drive 6382 (63A0) 4 GB tape drive *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE CANNOT use 4 Gig tape on a 6385 tape drive.0 Gig Magnus 13.0 Gig 8mm 7mm Density *DEVTYPE *DEVTYPE 10000 10000 *DEVTYPE/10000 *DEVTYPE *DEVTYPE/*QIC525 10000 10000 10000 *QIC525 *QIC1000/*DEVTYPE If 6380 tape drive 10000 and RISC Box 10000 *CTGTYPE is always *QIC525 used for Density.MEDIA Tape Cartridges • Used in C-F Models and 200.0 Gig Magnus 2. April 2000 Backups 3-3 . and 170 Series Tape Drive Model 6343 Tape Type Magnus 1.0 Gig Magnus 2. 400. at a command line. 6385 13 GB tape drive 6386 25GB tape drive Only on RISC box 6390 8mm tape drive *FMT 5GB/*CTGTYPE *FMT 5 GB/*CTGTYPE ! RISC Boxes should always use *CTGTYPE as the Tape Density.5 Gig Magnus 1.0 Magnus 25.0 Gig Magnus 16.5 Gig Magnus 4. and 700 Series are RISC Boxes). To display the tape drive model.0 Gig Magnus 2.0 Gig DC6150 DC6250 DC6525 Magnus 1.

at a command line. 3-4 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . Before a tape can be used on the AS/400 system it needs to be initialized. Models 400. 600. Unable to save to CDs.MEDIA CD ROM [Optical Drive] • Used in RISC Processors. or system save. and press Enter. To determine the Tape Drive Model: • Or • If the tape drive name is TC. It is recommended a Magnus 1. 500. Tapes should be initialized prior to performing a nightly backup. at a command line. type WRKDEVD WRKDEVD TC T1 and press Enter. Initialize a Tape Cartridge Tape cartridges must be initialized before performing a daily backup or system save. The field entries at the Initialize a Tape Screen will vary depending on what the tape is going to be used for. You will need to know the Tape Drive Model of the device and the tape drive density.0 tape or larger be used for a DEALERLINE nightly backup. and 170 Series. month-end close. type If the tape drive name is T1.

........ New volume identifier and New owner identifier fields should describe the information on the tape........... Check for active files ...... press Enter.. *QIC120... Clear .....MEDIA To initialize a tape cartridge: 1...... Character value.. type INZTAP and press Enter... At a command line. this is TC or T1 for tape cartridge... following are some exceptions and/or considerations: • • Tape device: In most cases.... End of tape option ... *MOUNTED *YES.. *NO... it will take longer to complete the procedure since it will notify you each time it finds an active file....... New volume identifier .............. *UNLOAD *NO.. Tape density .. Code ... For example: New volume identifier Daily Backup Month End/Year End System Save Payroll Year End 1099 Year End New owner identifier For system save For anything else • • DBK1 HIST SAVSYS PAYEND AP1099 SAVE BACKUP or can leave as *BLANK Volume Identifier: Leave the default value *MOUNTED. Tape device ..... F3=Exit F5=Refresh F24=More keys TC SAVSYS SAVE *MOUNTED *NO xxxxxx *EBCDIC *REWIND *NO Name Character value........... *YES F12=Cancel F4=Prompt F13=How to use this display 2... Volume identifier .............. *NONE.. *QIC525 *EBCDIC............ April 2000 Backups 3-5 . Complete your field entries with the fields entries in the above example..................... New owner identifier . Initialize Tape (INZTAP) Type choices....... *FIRST *DEVTYPE..................... *ASCII *REWIND.. Check for active files: should be *NO If left at *YES...........

0 Gig Magnus 2.0 Gig DC6150 DC6250 DC6525 Magnus 1. and 700 Series are RISC Boxes).5 Gig Magnus 1. *DEVTYPE/*QIC2GB *DEVTYPE/*QIC2GB *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE CANNOT use 4 Gig tape on a 6385 tape drive.0 Gig Magnus 13. at a command line type VER).0 Gig *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE *CTGTYPE CANNOT use any tape smaller than a 13 Gig to write to (SAVE) on a 6386 tape drive. 6390 8mm tape drive ! 3-6 8mm 7mm *FMT 5GB/*CTGTYPE *FMT 5 GB/*CTGTYPE RISC Boxes should always use *CTGTYPE as the Tape Density.0 Gig DC6525 DC6150 DC6250 DC6250 DC6150 DC6525 DC6250 DC6150 DC6150/DC6250 DC6525 Magnus 1.0 Gig Magnus 2.MEDIA • Tape density: Use the following chart: For RISC boxes (the Operating System Version is V3R7).0 Gig Magnus 2. System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .0 Gig Magnus 2.5 Gig Magnus 4. 600. Tape Type Magnus 1. (170. 500.0 Density *DEVTYPE *DEVTYPE 10000 10000 *DEVTYPE/10000 *DEVTYPE *DEVTYPE/*QIC525 10000 10000 10000 *QIC525 *QIC1000/*DEVTYPE 10000 If 6380 tape drive and RISC Box 10000 *QIC525 *CTGTYPE is always QIC1000 used for Density.0 Gig Magnus 2.0 Gig Magnus 2.0 Gig Magnus 13. the tape Density is always *CTGTYPE (to display the Operating System Version.0 Gig Magnus 16. Tape Drive Model 6343 6346 6347 6348 6380 2GB tape drive 6382 (63A0) 4 GB tape drive 6385 13 GB tape drive 6386 25GB tape drive Only on RISC box Magnus 25.5 Gig Magnus 1.

. . . . . . *DATA2.MEDIA • • Code: Leave the default value *EBCDIC. . . . 128. *ASCII Bottom F13=How to use this display F5=Refresh 2. I1 *NONE *BLANK *DATA *STD *NO *EBCDIC F12=Cancel Name Character value. . 512. then you are aware its contents. . If you previously displayed the contents of the diskette. the New volume identifier could be PARTS. you will be notified each time the system finds an active file. . . *NO *EBCDIC. press Enter.. . 256. Initialize a Diskette Before using a diskette. For example. Sector size . Use the field entries above to make your entries at this screen. . . . . 1. 2D. F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys . . Diskette format . *NONE *DATA. . for saving a Parts file. Following are some exceptions and/or considerations: • New volume identifier and the New owner identifier fields should describe the information on the diskette. .. 1. . . . . 1024 *YES. . . 2. End of tape option: Leave the default value *REWIND. or prepared for use. • ! You can protect data on the tape from being written over (write-protect) by turning the small black pin on the front of the tape to the Safe position. or you could leave the value *BLANK. *STD. • Code is usually *EBCIDIC April 2000 Backups 3-7 . . . . . it must be initialized. if *YES is entered. . New volume identifier New owner identifier . . . it could take up to 4 hours to initialize an 8mm or larger tape. . type INZDKT and press F4. . Most programs and procedures on the AS/400 will automatically initialize media for you. . . Initialize Diskette (INZDKT) Type choices. Clear: contains *NO This would be *YES if information had to be cleared. If you specify *YES. . At a command line. . . . • • • Diskette format is usually *DATA. . . Diskette device . . Check for active files Code . . Sector size is usually *STD Check for active files should always be *NO. . . . . The New owner identifier could be BACKUP.

. . . . . At a command line. . . . Insert the CD into the CD drive. . . . . . . . Data type . . Display Tape (DSPTAP) Type choices. . . . Diskette label . . type WRKOPTDIR The contents of the CD display. or Diskette To display the contents of a diskette: 1. . . Complete the fields on your screen with the information shown above. press Enter. *MOUNTED 1-9999 *LABELS. . .MEDIA Display Contents of a CD. . . . . . . . . . *UNLOAD 2. . . . and press Enter 3-8 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . . . . The tape contents displays on the screen. . 3. 2. . . Output . . . Tape Cartridge. . . . *PRINT *REWIND. . . . . . At a command line. . . . . *PRINT 2. . 3. . Diskette device . . *SAVRST *. Tape device . . . The contents of the diskette display. Complete the fields on your screen with the information shown above Press Enter. . . . . . . . . . Volume identifier Sequence number Data type File label . Insert the tape cartridge into the tape drive. . . Display Diskette (DSPDKT) Type choices. . . . . press Enter. . . . . . Insert the diskette into the diskette drive. To display the contents of a CD: 1. type DSPDKT and press F4. . I1 *ALL *LABELS * Name *LABELS. . At a command line. . *SAVRST *. Press Enter. . . . . . TC *MOUNTED *ALL_______ 1 *SAVRST * *REWIND Name Character value. . . . . . . . . . type DSPTAP and press F4. To display the contents of a tape cartridge: 1. Output . . End of tape option . .

call the Customer Support Center. April 2000 Backups 3-9 . Select option #1 to vary on device--continue to refresh the screen until the status is varied on. The Status must be varied off. and press Enter. again if this tape is going to be used for a backup. If the tape drive does not vary on. 4. 1. select option #2 to vary the device off. Also verify the CORRECT Tape Density is specified--often.MEDIA Troubleshooting • A common error when initializing a tape is specifying *NONE for Volume identifier. 3. If the Status displays Failed. these two fields are filled out incorrectly-- • If the following message displays: The TC device may have failed. system save. *NONE is not a valid Volume identifier. Press F5 to refresh the screen. The status displays as failed or varied off 2. etc. At a command line type device TC not available WRKCFGSTS *DEV TC and press Enter. Verify something is entered at the volume identifier field--it cannot be blank---the system has to know what type of tape is being initialized.

DEALERLINE NIGHTLY BACKUP

DEALERLINE NIGHTLY BACKUP
It is important to complete a DEALERLINE nightly backup each night. The nightly backup also condenses and compresses data files so your system runs efficiently. It is also recommended that once a week you select the option on the Backup Menu to Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System). See the next sub-section, DEALERLINE Nightly Backup With Power Down, for this procedure.

DEALERLINE Nightly Backup – Schedule Start Time
You can schedule the DEALERLINE nightly backup to run at a specified time each night, or you can run the backup immediately. (Step 6 contains the instructions to specify a time). Complete the following steps to schedule the DEALERLINE backup to run either at a later time or immediately: 1. If the backup is to be run immediately, verify the system is dedicated. To verify a dedicated system, see the System Save section, step 2 (page 3-16) in this chapter. 2. At a command line, type GO SAM100 and press Enter.

The Backup Menu (SAM100) displays.
SAM100 Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) Power Down System (No Backup) Backup Menu

6. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. Work with EOD Objects 23. System Administration Main Menu 90. Sign Off

Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu

3. Type 1 Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down), and press Enter.

3-10

System Administrator Tasks

April 2000

DEALERLINE NIGHTLY BACKUP

4. If it has been over one month since the last system save was completed, the File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) (SA150512) screen displays:
2/16/00 9:26:02 File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) 1/10/00 SA1505DF SA150512 A system save has not been performed since:

It is critical to maintain a copy of the current system backup to avoid an interruption in your information processing. In the event of a disaster, your business uses the current backup copy to recover information so that accurate processing can resume in a timely manner. EDS recommends using the following guidelines for your entire system backup: Backup once during each three-month span. Backup before and after an Operating System Upgrade. Backup after every other DEALERLINE Software Update. Do not show me this warning for another month: N

ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job

This screen reminds you that it has been over one month since your last system save; the date the last system save was completed also displays. Leave the default N at the Do not show me this warning for another month field to keep this as a reminder to complete a System Save, or type Y if you do not want this System Save reminder to display. Press Enter. 5. The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) (SA150501) screen displays.
2/16/00 9:27:24 File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) SA1505DF SA150501 The back up procedure performs two important functions: 1. File saving - Copies and saves ALL data files. 2. File maintenance - Condenses and compresses data files. You may choose the order in which these two functions are performed. Enter 1 - To save FILES first. Enter 2 - To perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Guidelines are listed below. A. If your system requires only one tape cartridge or tape reel to complete the backup procedure, you will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. B. If you normally insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel) in the morning, you will want to perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Enter 2 and press enter. C. If you normally wait in the evening to insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel), You will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. Enter your selection PLEASE... __ ENTER - Continue CMD-7 - End of Job

Complete one of the following: • To save files first, type 1 and press Enter. If your system requires one tape cartridge to complete the backup, or if your system requires 2 tape cartridges and you wait to insert the second tape in the evening, type 1 to save files first. To perform file maintenance first, type 2 and press Enter. If your system uses two tapes for the nightly backup and you insert the second tape in the morning, type 2, to perform file maintenance first.

April 2000

Backups

3-11

DEALERLINE NIGHTLY BACKUP

6. The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) (SA150502) screen displays:
2/16/00 9:31:41 File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) SA1505DF SA150502

Enter the time you would like to begin the backup. NOTE: The time should be at least 5 MINUTES from now, or Enter ZEROS if you want the backup to start NOW. If a time is entered it MUST be in military time (00:00:00 23:59:59). Enter your selection PLEASE... 00 00 00 HH - Hours MM - Minutes SS - Seconds

ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job

Type the time to begin the nightly backup. • • To start the backup immediately type zeros in the HH (Hour), MM (Minutes), SS (Seconds) fields. To start the backup at a later time, type the military time in the HH (Hour), MM (Minutes), SS (Seconds) fields. For example, to start the backup at 11:00 p.m., 230000 would be the military time; type 23 at the HH field, 00 at the MM field, and 00 at the SS field. It is helpful to submit your backup to run earlier in the morning, such as 1:00 a.m. so it will not interfere with communications polling.

7. Press Enter. The following window (SA150504) displays:
2/16/00 9:31:56 SA1505DF SA150504

You have scheduled the System Backup at: xx:xx:xx Do you want to continue: (Y=Yes N=No)

ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job

8. Complete one of the following: • • If the correct time displays, type Y and press Enter. Continue to step 9. To change the time displayed, type N and press Enter to cancel this backup. Resubmit this backup by starting again at step 3.

3-12

System Administrator Tasks

April 2000

DEALERLINE NIGHTLY BACKUP

9. The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) (SA150503) screen displays.
2/16/00 9:32:00 File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) CARTRIDGE SA1505DF SA150503

Your system records indicate you backup to

Do you want to backup to a DIFFERENT media this run ? N (The default is NO) Enter Y or N Do you wish to backup System Security and Configuration information ? Y (Valuable if a restore is necessary) Enter Y or N Do you wish to backup table data ? N Enter Y or N (This may require additional tapes)

Backup Device Name

TC
ENTER - Continue CMD-7 - End of Job

Complete the following: a. At the Do you want to backup to a DIFFERENT media this run field, leave the default value N. b. At the Do you wish to backup System Security and Configuration Information field, type Y. c. At the Do you wish to backup table data field: • • Leave the default value N if you DO NOT want to save your labor time guides. Type Y if you want to save your labor time guides. If you are using a 2GB tape or larger, the backup should complete on 1 tape; if you are using a 1GB tape, you may need 2 tapes to complete the backup.

d. At the Backup Device Name, type the tape drive device ID (default value is TC). e. Press Enter. 10. The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) (SA150510) screen displays:
2/16/00 9:32:45 File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) SA1505DF SA150510

Insert the FIRST tape cartrdige of set "DBK1" in the tape cartridge drive

ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job

11. Insert the first tape cartridge into the tape drive and press Enter.

April 2000

Backups

3-13

DEALERLINE NIGHTLY BACKUP

a.

If

the tape cartridge needs to be initialized, the File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) (SA150511) screen displays with a prompt to either initialize or remove the tape:
2/16/00 9:34:00 File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) SA1505DF SA1500511

Incorrect Cartridge inserted, check the volumne name. Key Y to iitialize the CARTRIDGE. Key N if you wish to replace it.

Enter choice here

Y

ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job

b. To initialize the tape, type Y and press Enter. Continue to step 12. c. To replace the tape, type N and press Enter. Continue to step d. d. If you typed N to replace the tape, remove the tape and insert the correct one. Begin again at step 10. 12. After the tape is initialized, the following break message displays: Waiting until xx:xx to start the nightly backup 13. Press F3 or Enter to return to the Backup Menu (SAM100).
SAM100 Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) Power Down System (No Backup) Backup Menu

6. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. Work with EOD Objects 23. System Administration Main Menu 90. Sign Off

Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu

3-14

System Administrator Tasks

April 2000

DEALERLINE NIGHTLY BACKUP

14. To verify the DEALERLINE nightly backup has been scheduled correctly: a. At a command line, type WRKSBSJOB QCTL and press Enter.
S1020334 09:37:46

The Work with Subsystem Jobs screen displays.
Work with Subsystem Jobs 02/16/00 Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . : QCTL 7=Display message Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with spooled files Opt Job User

5=Work with 6=Release 13=Disconnect Type

-----Status-----

Function

DLBACKUP
QSYSSCD

SYSADM
QPGMR

BATCH
BATCH

ACTIVE
ACTIVE

DLY-xx:xx:xx
PGM-QEZSCNEP

Bottom Parameters or command ===>

b. Verify Job DLBACKUP displays with the Function DLY-xx:xx:xx. (xx:xx:xx is the time the backup was submitted for.) c. Press F3 to exit. d. Sign off the workstation BEFORE the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to begin.
15. If the nightly backup fails, the following message displays when the user that initiated the nightly backup signs on the system the next day:

DEALERLINE file backup has not completed normally. This attempt at backup will end. If this error continues, please contact Customer Support for assistance. JOB xxxxxxx/xxxxxDLBACKUP completed normally on mm/dd/yy at hh:mm:ss The first message means the DEALERLINE backup DID NOT complete normally. The second message means the program DLBACKUP completed normally. Additionally, the following message prints at the system printer:
NIGHTLY BACKUP FAILED CALL CUSTOMER

SUPPORT
If the nightly backup fails, contact the EDS Customer Support Center.

If the nightly backup completes successfully, the following message prints at the system printer:
DEALERLINE Nightly Backup completed normally.

April 2000

Backups

3-15

DEALERLINE NIGHTLY BACKUP

DEALERLINE Nightly Backup With Power Down
A DEALERLINE nightly backup with an automatic Power Down of the system is recommended once a week. When the system is powered back on with an Initial Program Load (IPL), the system and user files/data are condensed making your system run more efficiently. If you have a high percentage of used DASD space, an IPL will help to optimize your system and reduce response time

1. If the backup is to be run immediately, verify the system is dedicated. To verify a dedicated system, see the System Save section, step 2 (page 3-16) in this chapter. 2. At a command line, type GO
SAM100 Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) Power Down System (No Backup)

SAM100 and press Enter.

The Backup Menu (SAM100) displays.
Backup Menu

6. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. Work with EOD Objects 23. System Administration Main Menu 90. Sign Off Selection or command ===> 2 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu

3. 4.

Type 2, Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System), and press Enter.

If it has been over one month since the last system save was completed, the File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) (SA150512) screen displays:
2/16/00 9:26:02 File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) 1/10/00 SA1505DF SA150512 A system save has not been performed since:

It is critical to maintain a copy of the current system backup to avoid an interruption in your information processing. In the event of a disaster, your business uses the current backup copy to recover information so that accurate processing can resume in a timely manner. EDS recommends using the following guidelines for your entire system backup: Backup once during each three-month span. Backup before and after an Operating System Upgrade. Backup after every other DEALERLINE Software Update. Do not show me this warning for another month: N

ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job

This screen reminds you that it has been over one month since your last system save; the date the last system save was completed also displays. Leave the default N at the Do not show me this warning for another month field to keep this as a reminder to complete a System Save, or type Y if you do not want this System Save reminder to display. Press Enter.

3-16

System Administrator Tasks

April 2000

2/16/00 9:27:24 File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) SA1505DF SA150501 The back up procedure performs two important functions: 1. At the RESTART system after shutdown field. Type the military time in the HH (Hour). B. File maintenance .Condenses and compresses data files. April 2000 Backups 3-17 .m. File saving . Guidelines are listed below..End of Job • a.Continue CMD-7 . and 00 at the SS field. A. type Y to restart the system. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel). To start the backup at a later time. to perform file maintenance first. Enter your selection PLEASE.m. or Enter ZEROS if you want the backup to start NOW. Enter 2 . 00 at the MM field. to start the backup at 10:00 p... type N. b. Enter 1 . Enter your selection PLEASE. MM (Minutes). type 2.Seconds Y – Yes N .. For example. It is helpful to submit your backup to run earlier in the morning. 2.Minutes SS . If the system is not to be powered up.To save FILES first. or if your system requires 2 tape cartridges and you wait to insert the second tape in the evening. 00 00 00 RESTART system after shutdown ENTER .End of Job Complete one of the following: • To save files first. The File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) (SA150502) screen displays: 2/17/00 9:31:41 File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) SA1505DF SA150502 Enter the time you would like to begin the backup. To perform file maintenance first.Hours MM . you will want to save the FILES first. If your system requires only one tape cartridge or tape reel to complete the backup procedure. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel) in the morning. If your system requires one tape cartridge to complete the backup. you will want to perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. If you normally insert additional media (EG. __ ENTER . SS (Seconds) fields. You will want to save the FILES first.No CMD-7 .. You may choose the order in which these two functions are performed. If you normally wait in the evening to insert additional media (EG. the Start time must be 22:00:00 or later and before 4:00:00 when choosing a file backup and power down. C. NOTE: The time should be at least 5 MINUTES from now. If a time is entered it MUST be in military time (00:00:00 23:59:59). type 22 at the HH field. so it will not interfere with communications polling.Continue Y HH . Enter 1 or simply press enter. 220000 would be the military time. 6. SS (Seconds) fields. If your system uses two tapes for the nightly backup and you insert the second tape in the morning. type 1 to save files first. MM (Minutes).DEALERLINE NIGHTLY BACKUP 5. Type the time to begin the nightly backup. Enter 2 and press enter. type 2 and press Enter. such as 1:00 a. Enter 1 or simply press enter.To perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. type 1 and press Enter. The File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) (SA150501) screen displays. • • To start the backup immediately type zeros in the HH (Hour).Copies and saves ALL data files.

Continue CMD-7 . Type Y if you want to save your labor time guides. The File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) (SA150503) screen displays. leave the default value N. 9. To change the time displayed.DEALERLINE NIGHTLY BACKUP 7. c. you may need 2 tapes to complete the backup.End of Job 8.End of Job Complete the following: a. At the Do you want to backup to a DIFFERENT media this run field. 3-18 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . type N and press Enter to cancel this backup. the backup should complete on 1 tape. if you are using a 1GB tape. Resubmit this backup by starting again at step 3 (page 16). Press Enter. At the Do you wish to backup System Security and Configuration Information field.Continue CMD-7 . 2/16/00 9:32:00 File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) CARTRIDGE SA1505DF SA150503 Your system records indicate you backup to Do you want to backup to a DIFFERENT media this run ? N (The default is NO) Enter Y or N Do you wish to backup System Security and Configuration information ? Y Enter Y or N (Valuable if a restore is necessary) Do you wish to backup table data ? N Enter Y or N (This may require additional tapes) Backup Device Name TC ENTER . Complete one of the following: • • If the correct time displays. type Y. Continue to step 9. b. At the Do you wish to backup table data field: • • Leave the default value N if you DO NOT want to save your labor time guides. type Y and press Enter. If you are using a 2GB tape or larger. The following window displays: 2/16/00 9:31:56 SA1505DF SA150504 You have scheduled the System Backup at: xx:xx:xx Do you want to continue: (Y=Yes N=No) ENTER .

Continue to step d. check the volumne name.End of Job b. type the tape drive device ID (default value is TC). The File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) (SA150510) screen displays: 2/16/00 9:32:45 File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) SA1505DF SA150510 Insert the FIRST tape cartrdige of set "DBK1" in the tape cartridge drive ENTER . Continue to step 12. d.DEALERLINE NIGHTLY BACKUP d. Begin again at step 10. Press F3 or Enter to return to the Backup Menu (SAM100). type Y and press Enter. Press Enter. Key N if you wish to replace it. remove the tape and insert the correct one. Insert the first tape cartridge into the tape drive and press Enter. To initialize the tape. 12. type N and press Enter. e. Enter choice here Y ENTER . 10. the following break message displays: Waiting until xx:xx to start the nightly backup 13. the File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) (SA150511) screen displays with a prompt to either initialize or remove the tape: 2/16/00 9:34:00 File Backup and Shutdown (Power Off) SA1505DF SA1500511 Incorrect Cartridge inserted. To replace the tape. If you typed N to replace the tape.Continue CMD-7 . After the tape is initialized. April 2000 Backups 3-19 . If the tape cartridge needs to be initialized.Continue CMD-7 . c.End of Job 11. At the Backup Device Name. Key Y to iitialize the CARTRIDGE. a.

S1020334 09:37:46 The Work with Subsystem Jobs screen displays. If the nightly backup fails. JOB xxxxxxx/xxxxxDLBACKUP completed normally on mm/dd/yy at hh:mm:ss The first message means the DEALERLINE backup DID NOT complete normally. . contact the EDS Customer Support Center. . At a command line. press Enter. Work with Subsystem Jobs 02/16/00 Subsystem .DEALERLINE NIGHTLY BACKUP 14. Sign off the workstation BEFORE the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to begin. the following message displays when the user that initiated the nightly backup signs on the system the next day: DEALERLINE file backup has not completed normally. : QCTL 7=Display message Type options. . If the nightly backup completes successfully. To verify the DEALERLINE nightly backup has been scheduled correctly: a. type WRKSBSJOB QCTL and press Enter. 3-20 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . the following message prints at the system printer: DEALERLINE Nightly Backup completed normally. . Press F3 to exit. . 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with spooled files Opt Job User 5=Work with 6=Release 13=Disconnect Type -----Status----- Function DLBACKUP QSYSSCD SYSADM QPGMR BATCH BATCH ACTIVE ACTIVE DLY-xx:xx:xx PGM-QEZSCNEP Bottom Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F9=Retrieve F11=Display schedule data b. Additionally. 15. The second message means the program DLBACKUP completed normally. d. please contact Customer Support for assistance. This attempt at backup will end. the following message prints at the system printer: NIGHTLY BACKUP FAILED CALL CUSTOMER SUPPORT If the nightly backup fails. If this error continues. . Verify Job DLBACKUP displays with the Function DLY-xx:xx:xx.) c. . . (xx:xx:xx is the time the backup was submitted for. .

a hard drive fails. The system save tape cartridge(s) must be stored in a safe place.SYSTEM SAVE SYSTEM SAVE A system save must be performed after loading any software or completing any hardware upgrade. A system save should be completed once a month. April 2000 Backups 3-21 . including SALESLINE users) and takes approximately 2 to 3 hours to complete. The steps in the Begin the System Save section require a dedicated system (no jobs can be processing and all users must be signed off the system. A system save is used for disaster recovery. If there is a fire. These instructions are divided into two sections: The steps in the Before Beginning the System Save section do not require a dedicated system and can be completed during business hours. or any other disaster. The System Save can be set up for delayed-time processing. the system save is critical to reload all software on your AS/400.

d. . New volume identifier New owner identifier .SYSTEM SAVE Before Beginning the System Save You will need 1 to 2 tape cartridges that can be initialized for a system save. *QIC525. . At the Tape device field. . TC SAVSYS SAVE *MOUNTED *NO Name Character value. . Tape device . . *ASCII *REWIND. . At the Check for active files field. type SAVSYS e. . .. . *EBCDIC. End of tape option Clear . type the device name of your tape drive (TC or T1) and press Field Exit. in place of the default value. . b. . . Tape density . Code . At a command line. . . . . . . . . 3-22 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . . . . . *MOUNTED *YES. Complete the following steps to initialize 1 to 2 tape cartridges: a. . . . . Check for active files . 3. Steps 1 through 4 can be completed during business hours. The Initialize Tape (INZTAP) screen displays. . *UNLOAD *NO. in place of the default value. leave the default value *MOUNTED g. . . . . . 1. . . . . The number of tape cartridges needed depends on the type of tape cartridge you are using (which depends on your AS/400 model type) and the size of your system. . . . *YES *xxxxx *EBCDIC *REWIND *NO c. . *QIC120. type SAVE and press Field Exit. . . . Insert a tape cartridge into the tape drive. Clean the tape drive to prevent tape errors during the system save procedure. . . *NONE. . Volume identifier .. . . .. . At the New volume identifier field. Character value. Initialize Tape (INZTAP) Type choices. type *NO and press Field Exit. type INZTAP and press F4. *FIRST *DEVTYPE. . press Enter. Sign onto the system using MSECOFR as your user ID. At the New owner identifier field. . . . . At the Volume identifier field. 2. . . . . . . *NO. . . . . f.. . . .

SYSTEM SAVE Before Beginning the System Save (continued) h. the following message displays: Volume SAVSYS prepared for operation with owner id SAVE ! If you have more tapes to initialize: Ensure all tapes are the same size/length if you are using more than one tape for the system save.Press Enter. April 2000 Backups 3-23 . . ! i. j. type *NO l. 10000. At the Tape density field. or *CTGTYPE) and press Field Exit. (Operating System is V3R7M0 or higher) the Tape Density should be *CTGTYPE RISC At the Code field. 4. After the tape is initialized. . leave the default value *REWIND k. type *DEVTYPE.Remove the tape cartridge and insert the next tape to initialize. *QIC1000. type the correct tape density for your system (for example. *QIC525. At the Clear field. *FMT7GB. . .Repeat this procedure until there are no more tapes to initialize. Press Enter. Sign off the system. leave the default value *EBCDIC At the End of tape option. *QIC2GB.Press F9 to display the initialization command at the command line. *FMT5GB. If you have a processor.

. Ensure your system is dedicated (all users must be signed off the system. . wait until these jobs complete before continuing. . At a command line. . Make sure to perform a screen print(s) of the Software Version screen (step 16) when the System Save is complete. QSECOFR as the user ID. . POLLRAPID or POLLDCS displays with PGM. and no other jobs display. on these jobs. or PGM. or GMXS_SVR. .. have the corresponding user(s) sign off the system. 3-24 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .. If the function is not DLY. At a command line. If any jobs display. skip step 2 and continue to step 3. . Sign on to the system console using Be sure to use QSECOFR – this is the only profile created during a reload if your system has to be reloaded from a System Save. . type WRKSBSJOB QBATCH and press Enter. type WRKSBSJOB QINTER and press Enter. b. as the Function.: DLCOMMSBS Type options. press Enter. Press F5 until the following message displays: (No jobs to display). Press F5 until the following message displays: (No jobs to display). . At a command line. ! If you are scheduling the system save to process at a later time. as the function. including SALESLINE users. c. . type WRKSBSJOB DLCOMMSBS and press Enter.SYSTEM SAVE Begin the System Save ! 1. .. . . S1025232 Work with Subsystem Jobs Subsystem . If any jobs display. . . a. wait until they complete before continuing. The following message should display near the center of the screen: (No jobs to display). . continue to step 3. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with spooled files Opt Job Job POLLDCS GMXS_SVR POLLDCS POLLPREP POLLPREP POLLRAPID POLLRAPID User MSECOFR MSECOFR MSECOFR MSECOFR 5=Work with 13=Disconnect Type BATCH BATCH BATCH BATCH 6=Release 7=Display message -----Status-----Function Function PGM-CDPOLLCL ACTIVE PGM-CA4000CL PGM-CDPOLLCL DLY-16:30:00 ACTIVE DLY-16:30:00 PGM-CRPOLLCL ACTIVE PGM-CRPOLLCL PGM-CRPOLLCL ACTIVE Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display schedule data ! If Job POLLPREP displays with DLY. 2... The following message should display near the center of the screen: (No jobs to display)... and no jobs can be processing). .

type CHGSYSVAL QINACTITV '*NONE' and press Enter... Press the Arrow key to Setup Display (on-line) and press Enter.. press F3 to exit and repeat step c.... ♦ If *NONE displays. or are submitting the system save now. at the end of the system save process (step 14). If *NONE displays at the Time-out interval in minutes field. press the Arrow keys to position the cursor on No and press the Space April 2000 Backups 3-25 .. At a command line... 4. but will not be staying on-site while the system save processes. change) the system value for QINACTITV. and will be staying on-site until the system save completes... : QINACTITV Inactive job time-out Time-out interval in minutes .. type DSPSYSVAL QINACTITV and press Enter.. If No is not highlighted. : Press Enter to continue.... Press F3 to exit.. c. The last option is Auto Disconnect or Power Saver... continue bar to change the option to No. : Description .. 5-300 b. press F3 to exit and continue to step 4... set the system value QINACTITV to *NONE: a. Verify the system value has been changed: At a command line. The Display System Value screen displays. Display System Value System value ... c... complete the following steps to change the value in this field: - Make a note of the current value... type DSPSYSVAL QINACTITV and press Enter.... Press Set-up (lower left of the keyboard)............... If No is highlighted. To schedule the system save to process at a later time.. you will need to change this field back to its original value.. At a command line. F3=Exit F12=Cancel *NONE *NONE. to step d.. If any other value displays at the Time-out interval in minutes field......... Press F8 to display the next screen. Press F3 two times to exit and return to a command line.. b.. The Time-out interval in minutes field should be *NONE... If you are scheduling your system save to process at a later time........ If your system console is a 3488 or 3489 (base is 1-inch high and square) make sure Auto Disconnect (Power Saver) is set to No: a.... ♦ - If *NONE does not display... d. press F3 to exit and continue to step 4.. skip this step and continue to step 4.SYSTEM SAVE 3. complete this step to verify (and if necessary..... If you are NOT scheduling your system save to process at a later time.

Licensed programs 8. Libraries 3. Press the Shift and Arrow keys at the same time to display option 21. 21 9. Objects in directories Selection or command ==>__________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Additional Asst. 1995. F16=AS/400 Main menu (c) Copyright IBM Corp. new folders. All user data Save Document Library Objects 30. type GO SAVE and press Enter. Press F16 to erase all unanswered messages. type DSPMSG QSYSOPR and press Enter. If any messages are not deleted. Save Select one of the following: Save System and User Data 21. Entire System. Save Select one of the following: Save Data 1. Configuration 11. Press F3 or Enter to exit. F16=AS/400 Main menu (c) Copyright IBM Corp. 7. Storage 10. New and changed documents.SYSTEM SAVE 5. folders. Changed objects only 7. Security data 9. take the appropriate action to clear the messages. all mail 32. and mail 31. Programs 5. Entire System. Mail only 34. 1995. Type 21. Documents and folders 33. Press Enter. An informational screen displays. The Save Menu displays. Other Objects 6. and press Enter. 3-26 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . Documents and folders 4. At a command line. 6. Entire System 22. Files 2. 1980. System data only 23. ! At a command line. All documents. 1980. Calendars Selection or command ==> _______________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Additional Asst. Insert the first initialized System Save tape cartridge into the tape drive. 8.

....... N Message queue delivery ..... Press Field Exit after typing a time.. N=No Y=Yes.............. the Vary off network servers field displays ..... (Do NOT type * when typing a specific time)............... 020000 Vary off network servers ...... f.... *Notify *NOTIFY Start Time. g.... At the Message queue delivery field......................... Informational messages display at the bottom of the screen approximately 20 minutes after the save has started...... Tape devices . N=No *Break................. At the Check for active files field............ the following message displays at the bottom of the screen: Save submitted at HH:MM:SS... b.......... The screen will remain locked until the System Save has completed.... type *CURRENT and press Enter............. TC Names Prompt for commands ..... For example.. N Check for active files.........leave the default value *NONE..... If the Operating System is V4R2M0 or higher.......... April 2000 Backups 3-27 .... Press Enter.. *AIX.SYSTEM SAVE 10.. At the Start Time field.........m......... The Specify Command Defaults screen displays...... *BASE....... 11:00 p....... Y=Yes. *NONE *Current.. press Enter....... a.. At the Tape devices field..... type the name of your tape drive (TC or T1) and press Field Exit........................... Or ...To start the system save at a specific time...... would be typed 020000... Continue to step h..... type N d... Save will start at HH:MM:SS h........ Time *NONE..... *ALL...... Specify Command Defaults Type choices............. After several minutes.. complete one of the following: .. *WINDDWSNT F3=Exit F12=Cancel This field displays only if the Operating System is V4R2M0 or higher.................m.............. *LANSERVER. type N c.. type *NOTIFY e.. At the Prompt for commands field........... type the time you want the system save to start using military time (HHMMSS)...To start the system save immediately........... Press the Space bar to display this screen ONLY IF your screen becomes dim or blank. would be typed 230000 and 2:00 a....... *NETWARE........

Press Set-up (lower left of the keyboard). Load next tape volume on device TC message should now display. Press F3 two times to exit and return to a command line.SYSTEM SAVE 11. The last option is Auto Disconnect or Power Saver. the following message displays at the bottom of the screen: Waiting for reply to message on message queue QSYSOPR a. for example 60. When the system save is complete. If Yes is highlighted. c. Press the Shift and SysRq keys at the same time. Insert the second tape cartridge into the tape drive. If the system value QINACTITV was changed to *NONE in step 3. If your system console is a 3488 or 3489 (base is 1-inch high and square) and Auto Disconnect (Power Saver) was set to Yes prior to the system save. b. Ensure the following message displays at the bottom of the screen: Save or restore option completed successfully If a message displays that indicates all objects were NOT saved. change it back to its original value: At a command line. ! ! 12. When the dash line displays at the bottom of the screen. b. Respond to the Load next tape volume on device TC (C G) prompt with a G and press Enter two times to return to the Specify Command Defaults screen. press F16 to delete all unanswered messages. type 6 and press Enter. or 120. then sign back on to the system console using MSECOFR as the user ID. 90. press the Arrow keys to position the cursor on Yes and press the Space bar to change the option to Yes. c. the Save menu displays. 3-28 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . continue to step d. 15. Press the Arrow key to Setup Display (online) and press Enter. you can now change this back to Yes: a. If Load next tape volume on device TC message does not display. Return to step 11c. prompt 4. If a second tape cartridge is needed. nn=the original Time-out interval in minutes value. 14. If Yes is not highlighted. Sign off the system console. d. Press F8 to display the next screen. 13. call the EDS Customer Support Center. type CHGSYSVAL QINACTITV 'nn' and press Enter.

c. When the following message displays: Print operation complete to the default printer device file Press Reset. 19. 2 of 2). b. e. 18. Respond to any messages or printer messages appropriately. The print screen prints at the default printer.SYSTEM SAVE 16. At a command line. 17. Press Print. Store the print screen of the current software release and operating system version with the system save tape(s) in a safe place. Be sure to label each tape with the sequence in which it was used (for example 1 of 2. type VER and press Enter. Sign off the system console. Print the current software release and operating system version: a. April 2000 Backups 3-29 . Press F3 to return to a command line. d.

A. _____ True _____ False 4.Exercise 1. 2. save dates.) B. A few files DEALERLINE Nightly Libraries System All subsystems should be ended prior to performing a DEALERLINE nightly backup. D. B. (If the backup is being started immediately.Backups . What type of backup should be done after loading a DEALERLINE Software Update? _____ _____ _____ _____ 3. or after a DEALERLINE Software Update is loaded 6. _____ B. *LABELS *SAVRST 5. _____ B. Nightly Yearly Monthly. 4. verify there is no activity on the system. What command should you use to determine the type of tape drive on the system? ________________________________ Backups – Exercise Solutions 1. _____ True _____ False 2. An ATF is an Application Temporary Fix to the DEALERLINE software. _____ C. *SAVRST. Identify the command to execute the following: Display a CD Display a Diskette Initialize a Diskette Display a Tape Initialize a Tape Save the System ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ 7. D.? _____ A. When displaying a diskette or tape contents.Exercise Backups . etc. 3-30 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . True. C. 3. System Save. False. which value for the data type field must be specified to display object names. A System Save should be performed: _____ A.

6. WRKDEVD TC or WRKDEVD T1 or WRKDEVD T* April 2000 Backups 3-31 .Backups . or after a DEALERLINE Software Update is loaded WRKOPTDIR DSPDKT DSPTAP INZDKT INZTAP GO SAVE 7.Exercise 5. Monthly. C.

Backups . 3-32 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .Exercise This page intentionally left blank.

..... 8 SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE .................... 14 LOAD AND APPLY DEALERLINE SOFTWARE UPDATES EXERCISE ................................................................................................... 1 ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD)...................................4 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Updates Table of Contents OVERVIEW ...................... 2 Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup........................................ 26 April 2000 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-i ....

Table of Contents 4-ii System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .

or on a tape cartridge. With each type of update. These are sent periodically and should be loaded and applied to your system soon after you receive it. The Software Update Instructions in this guide are generic – the set of instructions you receive with each release contain specific instructions. April 2000 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-1 . along with color-coded packets explaining the enhancement to each applicable DEALERLINE application. Software Update Instructions are sent. Any Pre-Update (specific items or conditions to verify before loading the software) and any Post-Update instructions (specific items or conditions to verify after loading the software) are included with the Software Update Instructions. In this guide. replace xxxx with the actual DEALERLINE Base Release and Product Release. such as checking for a specific operating system and release dependency (dependency will vary with each software update) before loading and applying the software. You will receive software updates either electronically [Electronic Object Distribution (EOD)].OVERVIEW Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update OVERVIEW Software updates are enhancements and fixes to the DEALERLINE software.

you can display and/or print a brief description of the software Enhancements in this release.ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD) ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD) Software releases are automatically sent to your AS/400 system using the Electronic Object Distribution (EOD) process. after selecting the release on the Work With EOD Objects screen. See step 1. page 4-3. RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA (depending on your Operating System Release) displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen (xxxx=DEALERLINE software release). The Software Update Instructions are divided into two sections: Before You Begin ⇒ Complete the steps in the Before You Begin section anytime during business hours. ⇒ While the release displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen. 4-2 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . A System Save should be completed within 5 days after a DEALERLINE software update is successfully applied to your system (see the Backups chapter). ⇒ DEALERLINE software releases usually take 30 minutes to 2 hours to apply (not including the nightly backup). After the release is sent to your system. Apply the Release and Set Nightly Backup ⇒ Complete the steps in this section when you are ready to apply the release as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup. one to two days before you plan to apply this release. • • RELxxxxRGA displays for RISC systems – operating system is V3R7 or higher RELxxxxGA displays for NON-RISC systems – operating system is V3R2 The release will apply as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup.

The System Administration Main Menu (DMM005) displays. DMM005 Select one of the following: 1. 3. Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments 8. DEALERLINE Main Menu 24. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup. Type 6.ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD) Before You Begin Step 1 is optional and may be completed anytime during business hours. February 2000 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-3 . Reset Remote Dial Connection Selection or command ===> 23. 4. 23. Backups 2. 90. Begin at the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000). BUSINESSLINE PARTSLINE SRS PARTS SERVICELINE REPORTLINE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SALESLINE GM DEALER COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM RAPID 2000 DEALERLINE XL Version Sign Off Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F13=Information Assistant 6 F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=AS/400 main menu c. b. Type 1. and press Enter. Print Work-Station Printer Assignments 11. Forms Formatting 9. 9. 7. Backups. 6. Name and Address Menu 13. and press Enter. Communications 3. Sign Off SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Main Menu 1 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu d. 8. Labels 7. 2. Security 5. 5. a. System Administration. 1. Restore 6. DMM000 DEALERLINE XL Main Menu Select one of the following: 1. If you want to display and/or print a brief description of the Enhancements included in this release: You may skip this step and continue to step 2.

h. Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) 3.x.xx F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel PgUp PgDn • • If your Operating System Release is V3R7M0 or higher. Type 7. Press F3 until the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu displays. use Pg Up/Dn keys to display the next/previous screen. RELxxxxGA displays under the Name column. and press Enter. While the list displays. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. System Administration Main Menu 24. 4-4 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . type Or • g. Power Down System (No Backup) 6. If your Operating System Release is V3R2M0. The list prints at the system printer. SAM100 Backup Menu Select one of the following: 1. Work With EOD Objects. The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays SA155201 QPADEV0092 Work With EOD Objects More: Type Option Then Press Enter 5=Display 6=Print X=Select Opt Name U=Unselect Status Type *RELEASE 8/04/97 11:57:35 + Description 5 RELxxxxRGA Release x. 6 and press Enter. To print the list. Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) 4. Sign off the system. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) 2. RELxxxxRGA displays under the Name column. Complete one of the following at the Opt column next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA: • To display the list. Press F3 to return to the Work With EOD Objects screen. type 5 and press Enter. Work with EOD Objects 23.ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD) The Backup Menu (SAM100) displays. f. Sign Off Selection or command ===> 7 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu e.

1 . locate the last dependant release (this release will vary for each software release. b. the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup must have *ALLOBJ. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup. Base e. February 2000 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-5 . Complete the following to verify the Operating System Release and the DEALERLINE /XL and Product Release levels: a. If any other value displays. In the following command (step b) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup in place of xxxxx b. At a command line. Sign onto the system using MSECOFR as your user ID. c. The Software Version screen displays: Verify the DEALERLINE / XL Base Release is 4. type WRKUSRPRF xxxxx and press Enter. then 1). To verify the user ID has these authorities: a.ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD) Steps 2 through 4 in this section may be completed anytime during business hours. press F3 to return to a command line. For the EOD application process to work correctly. If necessary.2 days before beginning the steps in the Apply the Release and Set Nightly Backup. At a command line.4. *IOSYSCFG and *SECADM authority. Press F3 to exit. then 1). type VER and press Enter. d. Call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4. Under the Description column. 3. 2. see the Software Update Instructions for the specific release). do not load this software. call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4.

2. and press Enter. 3. 4 and 5 or command ===> F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F21=Select assistance level F16=Repeat position to F24=More keys F17=Position to d. press Enter. Work with User Profiles Type options. At the Opt field. Press the Tab key (or the Field Exit key) twice to position the cursor to the left of the user ID (profile). 3. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner Opt --__ User Profile ------SMITH Text ----------------------------------------------SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Bottom Parameters for options 1. type 5.ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD) The Work with User Profiles screen displays. Display. 2. 4-6 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . Work with User Profiles Type options. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner User Profile ------SMITH Opt --- 5 Text ------------------------------------------------SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Bottom Parameters for options 1. 4 and 5 or command ===> F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F16=Repeat position to F21=Select assistance level F24=More keys F17=Position to c. press Enter.

... One of the following messages will display at the bottom of the screen. At a command line. : *USER Text 5 SMITH Parameters for options 1. Display User Profile ................................. j... Press the Shift and Arrow Up/Down keys to display the Special Authority field................... : 11/16/98 08:34:24 Sign-on attempts not valid ....................... CST 180 Password expiration interval .......... : *NONE F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F16=Repeat position to F17=Position to Group authority type keys .... Verify the values *ALLOBJ • • *IOSYSCFG and *SECADM are listed in the Special Authority field................................................... : *ALLOBJ *IOSYSCFG Bottom *SECADM More......... : 08/31/98 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Michelle D.... Skip the rest of this step and continue to step 4......... : *USRPRF Group authority .................ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD) The Display User Profile – Basic screen displays................... If any other message displays............... e................. then 1)....... February 2000 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-7 ...... type + and press the Space Bar once......................... n. : Assistance level .. In the first available blank line at the Special Authority field.... If the values are listed.. locate the last line of authority....Basic 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner User profile............Groupand 5 or command 3................ User Profile xxxxx Changed............... call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4........... the user must sign off.... At the Special Authority field... : 0 ........ type the additional authority(s): *ALLOBJ............ g.......... Kalich. After a user profile is changed............ press Enter.............. Press F10 for additional parameters... h................... 4 profile.............................. o. If any of the values are not listed.. The Specify More Values for Parameter SPCAUT screen displays.......... then sign back on the system for the profile change to take effect. : *PRIVATE F21=Select assistance level F24=More Supplemental groups . Press Enter twice........... type CHGUSRPRF xxxxx and press F4.... : 02/27/99 Set password to expired. *IOSYSCFG and/or *SECADM......... press F3 to exit and complete the following: In the following command (step f) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup in place of xxxxx f................. Continue to step 4............... : *ENABLED Date password last changed ... 2............... : *NONE *SYSVAL Special authority ............------Previous sign-on ........ Work with User Profiles Type options.................... : SMITH User Opt Profile --........... (substitute user ID for xxxxx)............................... k....... i.... m...... press F3 to exit.... l....................... : Date password expires................................... : QPGMR ===> Owner. Or User class and special authorities do not match system supplied values................ : *NO User class.. These are informational messages......... then press Enter.......................

After listening to the prompts. Your system is ready for the release to be applied as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup. 4-8 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . (EST). to 9 p. The Service Department has completed a Daily Service Order Cutoff for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start.ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD) 4. weekdays 7 a. Sign off the system.m. it must be scheduled for a time when you have a dedicated system (no jobs are running).) All daily batches MUST be pulled to BUSINESSLINE XL for ALL companies. c.m. (Do NOT change the Scheduled Start time for the Daily Parts Cutoff – this could effect the parts ordering process. The system printer is powered on and has an adequate paper supply. A manual Daily Parts Cutoff has completed for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. If you are prompted for a second tape during this procedure. EDS recommends initializing two tapes as a precaution. 5. If you have questions. Verify any Pre-Update Procedures/Instructions are completed by the appropriate department. select the appropriate application. b. the backup must be canceled and restarted from the beginning.m. Initialize one or two tape cartridges (using volume ID of DBK1) to be used for the DEALERLINE nightly backup. Critical Manufacturer Communications are NOT scheduled for the same time or during the DEALERLINE nightly backup. please call the EDS Customer Support Center at 1-800-633-6323.m. Verify any Pre-Update Instructions are complete. only pull them to BUSINESSLINE XL. Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup Verify the following: When the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to run. You DO NOT have to apply daily batches. to 9 p. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup. Complete the following to initialize tapes for the DEALERLINE nightly backup: a. and Saturday 9 a. and one is not available.

Begin at the Backup Menu (SAM100). Work with EOD Objects Backup Menu From the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000). Type 1.ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD) 1. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. Sign Off Selection or command ===> 1 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu 3. Backups. SAM100 Select one of the following: 1. and press Enter. System Administration. type GO SAM100 and press Enter. Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) 4. and press Enter. and press Enter. type 1. 23. 2. Sign onto the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup. Power Down System (No Backup) 6. To display the Backup Menu: • Or • At a command line. System Administration Main Menu 24. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) 2. February 2000 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-9 . type 6. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down). From the System Administration Main Menu (DMM005). Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) 3.

ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD)

The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays.
SA155201 QPADEV0092 8/04/97 11:57:35 More: Type Option Then Press Enter 5=Display 6=Print X=Select Opt Name U=Unselect Status Type *RELEASE +

Work With EOD Objects

Description

X

RELxxxxRGA

Release x.x.xx

F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel PgUp PgDn

If your Operating System Release is V3R7M0 or higher, RELxxxxRGA displays under the Name column. If your Operating System Release is V3R2M0 RELxxxxGA displays under the Name column. 4. To apply the release as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup, ensure an X displays under the Opt column, next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA. (If necessary, type X to Select the release.) If you press Enter at this screen with the release Selected (X under the Opt field next to the release), the release will apply as part of the DEALERLINE backup. If you need to Unselect the release (the release will not apply as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup), type U under the Opt column, next to the release Name and press Enter. The Work With EOD screen and the release will display again when you set up the next DEALERLINE nightly backup; it will continue to display until you Select (X) for the release to apply.

5.

Press Enter again to exit this screen. The system performs a series of edits to ensure the release can be applied to your system; this may take a few minutes.

4-10

System Administrator Tasks

April 2000

ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD)

The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) screen displays.
8/04/97 12:22:09 File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) A1505DF SA150501

The back up procedure performs two important functions: 1. File saving - Copies and saves ALL data files. 2. File maintenance - Condenses and compresses data files. You may choose the order in which these two functions are performed. Enter 1 - To save FILES first. Enter 2 - To perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Guidelines are listed below. A. If your system requires only one tape cartridge or tape reel to complete the backup procedure, you will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. B. If you normally insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel) in the morning, you will want to perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Enter 2 and press enter. C. If you normally wait in the evening to insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel), You will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. Enter your selection PLEASE... 2 ENTER - Continue CMD-7 - End of Job

6.

Type

2

and press Enter.

It is recommended that you type 2 to perform File Maintenance first, especially if your system uses two tapes for a backup. The release will be applied before saving the data files. The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) screen displays.
8/04/97 12:30:40 File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) SA1505DF SA150502

Enter the time you would like to begin the backup. NOTE: The time should be at least 5 MINUTES from now, or Enter ZEROS if you want the backup to start NOW. If a time is entered it MUST be in military time (00:00:00 23:59:59).

Enter your selection PLEASE... 00 00 00

HH - Hours MM - Minutes SS - Seconds

ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job

7.

Type the time you would like the DEALERLINE nightly backup and release to begin. For example 10:00 p.m. would be typed 22 00 00 and 2:00 a.m. would be typed 02 00 00. Ensure the time you specify is a time when the system will be dedicated. Both the DEALERLINE nightly backup and the release apply process require a dedicated system. The software release (not including the backup) will take approximately 30 minutes to 2 hours to apply. Be sure to allow plenty of time for the software release and your DEALERLINE nightly backup to complete. Press Enter to continue.

8.

Follow the instructions on the rest of the backup screens as you normally would when performing a DEALERLINE nightly backup. After completing step 8, the remaining steps can be completed the next morning.

February 2000

Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update

4-11

ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD)

9.

After the backup completes, the following information prints:

UPGRADE started for release xxxx. Release xxxx applied successfully.
If any other information prints, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1) immediately.

!

The next time you sign onto the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup, messages about the status of the software update display as part of the sign on messages. Please read these messages to make sure the software update completed successfully.

10. Sign onto the system console using

MSECOFR

as your user ID.

4-12

System Administrator Tasks

April 2000

ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD)

11.

At a command line, type

VER

and press Enter.

The following screen displays:
SA0711DF QPADEV0092 Automotive Retail Group Software Version Display 2/04/00 15:13:34 Operating System Release : VxRxM0

DEALERLINE/XL Base Release: 4.4 Creation Date . . . . . : 10/26/94 Load Date . . . . . . . : 10/29/94 Product Code* Product Release *ALL Code, *ALL Creation Date Load Date

PTF Information: *NO *YES, *NO More: + Description

Product Code

4590
4582 4580 4572 4570 4565 4562 4560 4550

DL
DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL

xx/xx/99 xx/xx/99
xx/xx/99 xx/xx/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 xx/xx/98 xx/xx/99 xx/xx/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 xx/xx/98

1999 BUSINESSLINE YEAR eND
PARTSLINE ENHANCEMENTS DEALERLINE 1999 RELASE TWO SATURN LS MODEL UPDATE DEALERLINE 1999 RELEASE ONE COMMON DELIVERY REPORTING GM STOCKING GUIDE UPDATE 1998 BUSINESSLINE YEAR END DEALERLINE 1998 RELEASE TWO

a.

On the first detail line, under the Description column locate the Description of the new software; ensure the new Product Release code displays under the Product Release column. In this example, 4590 is the new Product Release, and the Description of the new software is 1999 BUSINESSLINE Year End. If any other value displays, call the EDS Customer Support Center.

b. 12.

Press F3 to return to a command line.

After applying this release, complete a normal DEALERLINE nightly backup before completing a system save. After the DEALERLINE nightly backup completes normally, complete a System Save.

13.

You can set up the System Save for Delayed-Time processing (see the System Save Instructions). The System Save should be completed within 5 days after loading the release. Make sure the screen print of the Software Version Display screen is stored with the system save tape(s).
14. Ensure any Post-Update Procedures/Instructions are completed by the appropriate department.

February 2000

Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update

4-13

SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE

SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE
The following instructions are to load and apply the software update from a tape cartridge. These instructions are generic. Each software update is identified by a Base Release and a Product Release number. In these instructions, xxxx represents the DEALERLINE Product Release number, for example, 4590. Each software release will first require your operating system version and DEALERLINE software Product Release to be at a specific version or release. (See the following section, Before You Begin, step 2.) Additionally, some releases require Pre-Update and/or Post-Update Instructions be completed before or after loading the software update. The Software Update Instructions are divided into two sections:

• Before You Begin
⇒ Complete the steps in this section, anytime during business hours, 1 to 2 days before you plan to apply this release. ⇒ Step 4, page 4-18, contains the instructions to restore the release from the tape cartridge to your system. If this step is not completed, the release will not load. After this step is complete, RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA (depending on your Operating System Release) displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen when you set up your DEALERLINE nightly backup. • • RELxxxxRGA displays for RISC systems – operating system is V3R7 or higher RELxxxxGA displays for NON-RISC systems – operating system is V3R2

⇒ The release is restored in a Selected status and will apply as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup unless you Unselect it (see step 4, page 22, in the Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup section). While the release displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen, you can display and/or print a brief description of the software Enhancements in this release. See step 7, page 4-19, in this section for instructions.

• Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup
⇒ Complete the steps in this section when you are ready to apply the release to your system as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup. ⇒ DEALERLINE software releases usually take 30 minutes to 2 hours to apply (not including the DEALERLINE nightly backup). ⇒ The System Save Instructions should be completed within 5 days after a DEALERLINE software update is successfully applied to your system (see the Backups chapter).

4-14

System Administrator Tasks

April 2000

SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE

Before You Begin

Steps 1 through 7 may be completed anytime during business hours, 1 - 2 days before beginning the steps in Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup.
1. Clean the tape drive to prevent tape drive errors from occurring during this procedure. Base

2. Complete the following to verify the Operating System Release and the DEALERLINE /XL and Product Release levels: a. b. Sign onto the system using MSECOFR as your User ID. At a command line, type VER and press Enter. The Software Version screen displays.

SA0711DF QPADEV0092

4.4

Automotive Retail Group Software Version Display

2/04/00 15:13:34 V3R2M0 Operating System Release : VxRxM0

DEALERLINE/XL Base Release: 4.4 Creation Date . . . . . : 10/26/94 Load Date . . . . . . . : 10/29/94 Product Code* Product 4590 *ALL Code, *ALL

PTF Information: *NO *YES, *NO More: 1999 BUSINESSLINE YEAR END Description +

Release

Product Creation Load DL xx/xx/99 xx/xx/99 Code Date Date

4582 4580 4572 4570 4565 4562 4560 4550

DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL

XX/XX/98 xx/xx/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 xx/xx/98

XX/XX/99 xx/xx/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 xx/xx/98

PARTSLINE ENHANCEMENTS DEALERLINE 1999 RELASE TWO SATURN LS MODEL UPDATE DEALERLINE 1999 RELEASE ONE COMMON DELIVERY REPORTING GM STOCKING GUIDE UPDATE 1998 BUSINESSLINE YEAR END DEALERLINE 1998 RELEASE TWO

c.

Verify the DEALERLINE / XL Base Release is 4.4. If any other value displays, do not load this software; press F3 to return to a command line. Call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1).

d.

Under the Description column, locate the last dependant release (this release will vary for each software release; see the Software Update Instructions for the specific release). If necessary, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). Press F3 to exit.

e.

February 2000

Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update

4-15

SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE

3.

For the EOD application process to work correctly, the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup must have *ALLOBJ, *IOSYSCFG and *SECADM authority. To verify the backup user ID has these authorities: a. Sign onto the system using MSECOFR as your user ID.

In the following command (step b) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup in place of xxxxx b. At a command line, type WRKUSRPRF xxxxx and press Enter.

The Work with User Profiles screen displays.
Work with User Profiles Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner Opt --__ User Profile ------SMITH Text ----------------------------------------------SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Bottom Parameters for options 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 or command ===> F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F16=Repeat position to F21=Select assistance level F24=More keys F17=Position to

c.

Press the Tab key (or the Field Exit key) twice to position the cursor to the left of the user ID (user profile).
Work with User Profiles Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner User Profile ------SMITH

Opt ---

5

Text ------------------------------------------------SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Bottom Parameters for options 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 or command ===> F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F21=Select assistance level F16=Repeat position to F24=More keys F17=Position to

d.

At the Opt field, type 5, Display, and press Enter.

4-16

System Administrator Tasks

April 2000

Basic User profile ........ : User class ....... In the first available blank line at the Special Authority field.. the user must sign off....... then sign back on the system for the profile change to take effect.. : Assistance level ... : Sign-on attempts not valid .. After a user profile is changed. Verify the values *ALLOBJ *IOSYSCFG and *SECADM are listed in the Special Authority field...... One of the following messages will display at the bottom of the screen. F3=Exit F12=Cancel QPGMR *USRPRF *NONE *PRIVATE *NONE *SYSVAL More..... Press the Shift and Arrow Up/Down keys to display the Special Authority field. i.........SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE The Display User Profile – Basic screen displays...................... *IOSYSCFG *SECADM Group profile . At the Special Authority field. m. user ID for xxxxx).. call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4.... e.... type the additional authority(s): *ALLOBJ. : Date password last changed ...... locate the last line of authority... h.... *IOSYSCFG and/or *SECADM.. press F3 to exit.. : Group authority .............. Skip the rest of this step and continue to step 4.. Press Enter twice.. type CHGUSRPRF xxxxx and press F4... : Press Enter to continue... : SMITH Previous sign-on . then 1).. k. o..... These are informational messages... • If any of the values are not listed.. g........... press F3 to exit and continue to step f: In the following command (step f) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup in place of xxxxx f... At a command line.......... : Set password to expired ..... Continue to step 4.... (substitute User Profile xxxxx Changed.. Or User class and special authorities do not match system supplied values.... If any other message displays.... February 2000 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-17 . : 11/16/98 0 *ENABLED 08/31/98 180 02/27/99 *NO *USER 08:34:24 Special authority : *ALLOBJ ...... Display User Profile . : . : Supplemental groups .. l. The Specify More Values for Parameter SPCAUT screen displays. n...... then press Enter. j. : Group authority type ..... : Password expiration interval : Date password expires .. type + and press the Space Bar once.. • If the values are listed.... : Owner ... Press F10 for additional parameters.

) Insert the Base Release x. You will need to select the release from the Work With EOD Objects screen which displays when you set up your next DEALERLINE nightly backup. At a command line type LODRUN TC and press Enter. Continue to step 5. Sign onto the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup. (This user ID has authority to DEALERLINE libraries. e.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE 4. d. b. Initialize one or two tape cartridges (using volume ID of DBK1) to be used for the DEALERLINE nightly backup. the backup must be canceled and restarted from the beginning.x. ! 6. When the following message displays: 1 Release Restored and 1 Release Scheduled to be applied during your Nightly Backup The release is successfully restored to your system and will now display as either RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA (depending on your Operating System Release – Non-RISC or RISC) on the Work With EOD Objects screen. Informational messages display. not require a dedicated system. Product Release xx tape cartridge into the tape drive. EDS recommends initializing two tapes as a precaution. and one is not available. This step should take 30 minutes or less to complete and does a. If you are prompted for a second tape during this procedure. 5. This step copies the release onto your system from the tape cartridge. 4-18 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . Remove the tape from the tape drive. c. Sign off the system. Your system is ready for the release to be applied as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup.

2. 90. BUSINESSLINE PARTSLINE SRS PARTS SERVICELINE REPORTLINE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SALESLINE GM DEALER COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM RAPID 2000 DEALERLINE XL Version Sign Off DEALERLINE XL Main Menu SAM100 and press Enter. Sign Off d. Selection or command 6 ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F13=Information Assistant F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=AS/400 main menu c. DEALERLINE Main Menu 24. at a command line. Type 6. 6.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE Step 7 may be completed anytime. and press Enter. 8. Type 1. continue to step c. 7. 6. This step is optional. Restore Labels Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments Forms Formatting Print Work-Station Printer Assignments 11. Communications 3. 3. and press Enter February 2000 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-19 . Security 5. Name and Address Menu 13. 7. 4. as long as the release displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen. Or Begin at the Backup Menu (SAM100). 9. b. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup. System Administration. Backups 2. DMM000 Select one of the following: 1. 23. 9. DMM005 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Main Menu Select one of the following: 1. 8. type GO then continue to step e. The System Administration Main Menu (DMM005) displays. 5. Reset Remote Dial Connection Selection or command ===> 1 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu 23. Begin at the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000). Backups. If you want to display and/or print a brief description of the Enhancements included in this release: ! a. 7.

type • g. To print the list. h. Sign off the system.x. 3. 4-20 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) Power Down System (No Backup) Backup Menu 6. The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays SA155201 QPADEV0092 More: + Type Option Then Press Enter 5=Display 6=Print Opt Name Work With EOD Objects 8/04/97 11:57:35 X=Select U=Unselect Status Type *RELEASE Description 5 RELxxxxRGA Release x. System Administration Main Menu 24.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE The Backup Menu (SAM100) displays. 6 and press Enter. Press F3 to return to the Work With EOD Objects screen. and press Enter. 2. If your Operating System Release is V3R2M0. Complete one of the following at the Opt column next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA: • To display the list. If your Operating System Release is V3R7M0 or higher. The list prints at the system printer. Press F3 until the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu displays. 4. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. use Pg Up/Down keys to display the next/previous screen. RELxxxxRGA displays under the Name column. SAM100 Select one of the following: 1. Type 7. Work with EOD Objects 23. Work With EOD Objects. While the list displays. RELxxxxGA displays under the Name column. type 5 and press Enter. Sign Off Selection or command 7 ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu e.xx F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel PgUp PgDn • • f.

SAM100 Select one of the following: 1. The Service Department has completed a Daily Service Order Cutoff for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. A manual Daily Parts Cutoff has completed for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. Begin at the Backup Menu (SAM100): • Or • From the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000).m. After listening to the prompts. type 1. please call the EDS Customer Support Center at 1-800-633-6323. You DO NOT have to apply daily batches. 2. (EST). it must be scheduled for a time when you have a dedicated system (no jobs are running). Critical Manufacturer Communications are NOT scheduled for the same time or during the DEALERLINE nightly backup. and Saturday 9 a. The system printer is powered on and has an adequate paper supply. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEAQLERLINE nightly backup.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup Verify the following: When the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to run. select the appropriate application. weekdays 7 a. 4.m. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. and press Enter. type 6. Sign Off Selection or command ===> 1 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu 3. and press Enter. Backups. to 9 p. 3. (Do NOT change the Scheduled Start time for the Daily Parts Cutoff – this could effect the parts ordering process. At a command line. If you have questions. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down). and press Enter. System Administration Main Menu 24. to 9 p. 1.m. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) Power Down System (No Backup) Backup Menu 6. only pull them to BUSINESSLINE XL. System Administration. From the System Administration Main Menu (DMM005). February 2000 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-21 . type GO SAM100 and press Enter.) All daily batches MUST be pulled to BUSINESSLINE XL for ALL companies. Type 1. Work with EOD Objects 23. 2.m.

each day. next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA. when you set up your nightly backup. type U under the Opt column.x. the Work With EOD screen and the release will display again. To Unselect the release (the release will not apply as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup). next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA and press Enter. type X at the Opt column. If your Operating System Release is V3R7M0 or higher. 4-22 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . To apply the release as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup: (If *SELECTED DOES NOT display as the Status.the release will apply as part of the DEALERLINE backup. RELxxxxRGA displays under the Name column. Press Enter again to exit this screen. ! The system performs a series of edits to ensure the release can be applied to your system.) Press Enter (with an X at the Opt field) .xx Work With EOD Objects 8/04/97 11:57:35 More: X=Select U=Unselect Status *SELECTED Type *RELEASE + F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel PgUp PgDn • • 4. If your Operating System Release is V3R2M0. RELxxxxGA displays under the Name column. ! 5. it will continue to display until you Select (X) for the release to apply. this may take a few minutes. If you typed U to Unselect the release.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays. S155201 QPADEV0092 Type Option Then Press Enter 5=Display 6=Print Opt X Name RELxxxxRGA Description RELEASE x.

For example. Ensure the time you specify is a time when the system will be dedicated. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel) in the morning. File maintenance . Enter 2 . Press Enter to continue.Condenses and compresses data files..To save FILES first. Type the time you would like the nightly backup and release to begin. Enter 1 or simply press enter.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) screen displays. 2.End of Job 7. February 2000 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-23 . Enter 1 . B. Be sure to allow plenty of time for the software release and your DEALERLINE nightly backup to complete. would be typed 02 00 00.m.Continue 2 CMD-7 . Enter 2 and press enter. 8/04/97 12:22:09 File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) A1505DF SA150501 The back up procedure performs two important functions: 1. If a time is entered it MUST be in military time (00:00:00 23:59:59). The release will be applied before saving the data files. NOTE: The time should be at least 5 MINUTES from now. You will want to save the FILES first. File saving .End of Job EDS recommends that you type 2 to perform File Maintenance first. ENTER .. you will want to perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Both the DEALERLINE nightly backup and the release apply process require a dedicated system. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel). 6. especially if your system uses two tapes for a backup. Enter your selection PLEASE. The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) screen displays. If you normally wait in the evening to insert additional media (EG. A. If you normally insert additional media (EG.Hours MM .Copies and saves ALL data files. Enter 1 or simply press enter.Seconds ENTER . The software release (not including the backup) will take approximately 2 to 4 hours to apply.To perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. 10:00 p. You may choose the order in which these two functions are performed. or Enter ZEROS if you want the backup to start NOW.Continue CMD-7 . If your system requires only one tape cartridge or tape reel to complete the backup procedure.Minutes SS . C. Enter your selection PLEASE 00 00 00 HH . 8/04/97 12:30:40 File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) SA1505DF SA150502 Enter the time you would like to begin the backup. would be typed 22 00 00 and 2:00 a. you will want to save the FILES first. Guidelines are listed below.m. Type 2 and press Enter.

the remaining steps can be completed the next morning. ! The next time you sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup. the following information prints: UPGRADE started for release xxxx. messages about the status of the software update display as part of your sign on messages. then 1) immediately. Follow the instructions on the rest of the backup screens as you normally would when performing a backup. After completing step 8. Sign onto the system console using MSECOFR as your User ID. 9. After the backup completes.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE 8. 4-24 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . Please read these messages completely to make sure the software update completed successfully. call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4. 11. If any other information prints. Release xxxx applied successfully.

then 1). Verify the current Product Release displays under the Product Release column.x. . The System Save can be set to process using Delayed Time (see the System Save Instructions). *NO More: + Description Product Code 4590 4582 4580 4572 4570 4565 4562 4560 4550 DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL xx/xx/99 xx/xx/99 xx/xx/99 xx/xx/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 xx/xx/98 xx/xx/99 xx/xx/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 xx/xx/98 1999 BUSINESSLINE YEAR eND PARTSLINE ENHANCEMENTS DEALERLINE 1999 RELASE TWO SATURN LS MODEL UPDATE DEALERLINE 1999 RELEASE ONE COMMON DELIVERY REPORTING GM STOCKING GUIDE UPDATE 1998 BUSINESSLINE YEAR END DEALERLINE 1998 RELEASE TWO a. : 10/26/94 Load Date . . . February 2000 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-25 . . type VER and press Enter. The System Save should be completed within 5 days after loading the release. 13. call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4. . .SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE 12. If any other value displays. The following screen displays: SA0711DF QPADEV0092 Automotive Retail Group Software Version Display 2/04/00 15:13:34 Operating System Release : VxRxM0 DEALERLINE/XL Base Release: 4. After the DEALERLINE nightly backup completes normally. complete a normal DEALERLINE nightly backup before completing a system save. At a command line. . After a successful system save is completed. the Base Release x. complete a System Save. Product Release xx tape cartridge can be recycled/reused. b.4 Creation Date . After applying this release. Make sure the screen print of the Software Version Display screen is stored with the system save tape(s). . . Press F3 to return to a command line. . 14. *ALL Creation Date Load Date PTF Information: *NO *YES. : 10/29/94 Product Code* Product Release *ALL Code.

EXERCISE LOAD AND APPLY DEALERLINE SOFTWARE UPDATES EXERCISE 1. Is a dedicated system required to load an EOD tape? 4-26 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .LOAD AND APPLY DEALERLINE SOFTWARE UPDATES . What command is used to load an EOD tape onto the system? ___________________________ 2.

February 2000 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-27 .LOAD AND APPLY DEALERLINE SOFTWARE UPDATES .EXERCISE Solutions to Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Updates Exercise 1. No. LODRUN TC 2. a dedicated system is not required to load an EOD tape.

EXERCISE This page intentionally left blank. 4-28 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .LOAD AND APPLY DEALERLINE SOFTWARE UPDATES .

EXERCISE . February 2000 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-29 .LOAD AND APPLY DEALERLINE SOFTWARE UPDATES .

EXERCISE 4-30 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .LOAD AND APPLY DEALERLINE SOFTWARE UPDATES .

.................... 4-39 June 2002 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-i ................... 4-14 SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD ................................. 4-26 LOAD AND APPLY DEALERLINE SOFTWARE UPDATES EXERCISE ...................................................................................... 4-1 ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD).......................4 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Updates Table of Contents OVERVIEW ...... 4-2 SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE ..........................................................

Table of Contents 4-ii System Administrator Tasks June 2002 .

You will receive software updates either electronically [Electronic Object Distribution (EOD)]. June 2002 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-1 . Software Update Instructions are sent. These are sent periodically and should be loaded and applied to your system soon after you receive it.OVERVIEW Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update OVERVIEW Software updates are enhancements and fixes to the DEALERLINE software. With each type of update. or on a tape cartridge. such as checking for a specific operating system and release dependency (dependency will vary with each software update) before loading and applying the software. Any Pre-Update (specific items or conditions to verify before loading the software) and any Post-Update instructions (specific items or conditions to verify after loading the software) are included with the Software Update Instructions. replace xxxx with the actual DEALERLINE Base Release and Product Release. In this guide. The Software Update Instructions in this guide are generic – the set of instructions you receive with each release contain specific instructions. along with color-coded packets explaining the enhancement to each applicable DEALERLINE application.

⇒ DEALERLINE software releases usually take 30 minutes to 2 hours to apply (not including the nightly backup). page 4-3. you can display and/or print a brief description of the software Enhancements in this release. The Software Update Instructions are divided into two sections: Before You Begin ⇒ Complete the steps in the Before You Begin section anytime during business hours. • • RELxxxxRGA displays for RISC systems – operating system is V3R7 or higher RELxxxxGA displays for NON-RISC systems – operating system is V3R2 The release will apply as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup. one to two days before you plan to apply this release. After the release is sent to your system. Apply the Release and Set Nightly Backup ⇒ Complete the steps in this section when you are ready to apply the release as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup. after selecting the release on the Work With EOD Objects screen. ⇒ While the release displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen. A System Save should be completed within 5 days after a DEALERLINE software update is successfully applied to your system (see the Backups chapter).ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD) ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD) Software releases are automatically sent to your AS/400 system using the Electronic Object Distribution (EOD) process. 4-2 System Administrator Tasks June 2002 . See step 1. RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA (depending on your Operating System Release) displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen (xxxx=DEALERLINE software release).

7. BUSINESSLINE PARTSLINE SRS PARTS SERVICELINE REPORTLINE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SALESLINE GM DEALER COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM RAPID 2000 DEALERLINE XL Version Sign Off Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F13=Information Assistant 6 F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=AS/400 main menu c.ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD) Before You Begin Step 1 is optional and may be completed anytime during business hours. 2. and press Enter. Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments 8. Backups 2. June 2002 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-3 . 4. Sign Off SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Main Menu 1 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu d. Type 6. 6. If you want to display and/or print a brief description of the Enhancements included in this release: You may skip this step and continue to step 2. Restore 6. 90. Forms Formatting 9. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup. The System Administration Main Menu (DMM005) displays. DMM000 DEALERLINE XL Main Menu Select one of the following: 1. Communications 3. a. Reset Remote Dial Connection Selection or command ===> 23. and press Enter. 9. Labels 7. System Administration. 5. Backups. Print Work-Station Printer Assignments 11. Type 1. Security 5. Name and Address Menu 13. DEALERLINE Main Menu 24. 8. b. 23. Begin at the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000). 1. DMM005 Select one of the following: 1. 3.

Power Down System (No Backup) 6. System Administration Main Menu 24.ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD) The Backup Menu (SAM100) displays. While the list displays. The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays SA155201 QPADEV0092 Work With EOD Objects More: Type Option Then Press Enter 5=Display 6=Print X=Select Opt Name U=Unselect Status Type *RELEASE 8/04/97 11:57:35 + Description 5 RELxxxxRGA Release x. Work with EOD Objects 23. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) 2. f. type 5 and press Enter. If your Operating System Release is V3R2M0. Complete one of the following at the Opt column next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA: • To display the list.xx F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel PgUp PgDn • • If your Operating System Release is V3R7M0 or higher. RELxxxxGA displays under the Name column. use Pg Up/Dn keys to display the next/previous screen. Type 7. Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) 3. Sign off the system. SAM100 Backup Menu Select one of the following: 1. RELxxxxRGA displays under the Name column. The list prints at the system printer. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. Work With EOD Objects. Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) 4. type 6 and press Enter.x. Sign Off Selection or command ===> 7 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu e. and press Enter. To print the list. h. Press F3 until the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu displays. Or • g. 4-4 System Administrator Tasks June 2002 . Press F3 to return to the Work With EOD Objects screen.

ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD)

Steps 2 through 4 in this section may be completed anytime during business hours, 1 - 2 days before beginning the steps in the Apply the Release and Set Nightly Backup.
2. Complete the following to verify the Operating System Release and the DEALERLINE /XL Base and Product Release levels: a. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup. b. At a command line, type VER and press Enter. The Software Version screen displays: c. Verify the DEALERLINE / XL Base Release is 4.4. If any other value displays, do not load this software; press F3 to return to a command line. Call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). d. Under the Description column, locate the last dependant release (this release will vary for each software release; see the Software Update Instructions for the specific release). If necessary, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). e. Press F3 to exit. 3. For the EOD application process to work correctly, the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup must have *ALLOBJ, *IOSYSCFG and *SECADM authority. To verify the user ID has these authorities: a. Sign onto the system using MSECOFR as your user ID. In the following command (step b) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup in place of xxxxx b. At a command line, type WRKUSRPRF xxxxx and press Enter.

June 2002

Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update

4-5

ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD)

The Work with User Profiles screen displays.
Work with User Profiles Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner Opt --__ User Profile ------SMITH Text ----------------------------------------------SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Bottom Parameters for options 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 or command ===> F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F16=Repeat position to F21=Select assistance level F24=More keys F17=Position to

c. Press the Tab key (or the Field Exit key) twice to position the cursor to the left of the user ID (profile).
Work with User Profiles Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner User Profile ------SMITH

Opt ---

5

Text ------------------------------------------------SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

Bottom Parameters for options 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 or command ===> F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F21=Select assistance level F16=Repeat position to F24=More keys F17=Position to

d. At the Opt field, type 5, Display, and press Enter.

4-6

System Administrator Tasks

June 2002

ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD)

The Display User Profile – Basic screen displays.
Work with User Profiles Type options, press Enter. Display User Profile - Basic 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display User profile........................................................ : SMITH 12=Work with objects by owner User Opt Profile --- ------Previous sign-on ............................................... : 11/16/98 08:34:24 Sign-on attempts not valid ................................ : 0 .......................................................................... : *ENABLED Date password last changed ............................. : 08/31/98 Password expiration interval ............................. : 180 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Michelle D. Kalich, CST Date password expires.................................... : 02/27/99 Set password to expired.................................... : *NO User class......................................................... : *USER

Text

5

SMITH

Special authority ................. : *ALLOBJ *IOSYSCFG *SECADM Bottom
Parameters for options 1, 2,Groupand 5 or command 3, 4 profile..................................................... : QPGMR Owner............................................................... : *USRPRF ===> Group authority ................................................. : *NONE F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F16=Repeat position to F17=Position to Group authority type ......................................... : *PRIVATE F21=Select assistance level F24=More keys Supplemental groups ........................................ : *NONE
Assistance level ................................................ : *SYSVAL More...

e. Verify the values *ALLOBJ Special Authority field. • •

*IOSYSCFG and *SECADM are listed in the

If the values are listed, press F3 to exit. Skip the rest of this step and continue to step 4. If any of the values are not listed, press F3 to exit and complete the following: In the following command (step f) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup in place of xxxxx

f. At a command line, type

CHGUSRPRF

xxxxx

and press F4.

g. Press F10 for additional parameters. h. Press the Shift and Arrow Up/Down keys to display the Special Authority field. i. At the Special Authority field, locate the last line of authority, type + and press the Space Bar once, then press Enter. j. The Specify More Values for Parameter SPCAUT screen displays. k. In the first available blank line at the Special Authority field, type the additional authority(s): *ALLOBJ, *IOSYSCFG and/or *SECADM. l. Press Enter twice. m. One of the following messages will display at the bottom of the screen, (substitute user ID for xxxxx).
User Profile xxxxx Changed.

Or
User class and special authorities do not match system supplied values.

These are informational messages. If any other message displays, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). n. After a user profile is changed, the user must sign off, then sign back on the system for the profile change to take effect. o. Continue to step 4.
June 2002 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-7

ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD)

4. Complete the following to initialize tapes for the DEALERLINE nightly backup: a. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup. b. Initialize one or two tape cartridges (using volume ID of DBK1) to be used for the DEALERLINE nightly backup.
EDS recommends initializing two tapes as a precaution. If you are prompted for a second tape during this procedure, and one is not available, the backup must be canceled and restarted from the beginning.

c. Sign off the system.

Your system is ready for the release to be applied as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup.
5. Verify any Pre-Update Instructions are complete.

Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup
Verify the following: When the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to run, it must be scheduled for a time when you have a dedicated system (no jobs are running). The system printer is powered on and has an adequate paper supply. Critical Manufacturer Communications are NOT scheduled for the same time or during the DEALERLINE nightly backup. The Service Department has completed a Daily Service Order Cutoff for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. A manual Daily Parts Cutoff has completed for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. (Do NOT change the Scheduled Start time for the Daily Parts Cutoff – this could effect the parts ordering process.) All daily batches MUST be pulled to BUSINESSLINE XL for ALL companies. You DO NOT have to apply daily batches, only pull them to BUSINESSLINE XL. Verify any Pre-Update Procedures/Instructions are completed by the appropriate department.
If you have questions, please call the EDS Customer Support Center at 1-800-633-6323, weekdays 7 a.m. to 9 p.m. and Saturday 9 a.m. to 9 p.m. (EST). After listening to the prompts, select the appropriate application.

4-8

System Administrator Tasks

June 2002

ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD)

1. Sign onto the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE

nightly backup. 2. Begin at the Backup Menu (SAM100). To display the Backup Menu: • From the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000), type 6, System Administration, and press Enter. From the System Administration Main Menu (DMM005), type 1, Backups, and press Enter.

Or • At a command line, type GO SAM100 and press Enter.
SAM100 Select one of the following: 1. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) 2. Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) 3. Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) 4. Power Down System (No Backup) 6. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. Work with EOD Objects Backup Menu

23. System Administration Main Menu 24. Sign Off

Selection or command ===>

1

F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu

3. Type 1, Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down), and press Enter.

June 2002

Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update

4-9

ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD)

The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays.
SA155201 QPADEV0092 Work With EOD Objects More: Type Option Then Press Enter 5=Display 6=Print X=Select Opt Name U=Unselect Status Type *RELEASE 8/04/97 11:57:35 +

Description

X

RELxxxxRGA

Release x.x.xx

F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel PgUp PgDn

If your Operating System Release is V3R7M0 or higher, RELxxxxRGA displays under the Name column. If your Operating System Release is V3R2M0 RELxxxxGA displays under the Name column. 4. To apply the release as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup, ensure an X displays under the Opt column, next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA. (If necessary, type X to Select the release.) If you press Enter at this screen with the release Selected (X under the Opt field next to the release), the release will apply as part of the DEALERLINE backup.

If you need to Unselect the release (the release will not apply as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup), type U under the Opt column, next to the release Name and press Enter.
The Work With EOD screen and the release will display again when you set up the next DEALERLINE nightly backup; it will continue to display until you Select (X) for the release to apply.

5. Press Enter again to exit this screen. The system performs a series of edits to ensure the release can be applied to your system; this may take a few minutes.

4-10

System Administrator Tasks

June 2002

ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD)

The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) screen displays.
8/04/97 12:22:09 File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) A1505DF SA150501 The back up procedure performs two important functions: 1. File saving - Copies and saves ALL data files. 2. File maintenance - Condenses and compresses data files. You may choose the order in which these two functions are performed. Enter 1 - To save FILES first. Enter 2 - To perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Guidelines are listed below. A. If your system requires only one tape cartridge or tape reel to complete the backup procedure, you will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. B. If you normally insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel) in the morning, you will want to perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Enter 2 and press enter. C. If you normally wait in the evening to insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel), You will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. Enter your selection PLEASE... 2 ENTER - Continue CMD-7 - End of Job

6. Type 2 and press Enter. It is recommended that you type 2 to perform File Maintenance first, especially if your system uses two tapes for a backup. The release will be applied before saving the data files. The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) screen displays.
8/04/97 12:30:40 File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) SA1505DF SA150502

Enter the time you would like to begin the backup. NOTE: The time should be at least 5 MINUTES from now, or Enter ZEROS if you want the backup to start NOW. If a time is entered it MUST be in military time (00:00:00 23:59:59).

Enter your selection PLEASE... 00 00 00

HH - Hours MM - Minutes SS - Seconds

ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job

7. Type the time you would like the DEALERLINE nightly backup and release to begin. For example 10:00 p.m. would be typed 22 00 00 and 2:00 a.m. would be typed 02 00 00. Ensure the time you specify is a time when the system will be dedicated. Both the DEALERLINE nightly backup and the release apply process require a dedicated system. The software release (not including the backup) will take approximately 30 minutes to 2 hours to apply. Be sure to allow plenty of time for the software release and your DEALERLINE nightly backup to complete. Press Enter to continue.

June 2002

Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update

4-11

10. Follow the instructions on the rest of the backup screens as you normally would when performing a DEALERLINE nightly backup. If any other information prints. 4-12 System Administrator Tasks June 2002 . 9. the following information prints: UPGRADE started for release xxxx. the remaining steps can be completed the next morning. then 1) immediately. call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4. messages about the status of the software update display as part of the sign on messages. Sign onto the system console using MSECOFR as your user ID.ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD) 8. After the backup completes. Release xxxx applied successfully. Please read these messages to make sure the software update completed successfully. ! The next time you sign onto the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup. After completing step 8.

: 10/29/94 Product Code* Product Release *ALL Code. Make sure the screen print of the Software Version Display screen is stored with the system save tape(s). At a command line. If any other value displays. complete a normal DEALERLINE nightly backup before completing a system save. 13. *ALL Creation Date Load Date PTF Information: *NO *YES. b.ELECTRONIC OBJECT DISTRIBUTION (EOD) 11. complete a System Save. Press F3 to return to a command line. . After the DEALERLINE nightly backup completes normally. Ensure any Post-Update Procedures/Instructions are completed by the appropriate department. On the first detail line. The following screen displays: SA0711DF QPADEV0092 Automotive Retail Group Software Version Display 2/04/00 15:13:34 Operating System Release : VxRxM0 DEALERLINE/XL Base Release: 4. 12. . . . under the Description column locate the Description of the new software. You can set up the System Save for Delayed-Time processing (see the System Save Instructions). and the Description of the new software is 1999 BUSINESSLINE Year End. . . 14. *NO More: + Description Product Code 4590 4582 4580 4572 4570 4565 4562 4560 4550 4545 F3=Exit DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 F4=*Prompt XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 F17=Top 1999 BUSINESSLINE Year End PARTSLINE Enhancements DEALERLINE 1999 Relase Two Saturn LS Model Update DEALERLINE 1999 Release One Common Delivery Reporting GM Stocking Guide Update 1998 BUSINESSLINE Year End DEALERLINE 1998 Release Two Required VIN Changes F18=Bottom PgUp PgDn a. The System Save should be completed within 5 days after loading the release. 4590 is the new Product Release. .4 Creation Date . . In this example. . June 2002 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-13 . call the EDS Customer Support Center. ensure the new Product Release code displays under the Product Release column. : 10/26/94 Load Date . type VER and press Enter. . After applying this release.

• • RELxxxxRGA displays for RISC systems – operating system is V3R7 or higher RELxxxxGA displays for NON-RISC systems – operating system is V3R2 ⇒ The release is restored in a Selected status and will apply as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup unless you Unselect it (see step 4. Each software release will first require your operating system version and DEALERLINE software Product Release to be at a specific version or release. page 22. page 4-19. See step 7. ⇒ DEALERLINE software releases usually take 30 minutes to 2 hours to apply (not including the DEALERLINE nightly backup). for example. step 2. RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA (depending on your Operating System Release) displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen when you set up your DEALERLINE nightly backup. (See the following section. Before You Begin. contains the instructions to restore the release from the tape cartridge to your system. If this step is not completed. in the Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup section). page 4-18. some releases require Pre-Update and/or Post-Update Instructions be completed before or after loading the software update. 1 to 2 days before you plan to apply this release. The Software Update Instructions are divided into two sections: • Before You Begin ⇒ Complete the steps in this section. you can display and/or print a brief description of the software Enhancements in this release. anytime during business hours. 4590. ⇒ The System Save Instructions should be completed within 5 days after a DEALERLINE software update is successfully applied to your system (see the Backups chapter). xxxx represents the DEALERLINE Product Release number.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE The following instructions are to load and apply the software update from a tape cartridge. 4-14 System Administrator Tasks June 2002 . ⇒ Step 4. After this step is complete. • Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup ⇒ Complete the steps in this section when you are ready to apply the release to your system as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup. In these instructions. Each software update is identified by a Base Release and a Product Release number. While the release displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen. in this section for instructions.) Additionally. These instructions are generic. the release will not load.

e. . do not load this software. press F3 to return to a command line. see the Software Update Instructions for the specific release). 1 . 1. . . Verify the DEALERLINE / XL Base Release is 4. . . then 1). d. : 10/29/94 Product Code* Product Release *ALL Code. . *ALL Creation Date Load Date PTF Information: *NO *YES.4 DEALERLINE/XL Base Release: 4. SA0711DF QPADEV0092 Automotive Retail Group Software Version Display 2/04/00 15:13:34 Operating System Release : VxRxM0 V3R2M0 4. If any other value displays. Clean the tape drive to prevent tape drive errors from occurring during this procedure. The Software Version screen displays. *NO More: + Description Product Code 4590 4582 4580 4572 4570 4565 4562 4560 4550 DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 1999 BUSINESSLINE Year End PARTSLINE Enhancements DEALERLINE 1999 Relase Two Saturn LS Model Update DEALERLINE 1999 Release One Common Delivery Reporting GM Stocking Guide Update 1998 BUSINESSLINE Year End DEALERLINE 1998 Release Two F3=Exit F4=*Prompt F17=Top F18=Bottom PgUp PgDn c. : 10/26/94 Load Date . . locate the last dependant release (this release will vary for each software release. June 2002 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-15 . Sign onto the system using MSECOFR as your User ID. b.4 Creation Date . . Complete the following to verify the Operating System Release and the DEALERLINE /XL Base and Product Release levels: a. call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4. Call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4. . At a command line. . 2. type VER and press Enter. Press F3 to exit.2 days before beginning the steps in Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup. Under the Description column.4.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE Before You Begin Steps 1 through 7 may be completed anytime during business hours. then 1). If necessary.

Work with User Profiles Type options. 2. Press the Tab key (or the Field Exit key) twice to position the cursor to the left of the user ID (user profile). 3. press Enter. Display. 3.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE 3. In the following command (step b) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup in place of xxxxx b. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner Opt --__ User Profile ------SMITH Text ----------------------------------------------SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Bottom Parameters for options 1. To verify the backup user ID has these authorities: a. type WRKUSRPRF xxxxx and press Enter. Sign onto the system using MSECOFR as your user ID. type 5. *IOSYSCFG and *SECADM authority. Work with User Profiles Type options. The Work with User Profiles screen displays. 4-16 System Administrator Tasks June 2002 . At the Opt field. the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup must have *ALLOBJ. For the EOD application process to work correctly. press Enter. and press Enter. 4 and 5 or command ===> F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F16=Repeat position to F21=Select assistance level F24=More keys F17=Position to c. 2. At a command line. 4 and 5 or command ===> F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F21=Select assistance level F16=Repeat position to F24=More keys F17=Position to d. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner User Profile ------SMITH Opt --- 5 Text ------------------------------------------------SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Bottom Parameters for options 1.

......... At a command line..... : Supplemental groups ....... Skip the rest of this step and continue to step 4... : Sign-on attempts not valid . press F3 to exit.. In the first available blank line at the Special Authority field. Press F10 for additional parameters... l. press F3 to exit and continue to step f: In the following command (step f) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup in place of xxxxx f....... then press Enter.. The Specify More Values for Parameter SPCAUT screen displays.... o..... : Group authority .......... *IOSYSCFG and/or *SECADM..... : Password expiration interval : Date password expires ... (substitute user ID for xxxxx)..... e.. : Assistance level ... n.. *IOSYSCFG and *SECADM are listed in the • If the values are listed..... i.. h.... If any other message displays.. m... : Owner .... Press Enter twice...... type the additional authority(s): *ALLOBJ.... After a user profile is changed.. : 11/16/98 0 *ENABLED 08/31/98 180 02/27/99 *NO *USER 08:34:24 Special authority : *ALLOBJ .. type + and press the Space Bar once... then sign back on the system for the profile change to take effect. k.. June 2002 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-17 ..... j. Display User Profile ....SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE The Display User Profile – Basic screen displays....... : User class .... *IOSYSCFG *SECADM Group profile .... One of the following messages will display at the bottom of the screen........ These are informational messages... call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4...... : Group authority type .. : Set password to expired ...... Verify the values *ALLOBJ Special Authority field..... type CHGUSRPRF xxxxx and press F4......... the user must sign off.. : . : SMITH Previous sign-on ..Basic User profile .. Continue to step 4. At the Special Authority field. g... User Profile xxxxx Changed.... F3=Exit F12=Cancel QPGMR *USRPRF *NONE *PRIVATE *NONE *SYSVAL More.......... • If any of the values are not listed. locate the last line of authority. Press the Shift and Arrow Up/Down keys to display the Special Authority field.. Or User class and special authorities do not match system supplied values... then 1). : Date password last changed ... : Press Enter to continue.....

6.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE 4. a. Insert the Base Release x. Initialize one or two tape cartridges (using volume ID of DBK1) to be used for the DEALERLINE nightly backup. 4-18 System Administrator Tasks June 2002 . Sign onto the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup. Your system is ready for the release to be applied as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup. the backup must be canceled and restarted from the beginning. This step copies the release onto your system from the tape cartridge. At a command line type LODRUN TC and press Enter. Informational messages display. 5. If you are prompted for a second tape during this procedure. Continue to step 5.) b. c. When the following message displays: 1 Release Restored and 1 Release Scheduled to be applied during your Nightly Backup The release is successfully restored to your system and will now display as either RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA (depending on your Operating System Release – Non-RISC or RISC) on the Work With EOD Objects screen.x. Product Release xx tape cartridge into the tape drive. Sign off the system. e. ! EDS recommends initializing two tapes as a precaution. d. (This user ID has authority to DEALERLINE libraries. This step should take 30 minutes or less to complete and does not require a dedicated system. and one is not available. Remove the tape from the tape drive.

6. The System Administration Main Menu (DMM005) displays. at a command line. Restore Labels Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments Forms Formatting Print Work-Station Printer Assignments 11. DMM000 Select one of the following: 1.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE Step 7 may be completed anytime. Backups. b. 8. DEALERLINE Main Menu 24. a. 9. Name and Address Menu 13. Sign Off d. 9. Or this release: Begin at the Backup Menu (SAM100). continue to step c. 7. 7. Reset Remote Dial Connection Selection or command ===> 1 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu 23. DMM005 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Main Menu Select one of the following: 1. 2. Backups 2. 23. 8. Security 5. Type 1. 3. 4. 5. and press Enter. and press Enter June 2002 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-19 . 7. then continue to step e. 6. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup. as long as the release displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen. 90. type GO and press Enter. Begin at the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000). BUSINESSLINE PARTSLINE SRS PARTS SERVICELINE REPORTLINE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SALESLINE GM DEALER COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM RAPID 2000 DEALERLINE XL Version Sign Off DEALERLINE XL Main Menu SAM100 Selection or command ===> 6 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F13=Information Assistant F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=AS/400 main menu c. Communications 3. Type 6. System Administration. If you want to display and/or print a brief description of the Enhancements included in ! This step is optional.

2. f. 4-20 System Administrator Tasks June 2002 . System Administration Main Menu 24. Press F3 until the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu displays. Sign Off Selection or command ===> 7 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu e.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE The Backup Menu (SAM100) displays. use Pg Up/Down keys to display the next/previous screen. Type 7. • g. Work With EOD Objects. While the list displays. The list prints at the system printer. RELxxxxGA displays under the Name column. Work with EOD Objects 23. Sign off the system. RELxxxxRGA displays under the Name column. 3. type 5 and press Enter. To print the list. The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays SA155201 QPADEV0092 More: + Type Option Then Press Enter 5=Display 6=Print Opt Name Work With EOD Objects 8/04/97 11:57:35 X=Select U=Unselect Status Type *RELEASE Description 5 RELxxxxRGA Release x. If your Operating System Release is V3R2M0. 4. SAM100 Select one of the following: 1. Complete one of the following at the Opt column next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA: • To display the list.xx F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel PgUp PgDn • • If your Operating System Release is V3R7M0 or higher.x. h. Press F3 to return to the Work With EOD Objects screen. and press Enter. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) Power Down System (No Backup) Backup Menu 6. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. type 6 and press Enter.

(EST). and press Enter. type 1. If you have questions. System Administration Main Menu 24. to 9 p. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down). Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) Power Down System (No Backup) Backup Menu 6.m. type 6. it must be scheduled for a time when you have a dedicated system (no jobs are running). and press Enter.) All daily batches MUST be pulled to BUSINESSLINE XL for ALL companies. select the appropriate application. type GO SAM100 and press Enter. Backups. SAM100 Select one of the following: 1. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEAQLERLINE nightly backup.m. June 2002 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-21 . Work with EOD Objects 23. The Service Department has completed a Daily Service Order Cutoff for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. From the System Administration Main Menu (DMM005). 3. weekdays 7 a. You DO NOT have to apply daily batches. System Administration. A manual Daily Parts Cutoff has completed for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup Verify the following: When the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to run. only pull them to BUSINESSLINE XL. Or • At a command line. Begin at the Backup Menu (SAM100): • From the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000). Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. Critical Manufacturer Communications are NOT scheduled for the same time or during the DEALERLINE nightly backup. 2. Sign Off Selection or command ===> 1 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu 3. The system printer is powered on and has an adequate paper supply. and press Enter. to 9 p.m. 4. 1. Type 1. (Do NOT change the Scheduled Start time for the Daily Parts Cutoff – this could effect the parts ordering process. 2. After listening to the prompts. and Saturday 9 a. please call the EDS Customer Support Center at 1-800-633-6323.m.

xx Work With EOD Objects 8/04/97 11:57:35 More: X=Select U=Unselect Status *SELECTED Type *RELEASE + F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel PgUp PgDn • • If your Operating System Release is V3R7M0 or higher. ! To Unselect the release (the release will not apply as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup). S155201 QPADEV0092 Type Option Then Press Enter 5=Display 6=Print Opt X Name RELxxxxRGA Description RELEASE x. 4-22 System Administrator Tasks June 2002 . 4. If you typed U to Unselect the release. when you set up your nightly backup.) Press Enter (with an X at the Opt field) . To apply the release as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup: (If *SELECTED DOES NOT display as the Status. it will continue to display until you Select (X) for the release to apply. this may take a few minutes. next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA and press Enter.the release will apply as part of the DEALERLINE backup. RELxxxxRGA displays under the Name column.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays. type X at the Opt column. ! The system performs a series of edits to ensure the release can be applied to your system. the Work With EOD screen and the release will display again. Press Enter again to exit this screen. each day. 5. next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA. type U under the Opt column.x. If your Operating System Release is V3R2M0. RELxxxxGA displays under the Name column.

Enter your selection PLEASE.End of Job EDS recommends that you type 2 to perform File Maintenance first. If you normally insert additional media (EG.Copies and saves ALL data files.Continue 2 CMD-7 .To save FILES first.Minutes SS . Type 2 and press Enter. File maintenance . Both the DEALERLINE nightly backup and the release apply process require a dedicated system. Ensure the time you specify is a time when the system will be dedicated. Guidelines are listed below. Enter 2 . would be typed 02 00 00. The release will be applied before saving the data files. Enter 2 and press enter.Seconds ENTER . you will want to perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. 6. 10:00 p. Type the time you would like the nightly backup and release to begin. Enter 1 or simply press enter. For example.Condenses and compresses data files. C.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) screen displays.m.End of Job 7.m. ENTER .To perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel).. or Enter ZEROS if you want the backup to start NOW. 8/04/97 12:30:40 File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) SA1505DF SA150502 Enter the time you would like to begin the backup. You may choose the order in which these two functions are performed. you will want to save the FILES first. A. If a time is entered it MUST be in military time (00:00:00 23:59:59).. If your system requires only one tape cartridge or tape reel to complete the backup procedure. If you normally wait in the evening to insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel) in the morning. especially if your system uses two tapes for a backup. 8/04/97 12:22:09 File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) A1505DF SA150501 The back up procedure performs two important functions: 1. Press Enter to continue. Enter 1 . Enter your selection PLEASE 00 00 00 HH . The software release (not including the backup) will take approximately 2 to 4 hours to apply. You will want to save the FILES first.Hours MM . The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) screen displays. June 2002 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-23 . File saving . Be sure to allow plenty of time for the software release and your DEALERLINE nightly backup to complete. would be typed 22 00 00 and 2:00 a.Continue CMD-7 . B. 2. NOTE: The time should be at least 5 MINUTES from now.

messages about the status of the software update display as part of your sign on messages. If any other information prints. Sign onto the system console using MSECOFR as your User ID. then 1) immediately. After the backup completes. the following information prints: UPGRADE started for release xxxx. 11. 4-24 System Administrator Tasks June 2002 . Follow the instructions on the rest of the backup screens as you normally would when performing a backup. call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4. ! The next time you sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE 8. Release xxxx applied successfully. Please read these messages completely to make sure the software update completed successfully. After completing step 8. 9. the remaining steps can be completed the next morning.

. .4 Creation Date . then 1). . After applying this release. 13. . Product Release xx tape cartridge can be recycled/reused. . 14. . June 2002 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-25 . After a successful system save is completed. the Base Release x. complete a normal DEALERLINE nightly backup before completing a system save. type VER and press Enter. . . *NO More: + Description Product Code 4590 4582 4580 4572 4570 4565 4562 4560 4550 4545 F3=Exit DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 F4=*Prompt XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 F17=Top 1999 BUSINESSLINE Year End PARTSLINE Enhancements DEALERLINE 1999 Relase Two Saturn LS Model Update DEALERLINE 1999 Release One Common Delivery Reporting GM Stocking Guide Update 1998 BUSINESSLINE Year End DEALERLINE 1998 Release Two Required VIN Changes F18=Bottom PgUp PgDn a. After the DEALERLINE nightly backup completes normally. The System Save can be set to process using Delayed Time (see the System Save Instructions). *ALL Creation Date Load Date PTF Information: *NO *YES. The System Save should be completed within 5 days after loading the release. If any other value displays. : 10/29/94 Product Code* Product Release *ALL Code.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM TAPE CARTRIDGE 12. Make sure the screen print of the Software Version Display screen is stored with the system save tape(s). : 10/26/94 Load Date . call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4.x. complete a System Save. The following screen displays: SA0711DF QPADEV0092 Automotive Retail Group Software Version Display 2/04/00 15:13:34 Operating System Release : VxRxM0 DEALERLINE/XL Base Release: 4. b. Verify the current Product Release displays under the Product Release column. At a command line. . . Press F3 to return to a command line.

step 2. xxxx represents the DEALERLINE Product Release number. 4-26 System Administrator Tasks June 2002 . anytime during business hours. The Software Update Instructions are divided into two sections: • Before You Begin ⇒ Complete the steps in this section. Each software update is identified by a Base Release and a Product Release number.) Additionally. some releases require Pre-Update and/or Post-Update Instructions be completed before or after loading the software update. If this step is not completed. See step 7 (in the Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup section). While the release displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen. 1 to 2 days before you plan to apply this release. In these instructions.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD The following instructions are to load and apply the software update from a CD (RISC V3R7M0 and Higher and CISC – V3R2M0). • Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup ⇒ Complete the steps in this section when you are ready to apply the release to your system as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup. ⇒ The release is restored in a Selected status and will apply as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup unless you Unselect it (see step 4 in the Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup section). Each software release will first require your operating system version and DEALERLINE software Product Release to be at a specific version or release. for example. you can display and/or print a brief description of the software Enhancements in this release. RELxxxxRGA displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen when you set up your DEALERLINE nightly backup. 4590. Before You Begin. the release will not load. After this step is complete. ⇒ The System Save Instructions should be completed within 5 days after a DEALERLINE software update is successfully applied to your system (see the Backups chapter). ⇒ DEALERLINE software releases usually take 30 minutes to 2 hours to apply (not including the DEALERLINE nightly backup). (See the following section. These instructions are generic. ⇒ Step 4 (in the Before You Begin section) contains the instructions to restore the release from the CD to your system.

At a command line. see the Software Update Instruction. Verify the DEALERLINE / XL Base Release is 4. e. Complete the following to verify the Operating System Release and the DEALERLINE /XL Base and Product Release levels: a. press F3 to return to a command line. then 1). do not load this software. Call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4. If any other value displays. type VER and press Enter. If necessary. Press F3 to exit.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD Before You Begin 1. Complete steps 1 through 7 anytime during business hours 1 to 2 days before beginning the steps in the next section Apply and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup.4. Sign onto the system using MSECOFR as your User ID. c. sent with the CD. b. for the specific release). call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4. then 1). June 2002 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-27 . 2. locate the last dependant release (this release will vary for each software release. d. The Software Version screen displays. Under the Description column.

At the Opt field. Work with User Profiles Type options. The Work with User Profiles screen displays. 3. Work with User Profiles Type options.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD 3. Press the Tab key (or the Field Exit key) twice to position the cursor to the left of the user ID (user profile). 2. Sign onto the system using MSECOFR as your user ID. the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup must have *ALLOBJ. type 5. press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner User Profile ------SMITH Opt --- 5 Text ------------------------------------------------SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Bottom Parameters for options 1. *IOSYSCFG and *SECADM authority. In the following command (step b) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup in place of xxxxx b. 2. 3. Display. and press Enter. type WRKUSRPRF xxxxx and press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 12=Work with objects by owner Opt --__ User Profile ------SMITH Text ----------------------------------------------SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Bottom Parameters for options 1. 4 and 5 or command ===> F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F16=Repeat position to F21=Select assistance level F24=More keys F17=Position to c. 4 and 5 or command ===> F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F21=Select assistance level F16=Repeat position to F24=More keys F17=Position to d. To verify the backup user ID has these authorities: a. At a command line. For the EOD application process to work correctly. press Enter. 4-28 System Administrator Tasks June 2002 .

... In the first available blank line at the Special Authority field.. Press F10 for additional parameters... then 1).. : Owner ... • If any of the values are not listed... : User class ... j......... : 11/16/98 0 *ENABLED 08/31/98 180 02/27/99 *NO *USER 08:34:24 Special authority : *ALLOBJ ........ : Group authority . h. Display User Profile .. press F3 to exit and continue to step f: In the following command (step f) substitute the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup in place of xxxxx f............... : SMITH Previous sign-on ... Continue to step 4. Press the Shift and Arrow Up/Down keys to display the Special Authority field... press F3 to exit. After a user profile is changed...... type + and press the Space Bar once.... One of the following messages will display at the bottom of the screen...... : Supplemental groups ...... (substitute user ID for xxxxx).. call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4.......... : Assistance level ......... the user must sign off. The Specify More Values for Parameter SPCAUT screen displays... *IOSYSCFG and/or *SECADM. At the Special Authority field...... If any other message displays. k... i.. : Group authority type . m..... F3=Exit F12=Cancel QPGMR *USRPRF *NONE *PRIVATE *NONE *SYSVAL More.... : .... User Profile xxxxx Changed... : Date password last changed . e.. o. *IOSYSCFG *SECADM Group profile . type the additional authority(s): *ALLOBJ.... g. Verify the values *ALLOBJ Special Authority field........... June 2002 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-29 ...... then sign back on the system for the profile change to take effect. type CHGUSRPRF xxxxx and press F4. locate the last line of authority. n... These are informational messages.... Or User class and special authorities do not match system supplied values........Basic User profile .. At a command line.... Press Enter twice... Skip the rest of this step and continue to step 4.. l.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD The Display User Profile – Basic screen displays...... : Press Enter to continue. : Set password to expired . : Sign-on attempts not valid ........ *IOSYSCFG and *SECADM are listed in the • If the values are listed. then press Enter.... : Password expiration interval : Date password expires ........

5.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD 4. Sign onto the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup. Product Release xx CD into the CD-ROM drive. This step should take 5 minutes or less to complete and does not require a dedicated system. Initialize one or two tape cartridges (using volume ID of DBK1) to be used for the DEALERLINE nightly backup. a. ! EDS recommends initializing two tapes as a precaution. Informational messages display.x. 4-30 System Administrator Tasks June 2002 . 6. Continue to step 5. d. Insert the Base Release x. If you are prompted for a second tape during this procedure. e. and one is not available. Sign off the system. Your system is ready for the release to be applied as part of your next DEALERLINE nightly backup. c. This step copies the release onto your system from the tape cartridge. the backup must be canceled and restarted from the beginning.) b. At a command line type LODRUN OPT01 and press Enter. (This user ID has authority to DEALERLINE libraries. When the following message displays: 1 Release Restored and 1 Release Scheduled to be applied during your Nightly Backup The release is successfully restored to your system and will now display as RELxxxxRGA on the Work With EOD Objects screen. Remove the CD from the drive.

at a command line. Reset Remote Dial Connection Selection or command ===> 1 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu 23. a. 3. Security 5. and press Enter. DMM000 Select one of the following: 1. as long as the release displays on the Work With EOD Objects screen. The System Administration Main Menu (DMM005) displays. 23. Type 1. 7. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEALERLINE nightly backup. type GO and press Enter. If you want to display and/or print a brief description of the Enhancements included in ! This step is optional. 5. Type 6. 7. Name and Address Menu 13. 8. continue to step c. DEALERLINE Main Menu 24. 4. Or this release: Begin at the Backup Menu (SAM100). Begin at the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000). 2. 7. b. BUSINESSLINE PARTSLINE SRS PARTS SERVICELINE REPORTLINE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION SALESLINE GM DEALER COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM RAPID 2000 DEALERLINE XL Version Sign Off DEALERLINE XL Main Menu SAM100 Selection or command ===> 6 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F13=Information Assistant F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F16=AS/400 main menu c. Backups. 9. System Administration. Communications 3. and press Enter June 2002 Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update 4-31 . Restore Labels Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments Forms Formatting Print Work-Station Printer Assignments 11. then continue to step e. 8. DMM005 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Main Menu Select one of the following: 1. 6. 90. Backups 2. Sign Off d.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD Step 7 may be completed anytime. 6. 9.

and press Enter. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. While the list displays. 4-32 System Administrator Tasks June 2002 . • g. Complete the following at the Opt column next to RELxxxxRGA: • To display the list. 2. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) Power Down System (No Backup) Backup Menu 6. 4. Sign off the system. Press F3 to return to the Work With EOD Objects screen. type 5 and press Enter. System Administration Main Menu 24. Work with EOD Objects 23. Work With EOD Objects. Type 7. The list prints at the system printer. Sign Off Selection or command ===> 7 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu e. use Pg Up/Down keys to display the next/previous screen. h. To print the list. Press F3 until the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu displays. 3. SAM100 Select one of the following: 1.SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD The Backup Menu (SAM100) displays.x. The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays SA155201 QPADEV0092 More: + Type Option Then Press Enter 5=Display 6=Print Opt Name Work With EOD Objects 8/04/97 11:57:35 X=Select U=Unselect Status Type *RELEASE Description 5 RELxxxxRGA Release x. type 6 and press Enter.xx F1=Help F3=Exit F12=Cancel PgUp PgDn f.

SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD

Apply the Release and Set DEALERLINE Nightly Backup
Verify the following: When the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to run, it must be scheduled for a time when you have a dedicated system (no jobs are running). The system printer is powered on and has an adequate paper supply. Critical Manufacturer Communications are NOT scheduled for the same time or during the DEALERLINE nightly backup. The Service Department has completed a Daily Service Order Cutoff for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. A manual Daily Parts Cutoff has completed for each company before the DEALERLINE nightly backup is scheduled to start. (Do NOT change the Scheduled Start time for the Daily Parts Cutoff – this could effect the parts ordering process.) All daily batches MUST be pulled to BUSINESSLINE XL for ALL companies. You DO NOT have to apply daily batches, only pull them to BUSINESSLINE XL.
If you have questions, please call the EDS Customer Support Center at 1-800-633-6323, weekdays 7 a.m. to 9 p.m. and Saturday 9 a.m. to 9 p.m. (EST). After listening to the prompts, select the appropriate application.

1. Sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the DEAQLERLINE nightly backup. 2. Begin at the Backup Menu (SAM100): • From the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000), type 6, System Administration, and press Enter. From the System Administration Main Menu (DMM005), type 1, Backups, and press Enter.
Or

At a command line, type GO SAM100 and press Enter.
SAM100 Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down) Backup DEALERLINE Database (Power Down System) Backup all DEALERLINE Production Libraries (No Database) Power Down System (No Backup) Backup Menu

6. Check DEALERLINE Database Backup 7. Work with EOD Objects 23. System Administration Main Menu 24. Sign Off Selection or command ===> 1 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 main menu

3. Type 1, Backup DEALERLINE Database (No Power Down), and press Enter.

June 2002

Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update

4-33

SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD

The Work With EOD Objects (SA155201) screen displays.
S155201 QPADEV0092 Type Option Then Press Enter 5=Display 6=Print Opt X Name RELxxxxRGA Description RELEASE x.x.xx Work With EOD Objects 8/04/97 11:57:35 More: X=Select U=Unselect Status *SELECTED Type *RELEASE +

F1=Help

F3=Exit

F12=Cancel

PgUp

PgDn

4. To apply the release as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup, press Enter (with an X at the Opt field) - the release will apply as part of the DEALERLINE backup. Note: If *SELECTED DOES NOT display as the Status, type X at the Opt column, next to RELxxxxRGA, then press Enter.

!

To Unselect the release (the release will not apply as part of your DEALERLINE nightly backup), type U under the Opt column, next to RELxxxxRGA or RELxxxxGA and press Enter.
If you typed U to Unselect the release, the Work With EOD screen and the release will display again, each day, when you set up your nightly backup; it will continue to display until you Select (X) for the release to apply.

5. Press Enter again to exit this screen.

!

The system performs a series of edits to ensure the release can be applied to your system; this may take a few minutes.

4-34

System Administrator Tasks

June 2002

SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD

The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) screen displays.
8/04/97 12:22:09 File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) A1505DF SA150501 The back up procedure performs two important functions: 1. File saving - Copies and saves ALL data files. 2. File maintenance - Condenses and compresses data files. You may choose the order in which these two functions are performed. Enter 1 - To save FILES first. Enter 2 - To perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Guidelines are listed below. A. If your system requires only one tape cartridge or tape reel to complete the backup procedure, you will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. B. If you normally insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel) in the morning, you will want to perform FILE MAINTENANCE first. Enter 2 and press enter. C. If you normally wait in the evening to insert additional media (EG. a 2nd tape cartridge or tape reel), You will want to save the FILES first. Enter 1 or simply press enter. Enter your selection PLEASE... ENTER - Continue

2
CMD-7 - End of Job

EDS recommends that you type 2 to perform File Maintenance first, especially if your system uses two tapes for a backup. The release will be applied before saving the data files. 6. Type 2 and press Enter. The File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) screen displays.
8/04/97 12:30:40 File Backup and Shutdown (No Power Off) SA1505DF SA150502

Enter the time you would like to begin the backup. NOTE: The time should be at least 5 MINUTES from now, or Enter ZEROS if you want the backup to start NOW. If a time is entered it MUST be in military time (00:00:00 23:59:59). Enter your selection PLEASE 00 00 00 HH - Hours MM - Minutes SS - Seconds

ENTER - Continue

CMD-7 - End of Job

7. Type the time you would like the nightly backup and release to begin. For example, 10:00 p.m. would be typed 22 00 00 and 2:00 a.m. would be typed 02 00 00. Ensure the time you specify is a time when the system will be dedicated. Both the DEALERLINE nightly backup and the release apply process require a dedicated system. The software release (not including the backup) will take approximately 2 to 4 hours to apply. Be sure to allow plenty of time for the software release and your DEALERLINE nightly backup to complete. Press Enter to continue.

June 2002

Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update

4-35

SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD

8. Follow the instructions on the rest of the backup screens as you normally would when performing a backup. After completing step 8, the remaining steps can be completed the next morning. 9. After the backup completes, the following information prints:
UPGRADE started for release xxxx. Release xxxx applied successfully.

If any other information prints, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1) immediately.

!

The next time you sign on the system with the user ID of the person who performs the nightly backup, messages about the status of the software update display as part of your sign on messages. Please read these messages completely to make sure the software update completed successfully.

11. Sign onto the system console using MSECOFR as your User ID.

4-36

System Administrator Tasks

June 2002

SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD

12. At a command line, type VER and press Enter. The following screen displays:
SA0711DF QPADEV0092 Automotive Retail Group Software Version Display 2/04/00 15:13:34 Operating System Release : VxRxM0

DEALERLINE/XL Base Release: 4.4 Creation Date . . . . . : 10/26/94 Load Date . . . . . . . : 10/29/94 Product Code* Product Release *ALL Code, *ALL Creation Date Load Date

PTF Information: *NO *YES, *NO More: + Description

Product Code

4590
4582 4580 4572 4570 4565 4562 4560 4550 4545 F3=Exit

DL
DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL

XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99
XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 F4=*Prompt XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 F17=Top

1999 BUSINESSLINE Year End
PARTSLINE Enhancements DEALERLINE 1999 Relase Two Saturn LS Model Update DEALERLINE 1999 Release One Common Delivery Reporting GM Stocking Guide Update 1998 BUSINESSLINE Year End DEALERLINE 1998 Release Two Required VIN Changes F18=Bottom PgUp PgDn

a. Verify the current Product Release displays under the Product Release column. If any other value displays, call the EDS Customer Support Center (prompt 4, then 1). b. Press F3 to return to a command line.
13. After applying this release, complete a normal DEALERLINE nightly backup before

completing a system save. 14. After the DEALERLINE nightly backup completes normally, complete a System Save.

The System Save can be set to process using Delayed Time (see the System Save Instructions). The System Save should be completed within 5 days after loading the release. Make sure the screen print of the Software Version Display screen is stored with the system save tape(s). After a successful system save is completed, the Base Release x.x, Product Release xx tape cartridge can be recycled/reused.

June 2002

Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update

4-37

SOFTWARE UPDATE FROM CD

4-38

System Administrator Tasks

June 2002

LOAD AND APPLY DEALERLINE SOFTWARE UPDATES - EXERCISE

LOAD AND APPLY DEALERLINE SOFTWARE UPDATES EXERCISE
1. What command is used to load an EOD tape onto the system? ___________________________ 2. Is a dedicated system required to load an EOD tape?

June 2002

Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Update

4-39

4-40 System Administrator Tasks June 2002 . LODRUN TC 2.Exercise 1. a dedicated system is not required to load an EOD tape.EXERCISE Solutions to Load and Apply DEALERLINE Software Updates .LOAD AND APPLY DEALERLINE SOFTWARE UPDATES . No.

... 8 Change Printer........................................................................................... 6 Workstation or Printer .......................................... 9 Hold a Spool File (Report)................................................................................................. 7 WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF)............................................................................................................ 14 DISPLAY SYSTEM VALUES ............................................................................ 1 DISPLAY DEALERLINE AND OPERATING SYSTEM RELEASE 2 PRINT A LIST OF DEVICES ATTACHED TO THE AS/400 ............................... 6 Tape Drive .......... 15 MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – EXCERCISE ........................... 12 Release (Print) a Spool File (Report) ... 16 April 2000 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-i ............. 3 VARY DEVICE ON/OFF................................................... 10 Delete a Spool File (Report)............5 Miscellaneous System Functions Table of Contents OVERVIEW ............................................................................ 11 Display a Spool File (Report) .....................

Table of Contents This page intentionally left blank. 5-ii System Administration April 2000 .

OVERVIEW Miscellaneous System Functions OVERVIEW This chapter provides common miscellaneous system functions and procedures: • • • • • • Display DEALERLINE software release Display the Operating System release Print a device listing Vary a device on or off Work with spool files Display system values April 2000 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-1 .

When contacting the Customer Support Center. . *ALL Creation Date Load Date PTF Information: *NO *YES. . *NO More: + Description Product Code xxxx 4580 4575 4570 4565 4562 4560 4550 4545 DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL xx/xx/99 xx/xx/99 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xx/xx/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 xx/xx/98 XX/XX/98 xx/xx/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 xx/xx/98 XX/XX/98 DEALERLINE 1999 RELASE TWO DEALERLINE PARTS REWRITE DEALERLINE 1999 RELEASE ONE COMMON DELIVERY REPORTING GM STOCKING GUIDE UPDATE 1998 BUSINESSLINE YEAR END DEALERLINE 1998 RELEASE TWO Required VIN Changes If More. Or At a command line.4 Creation Date .+ displays in the lower right of the screen. type GO DMM000 and press Enter to display the DEALERINE XL Main Menu. . and the current Operating System Release: 1. . . The version screen displays: DEALERLINE Base Release Operating System Release SA0711DF QPADEV0092 Automotive Retail Group Software Version Display 8/04/97 15:13:34 Operating System Release : VxRxM0 DEALERLINE Product Release DEALERLINE/XL Base Release: 4. by relaying this information. 5-2 System Administration April 2000 . Complete one of the following from a command line: Type VER and press Enter. DEALERLINE Version. a Customer Support Representative may be able to more quickly answer a question or diagnose a problem. Press F3 to return to a command line. Type 23. 2. .. it is important you know the DEALERLINE software and Operating System Release.DISPLAY DEALERLINE AND OPERATING SYSTEM RELEASE DISPLAY DEALERLINE AND OPERATING SYSTEM RELEASE To display the current DEALERLINE Base Release/Product Release. press the Shift + Arrow Up keys at the same time. . : 10/29/94 Product Code* Product Release *ALL Code. . : 10/26/94 Load Date . to display additional information. and press Enter. . .

type PRTDEVADR and press F4. change CTL01 to CTL02.PRINT A LIST OF DEVICES ATTACHED TO THE AS/400 PRINT A LIST OF DEVICES ATTACHED TO THE AS/400 To create a report of all devices (with ports. At a command line. addresses and types) attached to a workstation controller on the AS/400: 1. . Type the controller description (ID) and press Enter.) 3. April 2000 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-3 . press Enter. The Print Device Addresses (PRTDEVADR) screen displays. If needed. ! A device address listing for a remote controller must be manually created. Controller description . (You could also type the following at a command line: PRTDEVADR CTL01 and press Enter. to print information for a second controller. . The matrix prints at the system printer. Print Device Addresses (PRTDEVADR) Type choices. . CTL01 Name F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys F5=Refresh F12=Cancel Bottom F13=How to use this display 2. .

PRINT A LIST OF DEVICES ATTACHED TO THE AS/400 Following is an example of a device address listing: 5769SS1 V4R2M0 Device Addresses for S1020334 4/04/00 13:48:52 Page Local Work Station Controller CTL01 Type 915A Switch Setting --> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ : : : : : : : : : W1 : #GUIDE7 : W3 : : : : : Port 0 : *DSP : *DSP : *DSP : : : : : : 3477 FA : 5150 1 : 3180 2 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Port 1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : : : : PL : : Q0 : NX : Port 2 : : : : *DSP : : *DSP : *DSP : : : : : 5150 1 : : 5150 1 : 3477 FA : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : W5 : : PA4 : SDSPC : : : PT : Port 3 : *DSP : : *PRT : *DSP : : : *PRT : : 5150 1 : : 4214 2 : 5150 1 : : : 4214 2 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : R3 : PCK : : : II3 : PCY : : Port 4 : *DSP : *DSP : : : *DSP : *DSP : : : 5150 1 : 5150 1 : : : 3477 FA : 5150 1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : : : PL : : Q0 : NX : Port 5 : : : : *DSP : : *DSP : *DSP : : : : : 5150 1 : : 5150 1 : 3477 FA : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : W6 : : PA4 : SDSPC : : : PT : Port 6 : *DSP : : *PRT : *DSP : : : *PRT : : 5150 1 : : 4214 2 : 5150 1 : : : 4214 6 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : R8 : PCK : : : II3 : PCY : : Port 7 : *DSP : *DSP : : : *DSP : *DSP : : : 5150 1 : 5150 1 : : : 3477 FA : 5150 1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: 940909 1 : : : : 5-4 System Administration April 2000 .

and press Enter. 3.5 to 4 terminals. depending on the bandwidth created by the PC. Work with local device address. the number of devices allowed is reduced. type its number below and press Enter: 1. and types) for all workstation controllers on the AS/400: 1. it will either have ports. 3. however. A PC can equal 1. Type 10. 4 April 2000 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-5 . 2. Work Work Work Work with with with with display devices printer devices tape devices diskette devices S123635 Work with local device addresses Type a menu option below F1=Help F3=Exit F9=Command line F12=Cancel 2. 10. 4. ! Depending on the type of twinaxial IOA [workstation controller]. 8 or 4 A port workstation controller can have a maximum of 28 device sessions. If PCs are connected to a workstation controller. At a command line. type GO DEVICESTS and press Enter.PRINT A LIST OF DEVICES ATTACHED TO THE AS/400 To create a report for all devices (with ports. an 8 port workstation controller can only have a maximum of 40 devices. addresses. The matrix prints at the system printer. A maximum of 7 devices can be on each port. The Device Status Tasks screen displays: DEVICESTS Device Status Tasks System: To select one of the following.

WRKCFGSTS *DEV xx (xx=device ID) and ! A workstation is varied off when the cursor is in the upper left-corner of the screen. 1=Vary on 2=Vary off 5=Work with job 9=Display mode status . may become varied off causing the nightly backup to not start. At the Opt field next to the device ID (Description).. type press Enter. If the Status of a device is FAILED or RCYPND. it must be varied on from another workstation. type 1 to vary on the device. Another command that can be used to locate or display devices is WRKDEVD 5-6 System Administration April 2000 . .. type WRKCFGSTS *DEV W* and press Enter. At a command line.] • If you do not know the device ID: 1. All devices beginning with the letter W displays. press Enter. The tape device (TC). Work with Configuration Status 09/15/99 Position to . [Command WRKDEVD W* can also be used. then vary on the device (type 1 to vary on the device). if the Status is VARIED OFF.. . In order to make the device useable again. Starting characters 8=Work with description -------------Job-------------WC STUDENT 026074 Type options. 2.VARY DEVICE ON/OFF VARY DEVICE ON/OFF A workstation will automatically vary off is a user attempts to sign on with an invalid user ID or password 3 times. . The Work with Configuration Status screen displays all devices on the AS/400. . Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F23=More options F24=More keys 3. Workstation or Printer Complete the following to vary on a workstation or printer: • If you know the device ID: ◊ Or ◊ If you know the device begins with W. A command line.. vary the device off (type 2 to vary off the device). Opt __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ Description WA WB WC W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 Status SIGN ON DISPLAY VARY ON PENDING ACTIVE VARY ON PENDING SIGN ON DISPLAY VARY ON PENDING VARY ON PENDING VARY ON PENDING VARIED OFF S1020334 13:57:47 More. type WRKCFGSTS *DEV and press Enter.

type • • WRKCFGSTS *DEV TC and press Enter. The correct Status of the tape drive should be Varied on. If the Status is Varied off. vary on the tape drive. April 2000 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-7 . If the Status is Failed.VARY DEVICE ON/OFF Tape Drive Complete the following to vary on a tape drive: A command line. vary off the tape drive. then vary on the tape drive.

Hold. While submitting a report. The File name listed on this screen. To ensure you are working with the correct report. 5-8 System Administration April 2000 . 2. The Work with All Spooled Files screen displays. it is not the name/number of the screen where you submitted the report from. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 5 File PI4655RP User DOCMDK Device or Queue DUMP User Data PI4655RG 6=Release Total Pages 10 7=Messages Cur Page ! Type WRKSPLF to display all spool files created by the user who is signed onto the terminal (from where the command is typed).WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) When a report is submitted for processing. Some files could contain hundreds of pages and require system space to retain them. type WRKSPLF and press Enter. 2. Work with All Spooled Files Type options. When a report is help in the spool file. Sts OPN Copy 1 Bottom Parameters for options 1. you can use the WRKSPLF command to display the report at your terminal. Display. To access a report held in the spool file: 1. See the following sections to Change printers. The most recent reports processed display at the bottom of the spool file list. or Release (print) a spool file (report). press Enter. Locate the spool file (report) to display or print. Display) several Files until the correct report displays. Delete. print. 3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys It is recommended to delete spool files not needed on a regular basis. it may be necessary to view (5. At any command line. or redirect the report to print at a different printer. delete. is the name of the program that processes. some screens have a Hold Print field – type Y to hold the report in the spool file. it is either held in the spool file or it is directed to a printer for immediate printing.

. . . . . . *STD 1-255. . . . . Print sequence . . . Copies . . . Library . .WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) Change Printer To direct a report to print at a different printer: 1. From the Work with All Spooled Files screen. . *LIBL. . . . . . *CURLIB Bottom F12=Cancel F10=Additional parameters F24=More keys 3. . . Change. . *NEXT Form type. . . . . . . . . Restart printing .. *SELECT Name. . press Enter. *SAME. . . . . . . . then Enter. . . The report is directed to the printer you specified. . . . . . type the Printer ID of the printer to print the report and press Field Exit. . . . . locate the file/report you want to change the printer for. . . . Spooled file number Printer . . . . . F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F13=How to use this display DUMP QGPL Name. . Spooled file . . . *STRPAGE. . . . *SAME. . *ONLY. . April 2000 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-9 . . . Number . . . . . . . . Additional Parameters Output queue . . . . . . *OUTQ *SAME. It may be necessary to first display the file/report to ensure you are working with the correct file/report. . At the Printer field. *SAME. . . . The Change Spooled File Attributes screen displays: Change Spooled File Attributes (CHGSPLFA) Type choices. . . . *DEV Name. . . . . User . . . 2. . . *SAME Number. . . . *LAST Name. . at the Opt field next to the File name and press Enter. . . At the Work with All Spooled Files screen. . . . . . . . . Job name . type 2. . . . . . Form type . . *SAME.. . * Name 000000-999999 1-9999. > QSYSPRT > PI1560CL > DOCMDK > 534991 > 1 *OUTQ___ *SAME *STD 1___ *STRPAGE Name.

1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 3 File PI4655RP QSYSPRT User DOCMDK DOCMDK Device or Queue P1 DUMP User Data PI4655RG PI1564RG 6=Release Total Pages 10 93 7=Messages Cur Page Sts RDY *HLD Copy 1 1 Bottom Parameters for options 1. Delete. The file Sts (status) changes to *HLD. press Enter. The report will remain on hold in the spool file until you type 6.WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) Hold a Spool File (Report) To hold the spool file (report) in the spool file: 1. 2. 5-10 System Administration April 2000 . 3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys 2. locate the file/report you want to place on hold. Work with All Spooled Files Type options. next to the File name. It may be necessary to first display the file/report to ensure you are working with the correct file/report. type 3. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen. At the Opt field. Hold and press Enter. Release to release the report or 4.

At the Work with All Spooled Files screen. It may be necessary to first display the file/report to ensure you are working with the correct file/report. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 4 File PI4655RP QSYSPRT User DOCMDK DOCMDK Device or Queue P1 DUMP User Data PI4655RG PI1564RG 6=Release Total Pages 10 93 7=Messages Cur Page Sts RDY RDY Copy 1 1 Bottom Parameters for options 1. next to the File name. Work with All Spooled Files Type options. press Enter. Confirm Delete of Spooled Files Press Enter to confirm your choices for 4=Delete. Delete. Press Enter. type 4 next to each file. locate the file/report you want to delete.WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) Delete a Spool File (Report) To delete the spool file (report): 1. Opt 4 File QSYSPRT User DOCMDK Device or Queue DUMP User Data PI1564RG Sts RDY Total Pages 93 Cur Page Copy 1 Bottom F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel 3. The Confirm Delete of Spool File(s) screen displays. 3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys 2. More than one file can be deleted at the same time – if you have more than one file to delete. and press Enter. At the Opt field. 2. type 4. April 2000 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-11 . The spool file(s) is deleted and the Work with All Spooled Files screen displays. Press F12 to return to change your choices.

5-12 System Administration April 2000 . At the Opt field. It may be necessary to first display several files .WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) Display a Spool File (Report) To view the spool file (report): 1. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen. next to the File name. and press Enter. Display. 3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys 2. Work with All Spooled Files Type options. type 5. 2. press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 5 _ File PI4655RP QSYSPRT User DOCMDK DOCMDK Device or Queue P1 DUMP User Data PI4655RG PI1564RG 6=Release Total Pages 10 93 7=Messages Cur Page Sts RDY RDY Copy 1 1 Bottom Parameters for options 1. locate the file/report you want to display.the most recent files/reports display at the bottom of the screen.

. Cancel...+.+.81 G OC Y 2000 1996 1 SP 0 1 0 06/16/1997 0 0 0 0 0 1252240 13095 BREAKER3....3 PRINT DATE: 4/04/00 14:18:04 TEST MOTORS #3 PROGRAM: PI4655RG PAGE: 1 COMPANY NUMBER: 03 GUIDE FILE REPORT WRKSTN: QPADEV0056 USER: DOCMDK REQUIRED PARTS NOT AVAILABLE GROUP OTHER HI LO ON ON LAST SALE MONTHLY SALES HISTORY PART NO NO.WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) The Display Spool File screen displays: Display Spooled File File .83 G P C 2000 1976 1 SP 11 0 03/16/1999 1 0 0 0 0 341953 16261 ROLLER 5. ..93 GBPKOC 2000 1953 1 SP 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1136519 09170 COMPRESS 257....75 GBPKOC 1999 1977 1 SP 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1381487 01745 GROMMET 3.32 G C 1993 1973 1 SP 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 476574 00649 BEARING3.+.. To locate a specific word or group of words.... To advance the screen a specific number of detail lines.30 GBPKOC 1993 1974 1 SP 0 1 0 32 0 0 0 0 0 1394293 04037 KIT ...1.61 GBPKOC 1995 1964 1 SP 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 356668 02335 CLAMP 3.8...... .+...+.+.3..1..42 GBPKOC 2000 1976 1 SP 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 363455 03616 HANGER 1...... To shift the screen right (to view any additional information)..57 BPKOC 2000 1976 1 SP 11 0 03/16/1999 1 0 0 0 0 459021 00027 MOUNT MT 24... For example....2..... press F19...9.+. ________ Columns 1 .6. type +10 and press Enter to advance the screen 10 detail lines (type –10 to go back 10 detail lines). To return to the Work with All Spooled Files screen... DESCRIPTION COST CARLINE G YR YR PKG STK AVAIL ORD BKO DATE BIN MAR FEB JAN DEC NOV 274288 05875 STEM 1..130 Find . To shift the screen left (to view any additional information)..13 GBPKOC 2000 1957 5 SP 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 334671 07242 CLAMP 1. press F20. .7..+....2. ... type the word(s) at the find field and press F16.27 G P C 2000 1980 2 SP 0 0 0 08/22/1997 0 0 0 0 0 601261 10553 RETAINE 2... press F12.. Left.4.. April 2000 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-13 . ..+......... Complete any of the following: • • • • • • To advance the screen forward or back. .+. F3=Exit F12=Cancel F19=Left F20=Right F24=More keys 3. .0.. The screen advances to the word or group of word(s) you typed.. type a value at the Control field (at the top of the screen). .+.82 G OC 2000 1974 1 SP 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 345215 04338 FITTING 6...+.. Right... . ..5..+. : PI4655RP Page/Line 1/3 Control . press PgUp/DgDn keys [Roll Up ↑or Roll Down keys ↓]. ...87 GBPKOC 1994 1974 1 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 More... _______________ *. ..45 GBPKOC 1999 1974 1 SP 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 465840 02251 SHI 1..

5-14 System Administration April 2000 . It may be necessary to first display the file/report to ensure you are working with the correct file/report. locate the file/report you want to release. 3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys 2. then changes to RDY (ready) The report is ready to be printed at the printer specified for this job (or the default printer). At the Work with All Spooled Files screen. press Enter. next to the File name of the held report. 2. and press Enter. At the Opt field. Work with All Spooled Files Type options.WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) Release (Print) a Spool File (Report) To release a held spool file (report): 1. type 6. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 6 _ File PI4655RP QSYSPRT User DOCMDK DOCMDK Device or Queue P1 DUMP User Data PI4655RG PI1564RG 6=Release Total Pages 10 93 7=Messages Cur Page Sts HLD RDY Copy 1 1 Bottom Parameters for options 1. Files/reports that are held display HLD in the Sts (status) column. The Sts display *RLS. Release.

After reviewing the information.. 3. QTIME is typed to display the system time. QACGLVL. Output (DSPSYSVAL) QTIME * QABNORMSW. The following information displays: Display System Value Type choices........... At the System value field..... press Enter... type DSPSYSVAL and press F4.. At the Output field... System value . or leave * to view the information... ! WRKSYSVAL command can also be used to display system value(s). type the system value to view (in this example.(press F4 to get a list of all *... Description QTIME Time of day (DSPSYSVAL) Time ................ April 2000 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-15 ..DISPLAY SYSTEM VALUES DISPLAY SYSTEM VALUES A system value is information that defines data and/or functions. To view any system value: 1... press Enter.. System value ..... press F3 to exit. Bottom F3=Exit F12=Cancel 4.. *PRINT system values Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display 2... At a command line.. type *PRINT to print the information.. 13:20:00 Press Enter to continue. Press Enter. The Display System Value (DSPSYSVAL) screen displays: Display System Value Type choices....

4. What steps did you use to determine the DEALERLINE release on your AS/400? _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ 2. D. C. B. C. E. B. LSTDEVATCH PRTDEVADR WRKHDWPRD CRTDEVATCLST 5. The easiest command to use to vary on a device is: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ A. D.MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – EXCERCISE MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – EXCERCISE 1. Left hand corner Right hand corner The command used to list devices attached to the AS/400 is: _____ _____ _____ _____ A. What steps do you use to determine the system date? _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ 3. VARYON PRTDEVADR WRKHDWPRD WRKDEVD WRKCFGSTS 5-16 System Administration April 2000 . _____ B. the cursor will be in the upper: _____ A. If a device is varied off.

and press Enter. From any command line.MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – EXCERCISE Solutions to Miscellaneous System Functions . 5. 2. 3. 4. define the system value as QDATE and press Enter. type VER and press Enter. April 2000 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-17 . type 23 DEALERLINE Version. A. From any command line. or from the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000). type DSPSYSVAL and press F4. E. B.Exercise 1.

MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – EXCERCISE This page intentionally left blank. 5-18 System Administration April 2000 .

................................... 5-1 DISPLAY DEALERLINE AND OPERATING SYSTEM RELEASE.................................................................................................................................................................... 5-14 DISPLAY SYSTEM VALUES ........... 5-6 Tape Drive ............................5 Miscellaneous System Functions Table of Contents OVERVIEW ....................................................... 5-7 WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF).......................................... 5-10 Delete a Spool File (Report).......................................................................... 5-29 June 2002 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-i . 5-17 Place Your Reports on Hold and Retrieve Spool File Information ... 5-3 VARY DEVICE ON/OFF..................... 5-16 Create the Report Storage File on the AS/400.................................................................................. 5-15 SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD ... 5-9 Hold a Spool File (Report)........................................... 5-2 PRINT A LIST OF DEVICES ATTACHED TO THE AS/400 .... 5-11 Display a Spool File (Report) ..................................................................................... 5-8 Change Printer.................................. 5-21 Copy the MEREPORTS file to an Initialized Tape Cartridge ...... 5-26 View MEREPORTS File ...................................................................................... 5-19 Copy the Held reports (spool files) into the MEREPORTS storage file ....................................................................................... 5-12 Release (Print) a Spool File (Report) ......................... 5-6 Workstation or Printer ................................................................................................................... 5-28 MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – EXCERCISE .......................

Table of Contents This page intentionally left blank. 5-ii System Administration June 2002 .

OVERVIEW Miscellaneous System Functions OVERVIEW This chapter provides common miscellaneous system functions and procedures: • • • • • • • Display DEALERLINE software release Display the Operating System release Print a device listing Vary a device on or off Work with spool files Display system values Save (archive) reports to a tape cartridge / CD June 2002 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-1 .

. Or At a command line. . .+ displays in the lower right of the screen. : 10/29/94 Product Code* Product Release *ALL Code. Complete one of the following from a command line: Type VER and press Enter. and press Enter. Type 23. . . The version screen displays: DEALERLINE Base Release Operating System Release SA0711DF QPADEV0092 Automotive Retail Group Software Version Display 8/04/97 15:13:34 Operating System Release : VxRxM0 DEALERLINE Product Release DEALERLINE/XL Base Release: 4. . : 10/26/94 Load Date . a Customer Support Representative may be able to more quickly answer a question or diagnose a problem... F18=Bottom PgUp PgDn If More. When contacting the Customer Support Center. Press F3 to return to a command line. by relaying this information. type GO DMM000 and press Enter to display the DEALERINE XL Main Menu.4 Creation Date . ..DISPLAY DEALERLINE AND OPERATING SYSTEM RELEASE DISPLAY DEALERLINE AND OPERATING SYSTEM RELEASE To display the current DEALERLINE Base Release/Product Release. *ALL Creation Date Load Date PTF Information: *NO *YES. and the current Operating System Release: 1. *NO More: + Description Product Code XXXX 4580 4575 4570 4565 4562 4560 4550 4545 4540 F3=Exit DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL DL XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 F4=*Prompt XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/99 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 XX/XX/98 F17=Top DEALERLINE 1999 Relase Two DEALERLINE Parts Rewrite DEALERLINE 1999 Release One Common Delivery Reporting GM Stocking Guide Update 1998 BUSINESSLINE Year End DEALERLINE 1998 Release Two Required VIN Changes DEALERLINE 1998 Release One More. DEALERLINE Version. . press the Shift + Arrow Up keys at the same time. 2. . it is important you know the DEALERLINE software and Operating System Release. . to display additional information. 5-2 System Administration June 2002 .

The matrix prints at the system printer.PRINT A LIST OF DEVICES ATTACHED TO THE AS/400 PRINT A LIST OF DEVICES ATTACHED TO THE AS/400 To create a report of all devices (with ports. June 2002 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-3 . to print information for a second controller.) 3. . (You could also type the following at a command line: PRTDEVADR CTL01 and press Enter. . At a command line. addresses and types) attached to a workstation controller on the AS/400: 1. change CTL01 to CTL02. CTL01 Name F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys F5=Refresh F12=Cancel Bottom F13=How to use this display 2. type PRTDEVADR and press F4. press Enter. The Print Device Addresses (PRTDEVADR) screen displays. . . Type the controller description (ID) and press Enter. ! A device address listing for a remote controller must be manually created. If needed. Print Device Addresses (PRTDEVADR) Type choices. Controller description .

PRINT A LIST OF DEVICES ATTACHED TO THE AS/400 Following is an example of a device address listing: 5769SS1 V4R2M0 Device Addresses for S1020334 4/04/00 13:48:52 Page Local Work Station Controller CTL01 Type 915A Switch Setting --> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ : : : : : : : : : W1 : #GUIDE7 : W3 : : : : : Port 0 : *DSP : *DSP : *DSP : : : : : : 3477 FA : 5150 1 : 3180 2 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Port 1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : : : : PL : : Q0 : NX : Port 2 : : : : *DSP : : *DSP : *DSP : : : : : 5150 1 : : 5150 1 : 3477 FA : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : W5 : : PA4 : SDSPC : : : PT : Port 3 : *DSP : : *PRT : *DSP : : : *PRT : : 5150 1 : : 4214 2 : 5150 1 : : : 4214 2 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : R3 : PCK : : : II3 : PCY : : Port 4 : *DSP : *DSP : : : *DSP : *DSP : : : 5150 1 : 5150 1 : : : 3477 FA : 5150 1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : : : PL : : Q0 : NX : Port 5 : : : : *DSP : : *DSP : *DSP : : : : : 5150 1 : : 5150 1 : 3477 FA : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : W6 : : PA4 : SDSPC : : : PT : Port 6 : *DSP : : *PRT : *DSP : : : *PRT : : 5150 1 : : 4214 2 : 5150 1 : : : 4214 6 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: : : : : : : : : : R8 : PCK : : : II3 : PCY : : Port 7 : *DSP : *DSP : : : *DSP : *DSP : : : 5150 1 : 5150 1 : : : 3477 FA : 5150 1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________:______________: 940909 1 : : : : 5-4 System Administration June 2002 .

the number of devices allowed is reduced. and types) for all workstation controllers on the AS/400: 1. 2. 3. ! Depending on the type of twinaxial IOA [workstation controller]. type GO DEVICESTS and press Enter.PRINT A LIST OF DEVICES ATTACHED TO THE AS/400 To create a report for all devices (with ports. 4.5 to 4 terminals. June 2002 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-5 . The Device Status Tasks screen displays: DEVICESTS Device Status Tasks System: To select one of the following. Type 10. an 8 port workstation controller can only have a maximum of 40 devices. A 4 port workstation controller can have a maximum of 28 device sessions. 10. and press Enter. however. A maximum of 7 devices can be on each port. depending on the bandwidth created by the PC. type its number below and press Enter: 1. A PC can equal 1. At a command line. it will either have 8 or 4 ports. If PCs are connected to a workstation controller. Work Work Work Work with with with with display devices printer devices tape devices diskette devices S123635 Work with local device addresses Type a menu option below F1=Help F3=Exit F9=Command line F12=Cancel 2. Work with local device address. 3. The matrix prints at the system printer. addresses.

*DEV xx (xx=device ID) and 2. 5-6 System Administration June 2002 .. type WRKCFGSTS *DEV W* and press Enter. if the Status is VARIED OFF. At a command line.VARY DEVICE ON/OFF VARY DEVICE ON/OFF A workstation will automatically vary off is a user attempts to sign on with an invalid user ID or password 3 times. . Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F23=More options F24=More keys 3. .. type WRKCFGSTS press Enter.] • If you do not know the device ID: 1. All devices beginning with the letter W displays. it must be varied on from another workstation. In order to make the device useable again. Work with Configuration Status 09/15/99 Position to . may become varied off causing the nightly backup to not start. Opt __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ Description WA WB WC W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 Status SIGN ON DISPLAY VARY ON PENDING ACTIVE VARY ON PENDING SIGN ON DISPLAY VARY ON PENDING VARY ON PENDING VARY ON PENDING VARIED OFF S1020334 13:57:47 More. [Command WRKDEVD W* can also be used. Workstation or Printer Complete the following to vary on a workstation or printer: If you know the device ID: ◊ Or ◊ If you know the device begins with W. type 1 to vary on the device. .. A command line. ! • A workstation is varied off when the cursor is in the upper left-corner of the screen. The tape device (TC).. press Enter. . type WRKCFGSTS *DEV and press Enter. Starting characters 8=Work with description -------------Job-------------WC STUDENT 026074 Type options. At the Opt field next to the device ID (Description). 1=Vary on 2=Vary off 5=Work with job 9=Display mode status . The Work with Configuration Status screen displays all devices on the AS/400.

Another command that can be used to locate or display devices is WRKDEVD Tape Drive Complete the following to vary on a tape drive: A command line. then vary on the device (type 1 to vary on the device). vary the device off (type 2 to vary off the device). type WRKCFGSTS • • *DEV TC and press Enter. If the Status is Failed. If the Status is Varied off. June 2002 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-7 . vary on the tape drive. then vary on the tape drive. vary off the tape drive.VARY DEVICE ON/OFF If the Status of a device is FAILED or RCYPND. The correct Status of the tape drive should be Varied on.

type WRKSPLF and press Enter. you can use the WRKSPLF command to display the report at your terminal. or redirect the report to print at a different printer. 2. delete. While submitting a report. Hold. The Work with All Spooled Files screen displays. To ensure you are working with the correct report. 2. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 5 File PI4655RP User DOCMDK Device or Queue DUMP User Data PI4655RG 6=Release Total Pages 10 7=Messages Cur Page Sts OPN Copy 1 Bottom Parameters for options 1. is the name of the program that processes. When a report is help in the spool file. Some files could contain hundreds of pages and require system space to retain them. 3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys It is recommended to delete spool files not needed on a regular basis. Delete. it is either held in the spool file or it is directed to a printer for immediate printing. Display. To access a report held in the spool file: 1. press Enter. At any command line.WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) When a report is submitted for processing. it may be necessary to view (5. Work with All Spooled Files Type options. The File name listed on this screen. it is not the name/number of the screen where you submitted the report from. 5-8 System Administration June 2002 . The most recent reports processed display at the bottom of the spool file list. or Release (print) a spool file (report). Locate the spool file (report) to display or print. print. ! Type WRKSPLF to display all spool files created by the user who is signed onto the terminal (from where the command is typed). Display) several Files until the correct report displays. some screens have a Hold Print field – type Y to hold the report in the spool file. See the following sections to Change printers.

. . . . . . . then Enter. . . . . F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F13=How to use this display DUMP QGPL Name. . . . * Name 000000-999999 1-9999. *LIBL. . . . . . . . It may be necessary to first display the file/report to ensure you are working with the correct file/report. . . . 2. . . . . . . . *SAME. . *SAME. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen. Spooled file number Printer . . . . . . *STRPAGE. . Additional Parameters Output queue . . *ONLY. . . . . . . . type the Printer ID of the printer to print the report and press Field Exit. Print sequence . . . . . . *OUTQ *SAME. . . . . *SELECT Name. . June 2002 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-9 . *SAME Number. . From the Work with All Spooled Files screen. . . . . . . . The report is directed to the printer you specified. . . . . . At the Printer field. . . . . at the Opt field next to the File name and press Enter.. . . . . . type 2. *CURLIB Bottom F12=Cancel F10=Additional parameters F24=More keys 3. *SAME. . *NEXT Form type. Change.WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) Change Printer To direct a report to print at a different printer: 1. . Number . . User . . press Enter. Library . . . . *STD 1-255. . > QSYSPRT > PI1560CL > DOCMDK > 534991 > 1 *OUTQ___ *SAME *STD 1___ *STRPAGE Name. . The Change Spooled File Attributes screen displays: Change Spooled File Attributes (CHGSPLFA) Type choices. . . . . . Job name . Restart printing . . . Form type .. . . . *LAST Name. . Spooled file . . . *DEV Name. . . Copies . . . . . locate the file/report you want to change the printer for. . . . . . . . *SAME. . . .

It may be necessary to first display the file/report to ensure you are working with the correct file/report. At the Opt field.WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) Hold a Spool File (Report) To hold the spool file (report) in the spool file: 1. locate the file/report you want to place on hold. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 3 File PI4655RP QSYSPRT User DOCMDK DOCMDK Device or Queue P1 DUMP User Data PI4655RG PI1564RG 6=Release Total Pages 10 93 7=Messages Cur Page Sts RDY *HLD Copy 1 1 Bottom Parameters for options 1. The report will remain on hold in the spool file until you type 6. The file Sts (status) changes to *HLD. press Enter. 3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys 2. Work with All Spooled Files Type options. 2. type 3. Hold and press Enter. 5-10 System Administration June 2002 . Delete. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen. Release to release the report or 4. next to the File name.

1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 4 File PI4655RP QSYSPRT User DOCMDK DOCMDK Device or Queue P1 DUMP User Data PI4655RG PI1564RG 6=Release Total Pages 10 93 7=Messages Cur Page Sts RDY RDY Copy 1 1 Bottom Parameters for options 1. Work with All Spooled Files Type options. Press F12 to return to change your choices. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen. locate the file/report you want to delete. type 4 next to each file.WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) Delete a Spool File (Report) To delete the spool file (report): 1. The Confirm Delete of Spool File(s) screen displays. Opt 4 File QSYSPRT User DOCMDK Device or Queue DUMP User Data PI1564RG Sts RDY Total Pages 93 Cur Page Copy 1 Bottom F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel 3. Press Enter. 2. type 4. At the Opt field. and press Enter. press Enter. next to the File name. It may be necessary to first display the file/report to ensure you are working with the correct file/report. More than one file can be deleted at the same time – if you have more than one file to delete. The spool file(s) is deleted and the Work with All Spooled Files screen displays. Delete. June 2002 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-11 . 3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys 2. Confirm Delete of Spooled Files Press Enter to confirm your choices for 4=Delete.

At the Work with All Spooled Files screen. At the Opt field. and press Enter. Display. It may be necessary to first display several files . 5-12 System Administration June 2002 . Work with All Spooled Files Type options. 2.WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) Display a Spool File (Report) To view the spool file (report): 1. locate the file/report you want to display.the most recent files/reports display at the bottom of the screen. next to the File name. 3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys 2. type 5. press Enter. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 5 _ File PI4655RP QSYSPRT User DOCMDK DOCMDK Device or Queue P1 DUMP User Data PI4655RG PI1564RG 6=Release Total Pages 10 93 7=Messages Cur Page Sts RDY RDY Copy 1 1 Bottom Parameters for options 1.

87 GBPKOC 1994 1974 1 SP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 More..130 Find ..... press F12....32 G C 1993 1973 1 SP 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 476574 00649 BEARING3... Cancel.. To locate a specific word or group of words.. . ...8... .. For example. Right. ..0.27 G P C 2000 1980 2 SP 0 0 0 08/22/1997 0 0 0 0 0 601261 10553 RETAINE 2.2.....+..........1..+. F3=Exit F12=Cancel F19=Left F20=Right F24=More keys 3..+. • • • • June 2002 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-13 . To advance the screen a specific number of detail lines. ..+.. To shift the screen left (to view any additional information).. Left. .+....2..+..+.. Complete any of the following: • • To advance the screen forward or back.4.. ....13 GBPKOC 2000 1957 5 SP 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 334671 07242 CLAMP 1....7..5. _______________ *.. press PgUp/DgDn keys [Roll Up ↑or Roll Down keys ↓].42 GBPKOC 2000 1976 1 SP 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 363455 03616 HANGER 1..1.83 G P C 2000 1976 1 SP 11 0 03/16/1999 1 0 0 0 0 341953 16261 ROLLER 5...+.WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) The Display Spool File screen displays: Display Spooled File File ...3 PRINT DATE: 4/04/00 14:18:04 TEST MOTORS #3 PROGRAM: PI4655RG PAGE: 1 COMPANY NUMBER: 03 GUIDE FILE REPORT WRKSTN: QPADEV0056 USER: DOCMDK REQUIRED PARTS NOT AVAILABLE GROUP OTHER HI LO ON ON LAST SALE MONTHLY SALES HISTORY PART NO NO.3.. : PI4655RP Page/Line 1/3 Control .57 BPKOC 2000 1976 1 SP 11 0 03/16/1999 1 0 0 0 0 459021 00027 MOUNT MT 24..... .82 G OC 2000 1974 1 SP 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 345215 04338 FITTING 6. press F19... type the word(s) at the find field and press F16...+.93 GBPKOC 2000 1953 1 SP 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1136519 09170 COMPRESS 257.9.. The screen advances to the word or group of word(s) you typed.... DESCRIPTION COST CARLINE G YR YR PKG STK AVAIL ORD BKO DATE BIN MAR FEB JAN DEC NOV 274288 05875 STEM 1.30 GBPKOC 1993 1974 1 SP 0 1 0 32 0 0 0 0 0 1394293 04037 KIT .+.+.61 GBPKOC 1995 1964 1 SP 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 356668 02335 CLAMP 3. . press F20.75 GBPKOC 1999 1977 1 SP 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1381487 01745 GROMMET 3. type a value at the Control field (at the top of the screen).+.81 G OC Y 2000 1996 1 SP 0 1 0 06/16/1997 0 0 0 0 0 1252240 13095 BREAKER3. . ... . To shift the screen right (to view any additional information).45 GBPKOC 1999 1974 1 SP 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 465840 02251 SHI 1.. To return to the Work with All Spooled Files screen.... type +10 and press Enter to advance the screen 10 detail lines (type –10 to go back 10 detail lines). ________ Columns 1 .6. .....+.

5-14 System Administration June 2002 . next to the File name of the held report. and press Enter. Files/reports that are held display HLD in the Sts (status) column. locate the file/report you want to release. then changes to RDY (ready) The report is ready to be printed at the printer specified for this job (or the default printer). 2. Release. 3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys 2. Work with All Spooled Files Type options. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt 6 _ File PI4655RP QSYSPRT User DOCMDK DOCMDK Device or Queue P1 DUMP User Data PI4655RG PI1564RG 6=Release Total Pages 10 93 7=Messages Cur Page Sts HLD RDY Copy 1 1 Bottom Parameters for options 1. press Enter.WORK WITH SPOOL FILES (WRKSPLF) Release (Print) a Spool File (Report) To release a held spool file (report): 1. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen. type 6. At the Opt field. It may be necessary to first display the file/report to ensure you are working with the correct file/report. The Sts display *RLS.

To view any system value: 1. After reviewing the information..... type the system value to view (in this example. Description QTIME Time of day (DSPSYSVAL) Time .. System value . At the System value field..... *PRINT system values Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display 2........ Press Enter.. 3. type *PRINT to print the information.... At a command line. press Enter.. QTIME is typed to display the system time... or leave * to view the information.... ! June 2002 WRKSYSVAL command can also be used to display system value(s)... QACGLVL. type DSPSYSVAL and press F4.. press F3 to exit... Miscellaneous System Functions 5-15 . The Display System Value (DSPSYSVAL) screen displays: Display System Value Type choices............. press Enter.. Output (DSPSYSVAL) QTIME * QABNORMSW.DISPLAY SYSTEM VALUES DISPLAY SYSTEM VALUES A system value is information that defines data and/or functions.. At the Output field.(press F4 to get a list of all *.... System value . The following information displays: Display System Value Type choices... 13:20:00 Press Enter to continue. Bottom F3=Exit F12=Cancel 4......

on the tape cartridge • 5-16 System Administration June 2002 . the contents of the file on your system is cleared and used again to store the current month's reports. The EDS Automotive Retail Group does not currently support a standalone archived report viewer. After the file is copied to tape. Copy the Held reports (spool files) into the MEREPORTS storage file. Follow the steps in this section carefully. When processing is complete. and job Number. After the tape cartridge is initialized. Create a report storage file named MEREPORTS. Job name. A Data Archive vendor uses this tape cartridge to create the file on CD. • Place Your Reports on Hold and Retrieve Spool File Information. • • Copy the MEREPORTS file to an initialized tape cartridge. The steps to copy the first report spool also include clearing the file. This process to create the CD from tape cartridge must be coordinated with a Data Archive vendor. or one that can be initialized.SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD This procedure copies spool files (reports) from the AS/400 to a tape cartridge. This report storage file will contain all reports you want to save during the month. locate your spool file report in the spool file and place it on Hold. Perform a screen print the following spool file information File name. This section includes the steps to view and verify the reports in the MEREPORTS file. copy each report into the MEREPORTS storage file. the MEREPORTS storage file can be copied to the tape cartridge. you will need either a new/blank tape cartridge. View MEREPORTS Storage File. This file is created on your system one time only. Select the appropriate menu option and submit a report for processing. Using the screen print of the spool file information. The reports on CD can be viewed and/or stored for archive purposes. The steps to copy the first report spool file differ from the steps to copy subsequent report spool files. To complete this step. User name. These instructions contain the steps to: • Create a report storage file on the AS/400. please consult your Data Archive vendor. This process has not been tested with all manufacturers of these products. The tape cartridge can be used to create a CD of your reports.

*SRC *FILE Name. . . . The MEREPORTS report storage file will contain the reports you want to save for the current month. . Source member . . . *NONE > Mereports Report File Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F10=Additional parameters F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys . press F10. . copy the MEREPORTS file onto a tape cartridge.SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD Create the Report Storage File on the AS/400 Complete the steps in this section one time only to create the MEREPORTS storage file. . . . . . The contents of the MEREPORTS file on your system is cleared when you begin to save reports for the next month. . Press Tab until the cursor is positioned at the Text 'description' field. Additional parameters. . Library . > MEREPORTS Name > QGPL Name. . . type MEREPORTS and press Field Exit. type QPGL and press Field Exit. Library . . . . . . At the end of the month. . 2. . . . . *FILE > 150 Number 20 0-30 0 0-30 *DATA *DATA. Type 150 and press Field Exit. . . Type Month End Report File e. press Enter. Generation severity level Flagging severity level . . . File type . . type CRTPF The Create Physical File (CRTPF) screen displays: Create Physical File (CRTPF) Type choices. *CURLIB *FILE Name. . . . . . . After the MEREPORTS file is created on your AS/400 it does not have to be created again. . *CURLIB QDDSSRC Name *LIBL Name. . . File . . At the File field. if desired . . At a command line. . . Source file . Press Shift and Roll (Arrow Down) keys at the same time to display the next screen: June 2002 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-17 . If Bottom displays at the bottom of the screen. . . . . 3. c. Make the following field entries: a. b. . . *FILE. . At the Library field. During the month. . . . and press Enter. . d. . Member. 1. Press Tab until the cursor is positioned at the Record length. . . . . if no DDS field. . . from the AS/400 Main Menu. . . *LIBL. . . . . . . . Record length. . . . . . . . you will be copying spool file reports into the MEREPORTS file. if no DDS . . . Text 'description' .

. Expiration date for member . At the Increment number of records field. . after the file is copied to tape cartridge. The following message displays: File MEREPORTS created in library QGPL 5. *NONE Number. . Maximum increments . Press Enter. . *SOURCE. . you do not have to complete the steps in this section again. . d. *DLY. . . . . . 5-18 System Administration June 2002 . Press Tab until the cursor is positioned at the Initial number of records field. . . *NOMAX Number Number *NO. . *YES More. . .. . Access path maintenance . . *YES 1-2147483646. Increment number of records . . Access path recovery . press Enter. . . . *FILETYPE Date. . . . After the MEREPORTS file is created. . . type *NOMAX and press Field Exit. *RMT. *IPL *NO. . + for more values System . . *REBLD *NO. Make the following field entries: a.SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD The next screen displays: Create Physical File (CRTPF) Type choices. . . . . *NOMAX *IMMED. . . The MEREPORTS file remains on your system. . the contents of the file (monthly reports) are cleared each month. and type *NOMAX b. Member size: Initial number of records . . . .. type 1000 and press Field Exit. . Force keyed access path . . . . F13=How to use this display 4. *NOSRC. Press Tab until the cursor is positioned at the Maximum members field. *AFTIPL.. c. . . . . Additional Parameters Source listing options . . . *LCL. F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys F5=Refresh ________ _______ *LCL *NONE *NOMAX *IMMED ______ *NO *NOMAX 1000 3 *NO F12=Cancel *SRC. Maximum members . Allocate storage ..

. If you also want to save the spool file report to print later: At the Opt field next to each spool file to save. type 3 and press Enter. 1. The Work with All Spooled Files screen displays all spool files for your user ID. Create the report spool files by running any report option from any menu. the system does not automatically delete them. Any report can be placed on Hold. press Shift and Arrow (Roll) keys at the same time to display the next screen of spool files. 2. At the Opt field. The status (Sts) changes to *HLD. If you type 5 next to more than one File.. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt _ 3 _ File PI3624RP PRINT PRINT User HOLLY HOLLY HOLLY Device or Queue P1 P1 P1 User Data PA112 GL146 GL676 6=Release Total Pages 1 12 29 7=Messages Cur Page Sts RDY HLD HLD Copy 1 1 1 Bottom Parameters for options 1. type WRKSPLF and press Enter. b. Press Tab until the cursor is at the command line and type SAVE(*YES) and press Enter. next to each spool file to Hold. At a command line. they must be deleted periodically. and to screen print spool file information. After these saved spool file reports are printed and/or saved to tape. press Enter to display the next file. type 2. Work with All Spooled Files Type options. If the spool file you want to save already displays HLD as the Status (Sts). 3 or command ===> save(*yes) F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys • • • If More. After the report (s) have processed. Some reports are automatically placed in the spool file with a Held (HLD) status. verify the spool file contents to ensure you are working with the correct report: At the Opt field next to any File(s) type 5. press Enter. June 2002 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-19 . skip step b. If necessary. displays in the lower right corner. 2. place them on Hold: a. Press F12 to return to the Work With All Spooled Files screen. etc. as long as it produces a spool file. The report displays on the screen. and press Enter.SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD Place Your Reports on Hold and Retrieve Spool File Information Repeat the steps in this section as often as necessary to place your spool file on Hold. Display.

and Number for each spool file you want to copy into the MEREPORTS file. View 3 b.SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD 3. Job. User. and Number. press F10. Work with All Spooled Files Type options. d. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt _ _ _ File PRINT PI3524RP PRINT File Nbr 1 1 1 Job PA1120CL GL0146CL AGDSCHED User HOLLY HOLLY HOLLY 6=Release 7=Messages Number Queue 234567 P1 310207 P1 310188 P1 Library QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS Bottom Parameters for options 1. 2. The following spool file information displays for each spool file on the screen: File. Job. 3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 2 F11=View 1 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys c. After the spool file is Held. At the Work with All Spooled Files screen. You will need the File. Screen print this screen. 5-20 System Administration June 2002 . with your the spool file displayed on the screen. press F12 to exit. After completing all screen prints. screen print the spool file information for each report to copy: a. press Enter. User.

• June 2002 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-21 . This step contains the instructions to clear last month's reports from the file.SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD Copy the Held reports (spool files) into the MEREPORTS storage file Using the screen prints from previous section. WARNING: The steps to copy the FIRST report (spool file) into the MEREPORTS storage file are different than the steps to copy the remaining reports. Follow step 2 to copy all subsequent reports. • Follow step 1 only for the first report you copy into the report storage file. copy each report (spool file) into the MEREPORTS storage file. Repeat step 2 as many times as necessary during the month to copy reports (other than the first) into the MEREPORTS storage file.

you will clear the file of all reports. . . . . . . 1. . . . . . type CPYSPLF and press F4. Replace or add records . . . . . * Name 000000-999999 1-9999. At a command line. . . You are now ready to to clear the report spool file of last month's reports and copy the first report for the current month into the report spool file. . . . . 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt File PRINT PRINT PRINT File Nbr 1 1 1 Job AGDSCHED GL0146CL PA1120CL User HOLLY HOLLY HOLLY 6=Release 7=Messages Number Queue 310188 P1 310207 P1 234567 P1 Library QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS Bottom Parameters for options 1. . 2. . . . . . . . . *FIRST *REPLACE. User . . . . . . . . *LIBL. and Number from the screen print of spool file information: Work with All Spooled Files Type options. Copy Spooled File (CPYSPLF) Type choices. Spooled file number . . *ONLY. *ADD Bottom F12=Cancel F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F13=How to use this display F10=Additional parameters F24=More keys b. . . 3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 2 F11=View 1 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys 5-22 System Administration June 2002 . . For each report you want to copy. Or You have successfully copied the contents of the report spool file onto a tape cartridge. . . . The Copy Spooled File (CPYSPLF) screen displays. . . . .SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD Warning: Step 1 contains the instructions to clear the contents of the MEREPORTS file and copy the first report of the month into the file. . . other than the first report. . press Enter. . . . . . . . . . Job. *LAST Name. . PRINT MEREPORTS QGPL AGDSCHED HOLLY 310188 *ONLY *FIRST *REPLACE Name Name Name. . . . *CURLIB Name. . To member . . To copy the first report (for the month) into MEREPORTS file: a. Complete step 1 only if: • • You have just created the report spool file and you are copying the first report spool file. . User. . you will need the File. . . Spooled file . . . To data base file . Library . . . Number . If you complete this step to copy any reports. . . . Job name . . press Enter.

Control character. At the Replace or add records field. . . . . . . *LIBL. . . . place the cursor at the character to change and press the Insert key. . F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F24=More keys *FCFC F12=Cancel *NONE. . . . At the Job name field. *ONLY. . . . At the User field. June 2002 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-23 . . . Job name . . At the Control character field. to make spelling corrections. . . *FIRST *REPLACE. type the Job name (listed on the screen print) and press Field Exit..SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD c. Additional parameters. . *LAST Name. . . Number . . Spooled file number . . . . Replace or add records . i. Press F10. . *PRTCTL. . type the User name (listed on the screen print) and press Field Exit. To member . . . . . . . At the To data base file field. g. . . To data base file . . . F13=How to use this display Name Name Name. . Press Tab to position the cursor at the To member field. Spooled file . Library . type the spool File name (listed on the screen print) and press Field Exit. . . d. . * Name 000000-999999 1-9999. . Make any changes (press the Delete key to remove characters). . . . . . . . if *FIRST does not display as the field entry. . type MEREPORTS and press Field Exit.. At the Library field. . type QGPL and press Field Exit. . . Press Enter again. type *FCFC and press Enter. h. type the job Number (listed on the screen print) and press Field Exit. . type *FIRST and press Field Exit. The following message displays at the bottom of the screen: xxxx records copied to file MEREPORTS in QGPL If any error messages display. press Enter. . *FCFC. PRINT MEREPORTS QGPL AGDSCHED HOLLY 310188 *ONLY *FIRST *REPLACE Additional Parameters Control character . User . . . and type *REPLACE k. . . *CURLIB Name. . . *ADD l. At the Number field. . . . . An additional field. . verify all spelling on the command line. e. Copy Spooled File (CPYSPLF) Type choices. . . . . j. . . . . f. . . displays at the bottom of the screen. . . At the Spooled file field. . . .

.SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD Warning: Complete step 2 to copy additional report spool files to the MEREPORTS file. Replace or add records . *ADD Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F13=How to use this display F10=Additional parameters F24=More keys F12=Cancel b. . 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Opt File PRINT PRINT PRINT File Nbr 1 1 1 Job AGDSCHED GL0146CL PA1120CL User HOLLY HOLLY HOLLY 6=Release 7=Messages Number Queue 310190 P1 310207 P1 234567 P1 Library QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS Bottom Parameters for options 1. . To copy additional spool file reports other than the first (for the month) into the MEREPORTS file: a. . Job. For each report you want to copy. press Enter. . User. type CPYSPLF and press F4. Spooled file number . . PRINT MEREPORTS QGPL AGDSCHED HOLLY 310190 *ONLY *FIRST *ADD Name Name Name. . . . . . . . *ONLY. . . . 2. . . . . Number . 2. . . Library . . The Copy Spooled File (CPYSPLF) screen displays Copy Spooled File (CPYSPLF) Type choices. To member . *FIRST *REPLACE. . . . . . . . . . Step 2 can be completed as many time as needed during the month to add additional spool files to the MEREPORTS file. press Enter. . . . . . . * Name 000000-999999 1-9999. . 3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 2 F11=View 1 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys 5-24 System Administration June 2002 . . . . . *CURLIB Name. after the first one has already been copied using Step 1. . At a command line. . . . . . . *LAST Name. . . . and Number from the screen print of spool file information. . . . . . Spooled file . . *LIBL. . . . . . Work with All Spooled Files Type options. . To data base file . . . . User . . . . you will need the File. . . . . . Job name . . .

. Copy Spooled File (CPYSPLF) Type choices. . . type the Job name (listed on the screen print) and press Field Exit. d. . At the Job name field. . Spooled file number . . Library . *LAST Name. . displays at the bottom of the screen. . type MEREPORTS and press Field Exit. place the cursor at the character to change and press the Insert key. . type the User name (listed on the screen print) and press Field Exit. type QGPL and press Field Exit. . Replace or add records . .. . . . . At the Control character field. More. *ONLY. . . .. To data base file . . . . . . . . . . . June 2002 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-25 . At the Replace or add records field. . Additional parameters. . To member . . . e.SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD At the Spooled file field. . . * Name 000000-999999 1-9999. . . *PRTCTL. . . press Enter. *FCFC. F13=How to use this display m. . . The following message displays at the bottom of the screen: xxxx records copied to file MEREPORTS in QGPL If any error messages display. if *FIRST does not display as the field entry. .. . . . f. F5=Refresh *FCFC F12=Cancel *NONE. . h. . User . . . *FIRST *REPLACE. Number . . . Control character. j. At the Number field. An additional field. . Press Enter again. . At the To data base file field. . At the Library field. . . i. *CURLIB Name. Make any changes (press the Delete key to remove characters). g. . . . verify all spelling on the command line. At the User field. . . . . type the spool File name (listed on the screen print) and press Field Exit. Press Tab to position the cursor at the To member field. type *FIRST and press Field Exit. type *FCFC and press Enter. . . . . . Job name . . and type *ADD k. to make corrections. . Press F10. . . . . type the job Number (listed on the screen print) and press Field Exit. . . *ADD Additional Parameters Control character F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys . . . . . *LIBL. .. Spooled file . . The command displays on the command line. . PRINT MEREPORTS QGPL AGDSCHED HOLLY 310190 *ONLY *FIRST *ADD Name Name Name. . .

. . . then copy the MEREPORTS storage file from the AS/400 to tape cartridge. . (Operating System is V3R7M0 or higher). . . . . F12=Cancel ' F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F13=How to use this display F10=Additional parameters F24=More keys 5-26 System Administration June 2002 . press Enter. . . . *SL. To Initialize a tape cartridge for the MEREPORTS file: 1. *ALL 1-9999. . . At a command line.. From file . . . More.. *TAPF. . . . . . Library . . File sequence number . The tape cartridge can be used to create a CD of your reports. At a command line. Device . .SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD Copy the MEREPORTS file to an Initialized Tape Cartridge To complete this step. *END Name. . . . . *NL. . . Tape file . you will need either a new/blank tape cartridge.. . . . *LIBL.. . . . . . The Copy To Tape (CPYTOTAP) screen displays Copy To Tape (CPYTOTAP) Type choices. . Note: If you have a RISC processor. . Ensure the initialized tape is in the tape drive. From member . *TAPF. . . . . . 2. . . . . The reports on CD can be viewed and/or stored for archive purposes. End of tape option . type INZTAP DEV(TC) NEWVOL(your facility name) CHECK(*NO) and press Enter. . . *REWIND. . . . *FIRST. . . . or one that can be initialized. *LTM Number. . *TAPF. . . Complete this step to initialize a tape cartridge. . . . . . . . > MEREPORTS > QGPL > QTAPE *LIBL *FIRST *TAPF *FROMMBR > TC > *SL > 150 > *REWIND Name Name. . . . . . . . . Record length . . *LIBL. type: INZTAP DEV(TC) NEWVOL(your facility name) CHECK(*NO) DENSITY(CTGTYPE) Copy the MEREPORTS file onto the tape cartridge 1. . . Library .. *UNLOAD. . Tape label . Insert a tape cartridge into the tape drive. *CALC. . . . . *TAPF *TAPF. . 2. . . *CURLIB Name Name.. type CPYTOTAP and press F4. . . . . . . . *CURLIB Name. . + for more values Copy to reels: Label processing type . . generic*.

and press Field Exit. . . . *CALC *TAPF. (If the tape device is not TC. type *NO and press Enter. . Additional Parameters Volume identifier .. Record block type . . d. At the Library field. . .SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD 3. more values . . . At the Tape file field. and press Field Exit. and press Field Exit. *TAPF. . type *FB d. Remove the tape from the tape drive and label the tape cartridge June 2002 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-27 . . 4. . press Tab. c.. . + for Block length . At the End of tape option field. . type MEREPORTS b. . Press F10. F5=Refresh > *NONE > 15000 > *FB *TAPF *END > *NO F12=Cancel Character value. The MEREPORT file is copied to the tape cartridge. . . c. . type the correct Device ID. *TAPF. File expiration date Number of records to Data compaction . *TAPF. Make the following field entries: a. type 15000 and press Field Exit. *V. Press Enter again. To make corrections. . At the File expiration date. press Enter. Press Tab until the cursor is positioned at the Device field. . . and press Field Exit. copy . At the From file field. g. . The next Copy To Tape screen displays: Copy To Tape (CPYTOTAP) Type choices. Type TC and press Field Exit. . . 6. At the Number of records to copy field. At the Volume identifier field. type QTAPE and press Field Exit. At the Label processing type field. Date. place the cursor at the character to change and press the Insert key. • If any error messages display. type *REWIND h. verify all spelling on the command line. . *END *TAPF.) e. *NO Bottom F13=How to use this display Press Shift and Arrow (Roll) Up keys at the same time to display the additional fields. *FB. . . 5. F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys . *NONE 1-32767. . At the Block length field. Make the following field entries: a. type *END f. *F. type 150 and press Field Exit. . Make any changes (press the Delete key to remove characters). *VB. At the Record length field. At the Data compaction field. type *TAPF and press Field Exit. Additional parameters. . b. . *PERM Number. . . e. . At the Record block type field. type QPGL and press Field Exit. type *SL f.

type: SBMJOB CMD(DSPTAP DEV(TC) DATA(*SAVRST) OUTPUT(*PRINT)) JOB(DSPMICROTP) and press Enter. The number of records in the file displays in the upper right corner of the screen. To move through the report file: • • Press the PageUp and PageDown or Shift and Roll (Arrow Up/Down) To display the bottom of the file. Ensure the tape cartridge is in the tape drive.SAVE REPORTS TO TAPE CARTRIDGE / CD View MEREPORTS File Complete the steps in this section to view the number of records copied to the MEREPORTS file and to view a print list of MEREPORTS file names: If you have been keeping track of the total number of records copied each time you copied a spool file into MEREPORT. 3. type the characters to find at the Find field (top left of screen) and press Enter. type T at the Control field (top left of screen) and press Enter. 2 At a command line. compare that number to the number listed in the file: To verify the total nummber of records copied: 1. To locate specific characters. To display the top of the file. Verify this number with the total number of records copied each time you copied a spool file into MEREPORT. 2. The report file displays. type B at the Control field (top left of screen) and press Enter. 5-28 System Administration June 2002 . At a command line type DSPPFM FILE(MEREPORTS) and press Enter. • To print a listing of the file names on the tape cartridge: 1.

What steps did you use to determine the DEALERLINE release on your AS/400? _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ 2. D. LSTDEVATCH PRTDEVADR WRKHDWPRD CRTDEVATCLST 5. D. E. Left hand corner Right hand corner The command used to list devices attached to the AS/400 is: _____ _____ _____ _____ A. If a device is varied off. _____ B. B. 4. C.MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – EXCERCISE MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – EXCERCISE 1. C. B. What steps do you use to determine the system date? _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ _________________________ 3. the cursor will be in the upper: _____ A. VARYON PRTDEVADR WRKHDWPRD WRKDEVD WRKCFGSTS June 2002 Miscellaneous System Functions 5-29 . The easiest command to use to vary on a device is: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ A.

type DSPSYSVAL and press F4. type 23 DEALERLINE Version. 3. A. 2.Exercise 1. type VER and press Enter. 5-30 System Administration June 2002 . 5. define the system value as QDATE and press Enter. and press Enter. B. From any command line. E. 4.MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM FUNCTIONS – EXCERCISE Solutions to Miscellaneous System Functions . or from the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu (DMM000). From any command line.

.......................... 2 LEXMARK 2380/2381/2390/2391 PRINTER CONTINUOUS FORM FEED PAPER .... 5 4224/4226 PRINTER........................................................... 1 OVERVIEW ............... 3 LEXMARK 2381/2391 PRINTER ...........6 Printer Top of Form/Tear Off Table of Contents Printer Top of Form/Tear Off ..........................................................................................................................................SALESLINE...............................................SALESLINE ........................................................................................... 6 4227 PRINTER...................................... 7 IBM 4230/4232 PRINTER ... 9 FUJITSU DL4400/DL4600/DL5800/DL6400 .............. 4 EPSON FX1050/FX850 ...... 8 AMT 535 ....SALESLINE.............................................................................................. 10 April 2000 Printer Top of Form/Tear OffTear Off 6-i .............................................................................. 1 DFX5000 EPSON PRINTER ..............

Table of Contents 6-ii System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .

April 2000 Printer Top of Form/Tear Off 6-1 .OVERVIEW Printer Top of Form/Tear Off OVERVIEW This chapter contains the instructions to load paper. set the top of a form. and to set the form tear-off for various printers.

Press On-line to take the printer offline. Press On-Line to put the printer on-line. Press Top of Form (you will hear one beep).) Press Front/Rear to unload the paper (paper out light will be on). 2. The DFX5000 retains both the front and the rear top of form settings even if the printer is powered off. • To Set Top of Form: 1. Press Tear Off (the form will go to tear off). • To Set Tear Off Never Set Tear Off until the Top of Form is correct. (If the Top of Form light is not flashing. 3. 5. 8. Make sure the printer is off-line. Press Line Feed . Press Top of Form to set the top of form (you will hear two beeps and the Top of Form light will go out). Make sure the printer is offline. Press Tear Off (the printer will return to top of form). 4. 4. Press On-line to put the printer on-line. return to step 2. DO NOT tear the form off. Usually the top perforation on the first form is even with the ribbon guide. 2. 9.Load. 5.) Press Micro Feed up or down to adjust the top of the form as needed. press On-Line to take the printer offline. 4.DFX5000 EPSON PRINTER DFX5000 EPSON PRINTER • To load paper: 1. Verify the Top of Form light is flashing. 3. ! ! 1. (If the printer is on-line. Press Micro Feed up or down to adjust tear off. Secure the form in the paper guide flaps (tractor feed). 3. Press Front/Rear to select the front or rear of the printer. Print the report or invoice. 6-2 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . 6. Press Front/Rear to re-load paper. 2. 7.

Press Micro Up and/or Micro Dn keys to adjust tear off. Verify Ready light is flashing. 3. 2. Press Alt + Park Load keys to reload the paper (Ready light will blink). Press Alt + Park Load keys to unload the paper (paper-out light will go on). 2. After the form has printed and the Top of Form is correct. 5. Press Start/Stop key to set top of form (Ready light is solid). Press Start/Stop keys to set tear off (Ready light is solid). Press Start/Stop keys to take the printer offline (Ready light is off). Press Alt + Park Load keys to unload the paper (paper-out light will go on). Press Alt + Park Load keys to reload paper. do NOT unload the paper – continue to step 2. 3. 5. Press Micro Up and/or Micro Dn keys to adjust tear off. 6. Never Set Tear Off until the Top of Form is correct. and the Tear Off is still wrong. April 2000 Printer Top of Form/Tear Off 6-3 . • Set Tear Off ! 1. 4. 2. Press Alt + Tear Off (Ready light is off). 4. Print the report or invoice. 4. 3. Press Micro Up and/or Micro Dn keys to adjust top of form. Or 1.LEXMARK 2380/2381/2390/2391 PRINTER CONTINUOUS FORM FEED PAPER LEXMARK 2380/2381/2390/2391 PRINTER CONTINUOUS FORM FEED PAPER • Set Top of Form 1. Press Start/Stop keys to set tear off (Ready light is solid). Usually the top perforation of the first form is even with the ribbon guide.

Press Micro Up and/or Micro Dn keys to adjust the paper at top of form.SALESLINE LEXMARK 2381/2391 PRINTER . 6-4 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .SALESLINE) Load a sheet of paper (Ready light is solid). 2. There is no Tear Off for cut sheets.LEXMARK 2381/2391 PRINTER . Feeder for Forms . The default position is even with the platen bar. Press ALT and Set TOF.SALESLINE • Top of Form (Sheet 1. This saves your Top of Form. 3.

Press Load/Eject button to load the paper. After the report/invoice prints. Press Micro Up and/or Micro Dn (form and line feed buttons) to adjust top of form. Tear off the form. press Micro Up and/or Micro Dn (form and line feed buttons) to adjust tear off. Print the report or invoice. 3. 6. 5. • Set Tear Off ! 1. Usually the top perforation of the first form is even with the ribbon guide. the on-line button flashes. 4. 3. Press On-Line button. April 2000 Printer Top of Form/Tear Off 6-5 . Never Set Tear Off until the Top of Form is correct. 2. DO NOT press On-line button. Press Load/Eject button to unload the paper (paper-out light goes on). Press On-line to take the printer offline.EPSON FX1050/FX850 EPSON FX1050/FX850 • To set Top of Form: 1. 2. If the tear off is incorrect. The On-line button must be flashing to set tear off.

The Ready indicator is blinking after loading the forms. Press Load/Unload to load the forms again. • Set Tear Off ! Never Set Tear Off until the Top of Form is correct. or Line Feed to adjust the top of form as needed. 5. Press Start/Stop. tear off the forms at the perforation and press Load/Unload to retract the forms to the tractor position. The current position of the form is saved as the top of form and the alarm sounds. Print the report or invoice. 4. The printer retracts the form to top of form. Usually the top perforation on the first form is even with the ribbon guide. ! 6-6 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 . The current position is saved as the tear off and the alarm sounds. If forms are already loaded. 3. Press Start/Stop.35 mm (1/72 inch) increments or decrements 5. Press Micro Dn or Micro Up to align the perforation with the tear bar. Press Load/Unload to load the forms again. Press Tear Off to position the perforation within 25 mm (1 inch) of the tear bar. 2. If forms are already loaded. Press Micro Dn. Micro Up and Micro Dn moves the forms in 0. 3. 2. the printer is not ready yet. 1. 4.4224/4226 PRINTER 4224/4226 PRINTER • Set Top of Form 1. Micro Up. tear off the forms at the perforation and press Load/Unload to retract the forms to the tractor position.

SET TOP OF FORM displays in the window. 2. The paper rolls backward. Press Micro ↓ or Micro ↑ to align the perforation with the tear bar. to adjust the top of form as needed. The Ready light comes on solid. Press Micro Dn. and the Tear Off is still wrong. 4.4227 PRINTER 4227 PRINTER • Set Top of Form 1. 5. or Micro Up. 3. 4. 1. 3. • Set Tear Off ! Never Set Tear Off until the Top of Form is correct. to save the new Top of Form position. After the form has printed and the Top of Form is correct. then goes to the new tear off position. Press Start/Stop to take the printer offline. Press Menu. April 2000 Printer Top of Form/Tear Off 6-7 .) Press Store. Press Start/Stop. The current position is saved as the tear off and the printer beeps two times. (Usually the top perforation on the first form is even with the ribbon guide. 5. The Ready light comes on solid. 2. do NOT unload the paper – continue to step 2.

4. The alarm sounds and the printer displays Top of Form Set. and/or Line Feed keys to adjust top of form. • Set Tear Off ! Never Set Tear Off until the Top of Form is correct. Tear off form. 2. Press Load/Eject and the next form will advance to top of form. (Usually the top perforation of the first form is even with the ribbon guide.) Press Set Top of Form key to set top of form. Open the acoustic cover. 3. 3. Press Micro Up and/or Micro Dn. The form quickly advances to the tear off position. 4. Ready indicator is on. Press Micro Up and/or Micro Dn or Line Feed keys to adjust tear off. Print the report or invoice.IBM 4230/4232 PRINTER IBM 4230/4232 PRINTER • Set Top of Form 1. The printer displays NOT READY. The printer displays Form Ejected. 2. 1. Press Stop. Press Load/Eject. Press Load and the Ready indicator goes off. 5. 6-8 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .

The printer beeps and the setting are saved. While keeping the FONT + QUALITY buttons depressed. Turn the Tumbler to menu option #2 (SAVE). 1. 9. Turn the Tumbler until setting –7 displays. 6.SALESLINE AMT 535 .AMT 535 . OPERATIONS displays in the LED panel. End the printer [WRKWTR]. 13. 3. Release the ALT button. If FACTORY READY displays in the LED panel. April 2000 Printer Top of Form/Tear Off 6-9 . press the ALT button and keep it depressed. Power Off the printer. 14. Press the ALT button and keep it depressed. While holding down the FONT + QUALITY buttons.SALESLINE • Set Top of Form (Sheet Feeder for Forms – SALESLINE) These steps should only be completed for a New Printer Setup. c. Release the ALT+FONT+QUALITY buttons. lower right side. Release the ALT button. 8. DO NOT release the FONT + QUALITY buttons. Press the Setup button. Power Off. then press Top of Form button two times. a. then Power On the printer to enable the lock-out feature. 11. Power On the printer. • There is no Tear Off for cut sheets ! The LED panel should display FORMS READY.) Hold the ALT button and keep it depressed. Move the Tumbler to the first setting (FORMS). 4. b. (The power switch is located in the back. 7. 5. press and hold the ALT button [ALT+FONT+QUALITY]. Hold the FONT + QUALITY buttons. move the tumbler until P_SNSR displays (this sets the top of form). Turn the Tumbler until the last option is reached (usually #54 or #56). d. Start the printer [WRKWTR]. 10. 2. FORMS READY should display in the LED panel. 12.

SALESLINE FUJITSU DL4400/DL4600/DL5800/DL6400 . the menu setting needs to be checked. If the Top of Form is incorrect. Please call the EDS Customer Support Center – select the prompts for AS/400 Hardware. 6-10 System Administrator Tasks April 2000 .SALESLINE These Fujitsu printers are used for SALESLINE Forms. There is no setting for Top of Form.FUJITSU DL4400/DL4600/DL5800/DL6400 .

................................................................... 8 Twinax Attached Printer Troubleshooting........................................... 11 HELP........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 14 AS/400 Control Language Structure ............................................................................ 2 AS/400 CONTROL LANGUAGE STRUCTURE ............. 7 Job Queues............................ 6 SUBSYSTEMS......... 6 Job Process Flow....... 17 Print Jobs ................................................................................................................................................................................ 20 August 2000 AS/400 Work Management Concepts 7-i .......... 14 Libraries ............ 19 Help ...................7 AS/400 Work Management Concepts Table of Contents OVERVIEW ......................................... 16 Subsystems ................................................. 7 PRINT JOB PROCESS FLOW............ 3 LIBRARIES ....... 9 TCP/IP Printer Troubleshooting ............................EXERCISE ..... 13 AS/400 WORK MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS ..................................................................................................................................................

IBM (System) Libraries .Identify the IBM Subsystems .Parameter(s) Libraries .Cursor Location .Command Name .DEALERLINE XL (User) Libraries .Spool Files .Select a Command .Command Format .Display Commands • • • • August 2000 AS/400 Work Management Concepts 7-2 .OVERVIEW AS/400 Work Management Concepts OVERVIEW This chapter includes the following topics: • AS/400 Control Language Structure .Output Queues .Library List Subsystems .Job Queues Print Job Process and Flow .Writers Help .

August 2000 AS/400 Work Management Concepts 7-3 . performing backups and configuring the system. COMMAND FORMAT = COMMAND NAME + PARAMETER(S) COMMAND NAME A command name is a general function that consists of a verb and object. Commands are typed at a command line. COMMAND NAME = Verb + Object The Verb defines the action. COMMAND FORMAT COMMAND NAME PARAMETER(S) VERB OBJECT PROMPTING (F4) KEYWORD NOTATION POSITIONAL NOTATION COMMAND FORMAT The AS/400 command format consists of a command name (general function) and parameter(s). The Object identifies what the action is to be performed on.AS/400 CONTROL LANGUAGE STRUCTURE AS/400 CONTROL LANGUAGE STRUCTURE The AS/400 Control Language or commands are used to interface with the AS/400 to perform functions such as monitoring the system. Command lines display at the bottom of some menus.

The Work with User Profiles screen displays...... type the appropriate option (for example..JSMITH NAME.. 3. Work with User Profiles Type options..*ALL F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F13=How to use this display F10=Additional parameters F24=More keys Bottom F12=Cancel At the User Profile field. type press Enter... PROMPTING [F4] For example... press Enter. at a command line. next to the User Profile.AS/400 CONTROL LANGUAGE STRUCTURE Function Create User Profile Change Password Display Tape Work with Job Queues Initialize a Tape Work with Writer Work with Spool Files PARAMETERS(S) Verb CRT CHG DSP WRK INZ TAP WRK WRK Object USRPRF PWD TAP JOBQ INZTAP WTR SPLF Command Name CRTUSRPRF CHGPWD DSPTAP WRKJOBQ WRKWTR WRKSPLF Parameters further define/limit the functionality of a command.. 2 to Change a user profile) and press Enter... WRKUSRPRF *ALL and 7-4 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 ...Salesperson 5=Display Bottom Parameters for options 1.. type WRKUSRPRF and press F4 The Work with User Profiles (WRKUSRPRF) screen displays. 2. Parameters for a command can be specified in one of three ways: 1. 1=Create 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 12=Work with objects by owner Opt ___ ___ User Profile ___________ JSMITH Text John Smith ... Work with User Profiles (WRKUSRPRF) Type choices...... type the User ID to update and press Enter.. User Profile......... press Enter.. 4 and 5 or command ===>_____________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F16=Repeat position to F17=Position to F21=Select assistance level F24=More keys At the Opt field.. at a command line..GENERIC*.. ! To display all User Profiles.

• • WRKWTR P* or WRKCFGSTS *DEV W* • Plus Sign + Allows additional entry fields to be used to define. For example. WRKJOBQ JOBQ(QBATCH) and press Enter. Multiple Value Symbols • More.. Ellipsis . KEYWORD NOTATION This requires that you type the command." it is used to specify one or more generic names for a group of objects. the keyword that identified the parameter. Press Shift + Arrow Up simultaneously to display the next screen. POSITIONAL NOTATION This requires that you type the command and all the parameters in proper order with correct spacing and punctuation. Indicates more than one screen of information. To display all possible field entries.. You can also press F10 at some command screens to define additional parameters.. Gives a complete listing of valid system parameters. August 2000 AS/400 Work Management Concepts 7-5 . An asterisk also identifies system-defined parameters when it precedes a parameter value. For example.AS/400 CONTROL LANGUAGE STRUCTURE 2. 3. and the parameter. For example. press F4 with the cursor positioned at the field.. Asterisk * If the asterisk follows the word "generic. WRKSPLF *ALL and press Enter.

To display all libraries. type DSPLIB *ALL There are two types of libraries: •IBM (system) Libraries These contain operating system software and information required to operate the AS/400.LIBRARIES LIBRARIES A library acts as a directory to group similar objects. QSYS QHLPSYS QUSRSYS QGPL System Library . DBLIBR BLLIBR DCLIBR LELIBR MPLIBR PALIBR PFLIBR PRLIBR RALIBR SALIBR SLLIBR SMLIBR SVLIBR SSLIBR Data Base Library . To see a list of the libraries assigned to your user profile on your computer.Contains program updates until they are permanently placed in programs with a new release PARTSLINE XL Library RAPID400 Library System Administration Library . This is the library saved during the nightly backup. The following is a list of several DEALERLINE libraries. Examples of AS/400 subsystems: DLCOMMSBS EZFORMS PRINTSBS QBATCH where communication polling jobs are processed. where all parts and service print jobs are processed area to process jobs in background and allow the terminal to be used for other functions while the processing occurs 7-6 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 .Used with programs to complete DEALERLINE XL security and backups SALESLINE XL Library SERVICELINE XL V1 Merchandising Library SERVICLEINE XL V2 Library SERVICELINE XL Scheduling Library SUBSYSTEMS A subsystem is an independent environment with its own allocated resources where work is performed. BUSINESSLINE XL Library GM DCS400 Library Leasing Library GMAC MAPS Payroll Library Temporary Fixes Library .Contains miscellaneous information and IBM programs •DEALERLINE XL (user) Libraries These are application libraries purchased by a retail facility that allow them to complete each task listed.Contains help text data used when you press Help key [F1 key is the Help key for a PC keyboard] Security Library .All data files that make each computer system unique to the dealership or retail facility. area in computer that EZFORMS monitors are processed.Contains all operating system software and user profiles Help Text Library .Contains message and output queues General Purpose Library . type DSPLIBL (Display Library List). IBM Libraries are prefixed with Q.

prior to processing in a subsystem. for example. August 2000 AS/400 Work Management Concepts 7-7 . Which subsystem jobs are processed in depends on the type of job and its own internal requirements and parameters. usually batch jobs. the inquiry would process in QINTER. except the system console. If you were to inquire on a check in BUSINESSLINE. Subsystem The area a job is processed in. BUSINESSLINE XL Month-End procedure processes in QBATCH or SERVICELINE XL Daily Cutoff procedure processes in QBATCH.SUBSYSTEMS QCMN QCTL QINTER QSPL - where communication jobs are processed location where system console functions where all interactive jobs. process area in computer that processes print jobs Job Process Flow JOB QUEUE SUBSYSTEM Job Queues A job queue is a holding area for all jobs.

print screen. Before the job can print. To make this task easier. and printer must all be started and communicating with each other.g. Print jobs are removed from this area on a FIFO (first-in. 7-8 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . one of the subsystems just discussed.. writer. printer P1 has its print jobs delivered by writer P1 from output queue P1. Printer Hardware device that prints the spool file. For instance.PRINT JOB PROCESS FLOW PRINT JOB PROCESS FLOW SPOOL FILE OUTPUT QUEUE WRITER PRINTER Spool File A spool file is a print job generated by the computer system within This is a synonym for a print job or listing. Output Queue An output queue is a holding area for spool files prior to being printed on the printer. e. first-out) basis. Writer A writer is an IBM program that reads a spool file from an output queue and sends it to a printer. the output queue. IBM has each area named the same.

To assist you. 3. 1=Start 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 6=Release 7=Display messages 8=Work with output queue Opt Device Sep Form Type File User User Data _ P1 STR *FILE *ALL _ P2 STR *FILE *ALL _ P3 END _ P4 END _ P5 END _ P6 END _ P7 END _ P8 STR *FILE *ALL _ P9 STR *FILE *ALL _ P10 END _ P11 END More. here are a list of questions that will walk you through troubleshooting twinax attached printer problems. press Enter. type WRKWTR and press Enter to display all printers: Work with All Printers Type options. 6 or command ===>_____________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F17=Top F18=Bottom F24=More keys Sts • • • • Is the writer started? (STR would display in the Sts field) Is the writer held? (HLD would display in the Sts field) Is the writer in Message Waiting? (MSGW would display in the Sts field) Is the writer ended? (END would display in the Sts field) August 2000 AS/400 Work Management Concepts 7-9 .. 2.. 4. Parameters for options 1.PRINT JOB PROCESS FLOW Twinax Attached Printer Troubleshooting One of the most common problems is losing your printout. Look at the printer • Is the power on? • Is the printer on-line? • Is the paper loaded? • Is the paper jammed? • • • • • • • • Use command WRKWTR Is the writer started? Is the writer held? Is the writer in MSGW? Is the writer ended? Use command WRKOUTQ Is the OUTQ held? Use command WRKSPLF Is the spool file held? Is the spool file in MSGW? Is the spool file complete? Use command WRKWTR At a command line.

. 4. 2. Parameters for options 1. type WRKOUTQ and press Enter to work with all output queues: Work with All Output Queues Type options. type WRKSPLF *ALL and press Enter to work with all user spool files. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Device or Opt _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ File QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QPDSPSBJ QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QPRINT User THOMAS THOMAS WAKEFIEL NASIADKI NASIADKI NASIADKI NASIADKI NASIADKI NASIADKI MCCALLUM Queue P1 P1 P1 P5 P3 P2 P1 P4 P4 P5 User Data 6=Release 7=Messages Cur Page Copy Total Sts RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY Pages 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 110 C4RCP1 C4RCP1 C4RCP1 C4RCP1 C4RCP1 C4RCP1 CMS101RG 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 More. . Command ===>_____________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F4=Promt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F24=More keys • Is the OUTQ held? (HLD would display in the Status field) Use command WRKSPLF At a command line. 6 or command ===>_____________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys • • • Is the spool file held? (HLD would display in the Sts field) Is the spool file in Message Waiting? (MSGW would display in the Sts field) Is the spool file complete? (The spool file would be completed. .PRINT JOB PROCESS FLOW Use command WRKOUTQ At a command line. press Enter. press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 9=Work with Writers 14=Clear Opt _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Queue PS DMOUTQ DUMP EZFORMS QDKT QIPDSPRT QLINEPRT QOAGEORT QPFROUTQ QPJOBLOG QPRINT QPRINTS Library QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS 5=Work with 6=Release 8=Description Files 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Writer Status RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS More. Work with All Spooled Files Type options.. OPN would display in the Sts field if the file was still being processed) 7-10 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . 3.

at a command line. here are a list of questions that will walk you through troubleshooting TCP/IP printer problems. type WRKWTR and press Enter to display all printers: Work with All Writers Type options. To assist you. 6 or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F22=Start printer writer F24=More keys • Does the Writer ID (Printer ID) display? If the Printer ID does NOT display. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with output queue Opt Writer BA BB BC FT FV JA JB JC JD JE Type Device RMT RMT RMT RMT PRT FV RMT RMT RMT RMT RMT 5=Work with Queue BA BB BC FT FV JA JB JC JD JE 6=Release 7=Display messages Status STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR Form Type *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL More. Look at the printer • Is the power on? • Is the printer on-line? • Is the paper loaded? • Is the paper jammed? • • • • • • • • Use command WRKWTR *ALL Is the writer started? Is the writer held? Is the writer in MSGW? Is the writer ended? Is the OUTQ held? Is the spool file held? Is the spool file in MSGW? Is the spool file complete? Use command WRKOUTQ Use command WRKSPLF Use command WRKWTR *ALL At a command line. STRRMTWTR xx (xx=Printer ID) or STRRMTWTR *ALL can be used to start a TCP/IP printer. press Enter. Library QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS Parameters for options 2... 4. • • • Is the writer started? (STR would display in the Sts field) Is the writer held? (HLD would display in the Sts field) Is the writer in Message Waiting? (MSGW would display in the Sts field) August 2000 AS/400 Work Management Concepts 7-11 . 3.PRINT JOB PROCESS FLOW TCP/IP Printer Troubleshooting One of the most common problems is losing your printout. type STRRMTWTR *ALL and press Enter.

4.. Work with All Spooled Files Type options. . OPN would display in the Sts field if the file was still being processed. 6 or command ===>_____________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F22=Printers F24=More keys • • • Is the spool file held? (HLD would display in the Sts field) Is the spool file in Message Waiting (MSGW would display in the Sts field) Is the spool file complete? (The spool file would be completed. 2. type WRKSPLF *ALL and press Enter to work with all user spool files. press Enter. press Enter. . 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with printing status Device or Queue P1 P1 P1 P5 P3 P2 P1 P4 P4 P5 6=Release 7=Messages Cur Page Opt _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ File QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QPDSPSBJ QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QPRINT User THOMAS THOMAS WAKEFIEL NASIADKI NASIADKI NASIADKI NASIADKI NASIADKI NASIADKI MCCALLUM User Data Sts RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY RDY Total Pages 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 110 Copy C4RCP1 C4RCP1 C4RCP1 C4RCP1 C4RCP1 C4RCP1 CMS101RG 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 More. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 9=Work with Writers 14=Clear Opt _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Queue PS DMOUTQ DUMP EZFORMS QDKT QIPDSPRT QLINEPRT QOAGEORT QPFROUTQ QPJOBLOG QPRINT QPRINTS Library QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS 5=Work with 6=Release 8=Description Files 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 Writer Status RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS More.. type WRKOUTQ and press Enter to work with all output queues: Work with All Output Queues Type options. Parameters for options 1.) 7-12 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 .PRINT JOB PROCESS FLOW Use command WRKOUTQ At a command line. Command ===>_____________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F4=Promt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F24=More keys • Is the OUTQ held? (HLD would display in the Status field) Use command WRKSPLF At a command line. 3.

The EDS default is the intermediate help level. Example: GO CMDWRK and press Enter lists all of the work commands Select a Command: Display a Command: August 2000 AS/400 Work Management Concepts 7-13 . Type in the command SLTCMD *ALL and press Enter to initiate the process of listing all commands Type GO CMDxxx (xxx=command verb) and press Enter to initiate the listing of commands on the system.HELP HELP Assistance is available in many forms on the AS/400 that we will discuss. Help from the AS/400 on the operating system can be obtained in any of the following ways: Cursor Location: Place the cursor where help is desired and press Help or from a PC. the level of help text assistance may also be defined in the system values. In addition. You have a choice of basic. intermediate. press F1. or advanced.

EXERCISE AS/400 WORK MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS . 7. The AS/400 control language is an alternative to using the AS/400 Menus and options. B. A. C.EXERCISE AS/400 Control Language Structure 1.. the prompt screen. None of the above 5. if you see ". Typing a command in positional notation requires the parameters to be in _____ True _____ False sequential order. _____ True _____ False 4. F4 7-14 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . Name 5 common verb acronyms used in a command name. ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ 3. F10 _____ B.AS/400 WORK MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS . At a prompt screen. Q _____ C.. D. Asterisk (*) _____ B. F9 F3 F4 Help parameter. A system-defined parameter for a command begins with: _____ A. Parameters may be system-defined or user-defined. to see At a prompt screen.. if you want to view "Additional parameters. move your cursor to that field and press: _____ _____ _____ _____ 8. Required or most commonly updated parameters are usually listed first on _____ True _____ False 6." following the list of possible values for a the entire list." press: _____ A. _____ True _____ False 2.

F9 9. 1 .Verb 2 .Parameter 10. F4 _____ C. Help _____ B. _____ _____ _____ Specifications or limitations to a command Action to be performed What the action is to be performed on What key must be pressed to display a command's prompt screen? _____ A. Match the command components with their definition. Enter August 2000 AS/400 Work Management Concepts 7-15 .EXERCISE _____ C.Object 3 .AS/400 WORK MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS .

QUSRSYS 2. SALIBR 3. What command would you use to display the complete library list? ____________________ 5. What is the name of the library that is backed up daily? _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ A.EXERCISE Libraries 1. SALIBR 4. B. QSYS DBLIBR All system libraries All application libraries All system and application libraries 7-16 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . E. QSYS _____ B. What is the name of the library that contains the IBM operating system? _____ A. QSYS _____ C. What is the name of the library that contains all the DEALERLINE XL data files? _____ A. DBLIBR _____ C. What is the name of the IBM AS/400 System Library? _____ A. D. C. DBLIBR _____ C.AS/400 WORK MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS . QSYS _____ B. #LIBRARY _____ B.

_____ True _____ False 4. D. A batch job will lock up the workstation until the job is done. F. B. Output Queue 8. B. What subsystem does a BUSINESSLINE XL batch process in? _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ A. where is it? _____ A. F. D. where is it? August 2000 AS/400 Work Management Concepts 7-17 . C. QINTER QBATCH QCTL QSPL QCMN QSNADS Which subsystem do interactive sessions other than the system console process in? _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ A. Which subsystem does the system console (W1) operate in? _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ 2. A job queue is a holding area for: _____ Batch jobs _____ Spool jobs 6. E. QINTER QBATCH QCTL QSPL QCMN QSNADS 3. D.EXERCISE Subsystems 1. Subsystem _____ B. A. _____ True _____ False 5. Batch jobs require one-on-one interaction between the user and the AS/400.AS/400 WORK MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS . C. If a batch job is waiting to be processed. E. B. E. C. Job Queue _____ C. QINTER QBATCH QCTL QSPL QCMN QSNADS 7. F. If a batch job is processing.

EXERCISE _____ A. Output Queue 7-18 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . Subsystem _____ B.AS/400 WORK MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS . Job Queue _____ C.

Spool File 2. Output Queue _____ B. Spool files are removed one at a time from an output queue following which _____ A LIFO . _____ True _____ False 6. Job Queue _____ C. Output Queue principle? August 2000 AS/400 Work Management Concepts 7-19 .AS/400 WORK MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS . _____ True _____ False 5. Writer _____ C. Subsystem _____ B. A writer must be assigned to an output queue for the spool files in the output queue to actually print. _____ True _____ False 3. FIFO . What is another name for a print job? _____ A.EXERCISE Print Jobs 1. If a print job is waiting to be processed. A writer is an IBM program that reads spool files from an output queue and sends them to a printer.First In First Out 4. where is it? _____ A.Last In First Out _____ B. A spool file goes to a writer before it goes to an output queue.

AS/400 WORK MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS . D.EXERCISE Help 1. B. List the steps to execute the following? Display all the 'WRK' commands ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ 7-20 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . A. move the cursor to the message and press Help or F1 from a PC keyboard. Pressing the Help key (or F1 from a PC keyboard) can provide detailed information for the following: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ 2. To display Help explaining an error message. E. move the cursor to the: _____ A. C. F. Error messages Commands Parameters Menus Display screens All of the above To display Help explaining the entire screen. Error message and press Help or F1 from a PC keyboard 3. Any field and press Help or F1 from a PC keyboard _____ C. Screen title and press Help or F1 from a PC keyboard _____ B. _____ True _____ False 4.

print RST . Libraries 1. F10 1 = Action to be performed 2 = What the action is to be performed on 3 = Specifications or limitations to a command B.EXERCISE Solutions to AS/400 Work Management Concepts Exercise AS/400 Control Language Structure 1.AS/400 WORK MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS . Either commands or menus will work. 9.delete PRT . True.add True A. but if you remember them. F4 A. 3. 2. B.restore 3. 10. QSYS QSYS DBLIBR DSPLIBL DBLIBR August 2000 AS/400 Work Management Concepts 7-21 . 2.initialize DLT . 5. A. 7. 4. 6. WRK – work DSP – display CHG – change SAV – save STR – start ADD . F4 CRT . commands will allow you to work faster. B.create INZ . B. 5. 8. 4. Asterisk (*) True True C.

2. 7-22 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . 4. 5. 3.EXERCISE Subsystems 1. 7. First In First Out False True Output Queue Help 1. 6. 5. 8. 3. 2. 3. B. 4. F. 6. C. All of the above Screen title and press Help or F1 from a PC keyboard True At any command line. Spool file True FIFO. 2. A. 4.AS/400 WORK MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS . A. type GO CMDWRK and press Enter. QCTL QINTER False False Batch Jobs QBATCH Subsystem Job Queue Print Jobs 1. C. C.

.

.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2 MESSAGE QUEUES ....................................... 7 Reply to Messages ................................................................................................................ 13 DELETE MESSAGES.................................................... 1 TYPES OF MESSAGES ....EXERCISES .................... 3 SEND MESSAGES ........................... 4 Send a Message to a Workstation ID(s) ...................................... 5 Send a Message to a User ID with a Reply Line..........8 Messages Table of Contents OVERVIEW.............. 6 Send a Message to a Workstation ID(s) with a Reply Line ............................................................ 10 Display System Messages.................................................................................. 14 MESSAGES ............ 8 Display Messages ............... 15 August 2000 Messages 8-i ......... 4 Send a Message to a User ID(s) ..................... 9 Display messages for a user ID(s)......... 9 Display Messages for a Workstation ID(s)........... 11 Display System Operator Messages/Help for System Messages 12 Display Messages from the WRKWTR screen ..........................................

Table of Contents This page intentionally left blank. 8-ii System Administrator Tasks August 2000 .

To a specific User ID(s) or Workstation ID(s) .Getting Help for System Messages Delete Messages • • • • August 2000 Messages 8-1 .Delivery Mode Send Messages .Personal Messages .For a specific User ID(s) or Workstation ID(s) .Reply to messages Display Messages .With a reply line for the receiver to respond .OVERVIEW Messages OVERVIEW • Types of Messages .From the System Activity Command Screen .System Messages .System Messages Message Queues .Types of Message Queues .

8-2 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 .TYPES OF MESSAGES TYPES OF MESSAGES There are two general types of messages: personal and system. System messages are messages sent by the computer to the user. • • Personal messages give the users the ability to communicate with each other via the computer.

There are three basic delivery modes: • • • *BREAK . Even a BREAK message will not break on a Sign On screen. Delivery Mode The delivery mode specifies how the AS/400 will interface with the message queue regarding messages. can only be received by the user or workstation the message is sent to.interrupts current processing *NOTIFY . There are three types of Message Queues: • • • User ID Message Queues Workstation Message Queues System Operator Message Queue (QSYSOPR) MESSAGE QUEUES USER ID WORKSTATION QSYSOPR Contains Personal Messages Sent to User Contains Personal Messages Sent to Workstation Contains System Messages Message queues are named for user ID's.MESSAGE QUEUES MESSAGE QUEUES A message queue is a holding area for messages. if the user is signed onto the workstation. a user MUST be signed onto a workstation. workstation ID's or QSYSOPR (system operator).sent to message queue with no notification ! A message being sent. August 2000 Messages 8-3 .sets off alarm and message symbol on terminal (commonly used) *HOLD .

Send Message (SNDMSG) Type choices. . . . . . . . *ALLACT. . . . . type the user ID of the person to receive the message. 8-4 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . *CURLIB *INFO. . . PSMITH______ Name. . . . > Pat. . . At the To user profile field. *INFO Name. At a command line. *SYSOPR Name. . Message text . *INQ More. and press Enter. The message is sent. . . I will be out of the office this afternoon. . . 4. . .SEND MESSAGES SEND MESSAGES Messages can be sent to or displayed from any user ID or workstation. . *LIBL + for more values _________ Message type . . . We will discuss next weeks schedule__________________ ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ To user profile . ===> F3=Exit keys F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More 2. . . . Press F3 to exit. . Please stop by before 2:00. press Enter. Type the Message. *SYSOPR. . *LIBL. Additional Parameters To message queue . type SNDMSG (SEND MESSAGE) and press F4. . . . 3. . > Friend Library . . . . ... Send a Message to a User ID(s) 1. . . ! To display the Additional Parameters press F10 at the Send Message screen. .

. *INQ Name Name. . At the To work station message queue field. . . Type the Message. . . Message queue to get reply . . . . . . To send a Break message to another workstation: 1. Message text . test message Name. and press Enter. . . . . Send Break Message (SNDBRKMSG) Type choices. + for more values Message type . *LIBL *INFO QSYSOPR *LIBL *INFO. . . . At a command line. it displays immediately at the workstation you specify. . *LIBL Bottom ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys 2. W1. . . 4. Library . . . . "ALLWS *LIBL Name. . Press F3 to exit. . for example. . . a user must be signed onto the workstation for the message to display. W1 Library . .SEND MESSAGES Send a Message to a Workstation ID(s) When you send a Break message to another workstation. . type SNDBRKMSG (SEND BREAK MESSAGE) and press F4. . . *LIBL To work station message queue . . . . August 2000 Messages 8-5 . . . However. press Enter. . . type the workstation ID of the workstation to receive the message. . . The break message is sent to the workstation you specify. 3.

.. . . . . . .SEND MESSAGES Send a Message to a User ID with a Reply Line To send a message to a specific User ID with a reply line so they can respond back to your message: 1. If reply is to be sent to another workstation other than the one you sent the message from. 8-6 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . . . . . . . FRIEND Name. Additional Parameters To message queue . . Message text . *LIBL + for more values _________ *LIBL Message type . Type the Message. *INQ More. . type *INQ and press Enter. . At a command line. . . > _________ Library . . type SNDMSG (SEND MESSAGE) and press F4. ! To display the Additional Parameters press F10 at the Send Message screen. *LIBL. . . . *CURLIB *INFO. The message is sent with a reply line for the receiver to type a response to your message. . the Message Queue to get Reply field must be filled in with the workstation or User ID which the reply is to be sent to. *ALLACT. . . At the To user profile field. ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display 2. . . press Enter. . *INFO Name. . . *SYSOPR Name. . > Is 2:00 a good time to meet?____ ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ To user profile .. . type the user ID of the person to receive the message. . . At the Message Type field. 4. . . . . . Send Message (SNDMSG) Type choices. and press F10. . . 3. . Additional Parameters. . . *SYSOPR.

. 3. Type the Message. . type SNDBRKMSG (SEND BREAK MESSAGE) and press F4. .... . . August 2000 Messages 8-7 . type the workstation ID of the workstation to receive the message. .. At the To work station message queue field. *LIBL Name. At a command line. . The break message is sent to the workstation you specify. QSYSOPR Library . .. "ALLWS Library . .. *INQ Name Message queue to get reply . . type the workstation ID to receive the message with the reply line... .. *LIBL Bottom ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F13=How to use this display F10+Additional parameters F24=More keys F12=Cancel 2. type *INQ At the Message queue to get reply field. . __________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________ To work station message queue _______ Name.. .. . 4. . . . . .. .. press Enter. . 5. At the Message type field..SEND MESSAGES Send a Message to a Workstation ID(s) with a Reply Line To send a Break message to another workstation with a reply line: 1. Send Break Message (SNDBRKMSG) Type choices. .... and press F10. . . . *LIBL + for more values *LIBL *INQ Message type . . *LIBL Name. Additional Parameters. Message text . . W1.... *INFO. . . for example. . .

*SYSOPR. . . . *PRINT Bottom ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F13=How to use this display F10=Additional parameters F24=More keys F12=Cancel 2.. . . . . . . . . . . The inquiry message displays (if the message was sent in break mode. . : Severity . Output . . . *CURLIB *. . *LIBL. . You can see who sent the message at the From prompt.. . If you are displaying the message sent to the workstation you are working from. . type the name of the message queue to view. . Display Messages (DSPMSG) Type choices. . . . : EDS 07/16/91 10:41:34 Do you like to send messages on the computer? Reply. this screen would interrupt the user and display immediately on their screen): Display Messages Queue. . . . *WRKUSR Library . press Enter. . . . . *WRKUSR. : _________________________________________________________ Bottom F3=Exit F13=Remove All F11=Remove a Message F16=Remove All Except Unanswered F12=Cancel F24=More keys 4. . . . . .SEND MESSAGES Reply to Messages To reply to a message sent to your workstation: 1. . : Program . . press Enter. . . . At the Message queue field. . : MSECOFR QOSRSYS 00 System. Name. . . . . . At a command line. . . Message queue . . 8-8 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . . . . : Library. . : *DSPMSG Library . : *Notify S1024600 3. . : Delivery. Type your reply and press Enter. . . or leave the default value and press Enter. type DSPMSG at any command line and press F4. * Name. . . From . . . . type DSPMSG and press Enter. The computer will send the original message and your reply to the user who originally inquired.. Type reply.

*LIBL. . * Name. .Display Messages Display Messages Display messages for a user ID(s) To display messages: 1. . . . . . *WRKUSR. . . *PRINT Bottom ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F13=How to use this display F10=Additional parameters F24=More keys F12=Cancel 2. type the user ID and press Enter. . . press Enter. Output . . . . . . *SYSOPR. type DSPMSG and press F4. Name. . ! You could also type DSPMSG xxxx (xxxx=User ID that you are displaying) and press Enter. . . . Message queue . .. The Display Messages (DSPMSG) screen displays: Display Messages (DSPMSG) Type choices. .. *WRKUSR Library . . August 2000 Messages 8-9 . *CURLIB *. . At a command line. . . . . At the Message queue field. . .

. type DSPMSG and press Enter. . . . .. . . *SYSOPR. .. *PRINT Bottom ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F13=How to use this display F10=Additional parameters F24=More keys F12=Cancel 2. . . Message queue . *CURLIB *. . . . At a command line.Display Messages Display Messages for a Workstation ID(s) To display messages for a specific workstation ID: 1. . 8-10 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . . *WRKUSR. . Name. press Enter. . . . The Display Messages (DSPMSG) screen displays: Display Messages (DSPMSG) Type choices. . type DSPMSG and press F4. Output . . . At the Message queue field. *WRKUSR Library . . *LIBL. type the workstation ID of the workstation you want to display the message. * Name. . . ! If you are displaying the message sent to the workstation you are working from. . (or leave the default value) and press Enter. . . . .

the printer will continue printing. August 2000 Messages 8-11 . 6. Start system request at previous system 11. The System Request menu can be bypassed by pressing the Shift + SysReq keys at the same time. Press the Shift + SysReq keys at the same time. 5. then press Enter. 4. Transfer to previous system 13. System Request System: Select one of the following: 1.. and press Enter to display system operator ! The following is an example of a system operator message: Verify alignment on printer P1 (I C G N R) The letters following the messages are the valid options you can select to answer the message. 3. and press Enter.. 14. After the message is answered. Display system operator messages. Start system request at home system Transfer to home system More. and pressing Enter. Type 6. You could also type DSPMSG QSYSOPR messages. The verify alignment message is always answered with an I (Ignore).Display Messages Display System Messages To display system messages: 1. Display sign on for alternative job End previous request Display current job Display messages Send a message Display system operator messages Display work station user S1015993 10. 2. 7. Selection __ F3=Exit F12=Cancel 2. The System Request menu displays. then typing 6 on the dotted line at the bottom of the screen.

More.. . Load form type '*STD' device P5 writer P5. . . . N -. type an I. or press Reset.. . .... .. .: I -. .. . .. . or on the message. . .To continue printing aligned forms skipping to the next form and Printing the first line again. .To print the first line again on the next form and to verify the alignment.. . .. . : Date sent .. : S1021419 *DSPMSG *HOLD Place cursor here and press Help Type reply (if required). and press Help or F1 from a PC keyboard. type a G. : I Press Enter to continue....... : 99 17:20:51 Message . . .. . . .. : Severity . . Display Messages Queue . . . G -. .. F3=Exit F6=Print F9=Display message details F21=Select assistance level F12=Cancel 8-12 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . F3=Exit F13=Remove all F11=Remove a message F16=Remove all except unanswered F12=Cancel F24=More keys 2. . . : The forms may not be aligned correctly. . . .. Press Stop only if Start and Stop are two keys. . : Message type .. : Time sent ... : CPA4002 Inquiry 03/20/00 Severity . Begin at the Display Messages screen.. . : Verify alignment on printer P5. : QSYSOPR QSYS 60 System: Program . .. . type DSPMSG QSYSOPR and press Enter. . (G B I H R C) G Reply . . .Display Messages Display System Operator Messages/Help for System Messages To display additional help for system messages: 1. .. .. .. ... 1. Possible choices for replying to message . : Library . . . . : Delivery ... : Bottom. . Additional Message Information displays: Additional Message Information Message ID .. ... : Verify alignment on printer P5. (I G N R E C) Cause .. : Library . Position the cursor to the left of the message.. (I G N R E C) I Reply .To continue printing aligned forms starting with the next line of the File. The first line For the file is 6. press Enter. . . At the command line. Reply . ..

at the Opt field. (the Sts must be MSGW). Type 7. Display Messages. press Enter.4. for more information on TCP/IP printers. for example. type WRKWTR chapter 5. 1=Start 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work With 7=Display Messages 8=Work with Output Queue Opt 7 Device P1 P2 P3 Sts Sep MSGW END STR *File Form Type *All Bottom F24=More Keys File User 6=Release User Data Parameters for options 1. Printers. To display only printers that start with P.3.6 or command F3=Exit F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F17=Top F18=Bottom 2. type WRKWTR August 2000 Messages 8-13 .Display Messages Display Messages from the WRKWTR screen To display only the messages for a specific device. P1: 1. P* and press Enter. Work with All Printers Type options.2.) To display only printer P1. Begin at the Work with All Printers (WRKWTR) screen. type WRKWTR P1* *ALL and press Enter. ! To display all printers including TCP/IP printers. (See and press Enter.

. : CHUCK 03/22/00 18:02:00 Please sign off immediately so the backup can finish successfully. . press F3 to exit the Display Messages screen. Press Enter. Complete one of the following: • • • To remove one message. : CHUCK 03/22/00 18:01:00 Nightly backup is in progress From . Bottom. . or leave the default value. : CHUCK 03/22/00 19:55:07 Nightly backup is complete for all applications. . At a command line. . To remove all messages in the queue. . At the Message queue field. From . . F16 5. .. press Enter. . . . From . . press F16. Display Messages Queue . place the cursor on the message to delete and press F11. QINTER will be ended in 5 minutes so the backup can continue uninterrupted. 2. : Library . 3. . F3=Exit F13=Remove all F11=Remove a message F16=Remove all except unanswered F12=Cancel F24=More keys 4. 8-14 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . To remove all messages in the queue except those needing a reply. : CHUCK 03/22/00 16:00:00 Nightly backup is scheduled for 18:00 Please complete your work and sign off by that time. . : S1021419 *DSPMSG *NOTIFY Type reply (if required). . type DSPMSG and press F4. : Severity . . : Delivery . . . 1. From . . . type a user ID. . After removing any messages.. : Library .DELETE MESSAGES DELETE MESSAGES Unwanted messages should be deleted on a regular basis. press F13 (it is recommended to always use ). . : PAS_3179_1 QSYS 00 System: Program .

_____ True _____ False 2. move the cursor to the message and press: _____ A. Enter _____ C. How would you define the response to the message: "Verify alignment on device P1 (ICGNR)" ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ 5. Which key should be pressed to remove all messages except the unanswered from the message queue(s)? _____ A. F16 4. F4 _____ B. If additional information is needed for a message. A message can be sent to or displayed for any workstation or user ID.MESSAGES . F13 _____ C.EXERCISES MESSAGES . What is the name of the system message queue? How do you access the system message queue? ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ August 2000 Messages 8-15 . Help or F1 from a PC keyboard 3. F11 _____ B.EXERCISES 1.

Use SNDMSG from user ID's and SNDBRKMSG for workstation ID's. True. The name of the message queue is QSYSOPR To access QSYSOPR: • Or • At a command line. 5.MESSAGES . messages and fields. C.Exercise 1. 3. F16. The Help key (or F1) will provide more information in screens. 8-16 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . 2. Press Shift + SysReq. then type 6 and press Enter. 4. type DSPMSG QSYSOPR and press Enter. C.EXERCISES Solutions to Messages . Reply I (Ignore) to allow the printer to continue printing at the next line in the spool file.

......................................................21 Work with Subsystem Jobs Screen Definitions ......8 Work with All Printers Screen Definitions (Twinax Attached Printer) .......................15 Work with All Writers Screen Definitions (TCP/IP Printers)...................34 Work with Job Queues ...................17 Subsystems ....................................24 Work with Subsystem Jobs (WRKSBSJOB) Screen Definitions ...................20 Work with System Console Subsystem...........................20 Work Active Job ...15 Printer Messages (TCP/IP Printers) .....32 BATCH JOBS ......................................................................................................................................................................................................22 Work with Interactive Subsystem ..............................12 Work With Writers (TCP/IP Printers)............................EXERCISE......................................................................................30 Work with Subsystem Jobs (WRKSBSJOB) Screen Definitions ...............2 Work with Spool Files Screen Definitions.......................25 Work with Subsystem Jobs Screen Definitions ..........................................................................................................................................36 Work with All Job Queues Screen Definition...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3 Work with Output Queues ................................................34 Work with Submitted Jobs Screen Definitions.......................................................38 August 2000 Backups 9-i ...7 Work with Writers (Twinax Attached Printers)......31 Work with Subsystem Jobs Screen Definitions ..................................................................................................................36 MONITORING SYSTEM ACTIVITY .............................9 Printer Messages (Twinax Attached Printers) .................................2 Work with Spool Files.........................................................................................................................1 PRINT JOBS ...................6 Work with Output Queues Screen Definitions ................................................................26 End a User's Job ...............................28 Work with Batch Subsystem.......34 Work with Batch Jobs...........9 Monitoring System Activity Table of Contents OVERVIEW ...........

Table of Contents This page intentionally left blank. 9-ii System Administrator Tasks August 2000 .

Work with Interactive Subsystem .Work with Output Queues .OVERVIEW Monitor System Activity OVERVIEW • Print Jobs .Work with Job Queues August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-1 .Work with Batch Subsystem • Batch Jobs .Work with Writers • Subsystems .Work with Spool Files .Work with System Console Subsystem .Work with Batch Jobs .

change or remove any spool file you must have spool control authority (spool control authority is covered in Chapter 4.2.Print Jobs Print Jobs Work with Spool Files To view. type WRKSPLF *ALL and press Enter. At command line. type WRKSPLF and press Enter. Work with All Spooled Files Type options. Security). press Enter. ! Opt To display only the spool files submitted under your User ID. at a command line. 1=Send 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 8=Attributes 9=Work with Printing Status File QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT QSYSPRT User EDS EDS EDS EDS Device or Queue P4 P4 P4 P6 User Data 6=Release 7=Messages Cur Page 1 1 Total Sts Pages WTR 1 RDY 1 HLD 1 MSGW 1 Copy 1 1 1 1 Parameters for option 1.3 or command ===> F3=Exit F10=View 3 F11=View 2 F12=Cancel Bottom F22=Printers F24=More keys Using Command WRKSPLF *ALL • • • Is the spool file held? (HLD would display in the Sts field) Is the spool file in Message Waiting? (MSGW would display in the Sts field) Is the spool file complete? (OPN would display in the Sts field if the spool file is still processing) 9-2 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 .

Change the number of copies. The only way to recover data from report is to rerun the job that created the listing. the field will not display.Print Jobs Work with Spool Files Screen Definitions Options: 1 = Send 2 = Change 3 = Hold 4 = Delete 5 = Display Send a spool file over the network. or to review a spool file before deleting. Displays spool file characteristics/parameters. printer to be used. Allows a held spool file to print. The spool file (report) displays on the screen. etc. This way. This option can be used to locate a spool file (report). Prevent the spool file from printing. Remove the spool file from list of jobs to be printed. If no change is allowed. Display any system messages related to a spool file. you could quickly locate the information you need rather than printing entire report. but keeps it on computer system to be printed at a later time by releasing it. Use this option when MSGW displays in the STS column. Displays printing status of selected spool file. 6 = Release 7 = Messages 8 = Attributes 9 = Work With Printing Status August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-3 . This is display only.

ready to print. Defines the data file name of the print file. Total Pages Cur Page Copy Total number of pages to be printed in this spool file. Defines the page the printer is currently printing.job is still processing.g.Print Jobs Columns: Opt File User Device or Queue Allows entry of above option number(s) to complete desired task. User Data STS 9-4 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . Using your printer as a copier will slow down the printing of reports. Holding area (queue) that listing is waiting in or printer the listing will print at.under control of write RDY . Application program or job that created spool file. DLDATAQ or QSPLJOB). waiting on writer/printer HLD – held MSGW . All copies will print before next spool file is printed. QSYSPRT is a listing created by pressing the [PRINT] key. User ID of the person signed on to terminal that created this spool file.requires a message to be answered before job can continue OPN . Possible values are: WTR . For example. or the program that created this spool file (e. Identifies the number of copies on the spool file to print. Defines status of spool file. Be careful with this option.

Returns the user to the previous screen. Use this key to see the third area. there are three screens. Gives a second screen of more available Function keys. Think of the screen as a trifold: F11 = View 2 F12 = Cancel F22 = Printers F24 = More Keys Due to the excess information in spool files. Use this key to see the second area.Print Jobs Function Keys: F3 = Exit F10 = View 3 Exits the user to the original screen. Due to the excess information in spool files. there are two screens. The F5 key will update the current screen's data. The most commonly used of those keys is F5 = Refresh. Think of the screen as a bifold. August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-5 . Displays the Work with all Printers (WRKWTR) screen.

To delete a single spool file. Never use option 4.Print Jobs Work with Output Queues At a command line. Using Command WRKOUTQ: Is OUTQ held? (HLD would display in the Status field) 9-6 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . Work with. PA PB P1 P2 F24=More keys Command ===> F3=Exit ! • The Status of the Output Queue for day-to-day operations should be RLS.. Delete on this screen – this will delete the Output Queue. Work with All Output Queues Type options. type WRKOUTQ and press Enter. Delete.. press Enter. type 5. The Work with All Output Queues screen displays. then type 4. to delete the spool file. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 9=Work with 14=Clear Opt Queue QPRINT QPRINTS QPRINT2 QTIOUTQ PA PAS_4214_1 PB PT PZ P1 P10 P2 F4=Prompt Library QGPL QGPL QGPL QTILIB QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS F5=Refresh 5=Work with 6=Release 8=Description Files 30 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 104 F12=Cancel Writer Status RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS More.

Status of queue. The F5 key will update the current screen's data. If blank. This option will delete the specified output queue. Displays screen of parameters to respond to for command just typed in or defined. or there may be no printer assigned to output queue (not all output queues have printers assigned). Possible values RLS = Release or HLD = Hold Immediately after a change. Does not allow any spool files to proceed to writer and printer by using this option. This option will display writers started to this output queue. Returns the user to the previous screen. print and takes them off “hold” status. Never use this option unless directed to by an EDS Customer Support Representative.Work with 6 = Release 8 = Description 9 = Work With 14 = Clear Columns: Opt Queue Library Files Writer Allows entry of above option number(s) to complete desired task. STATUS Function Keys: F3 = Exit F4 = Prompt F5 = Refresh F12 = Cancel F24 = More Keys Exits the user to the original screen. Displays the screen with updated information. Allows print jobs to exit. Allows user to change output queue description. Lists all output queues on system (there will be a queue for each printer) Defines the database library that contains the output queue Identifies the number of files in the queue waiting to be printed Identifies writer used to remove print files from output queue. Accesses list of spool files in this print/output queue. Clears all spool files from specified output queue. Gives a second screen of more available Function keys. *CHG displays. August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-7 . Will be same names as queue and printer. The most commonly used of those keys is F5 = Refresh.Print Jobs Work with Output Queues Screen Definitions Options: 2 = Change 3 = Hold 4 = Delete 5 . must start writer so that jobs will print. Displays description of specified output queue.

For example. to display all printers that start with the letter “P” only. 3. 6 ===> F3=Exit F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F17=Top or command F18=Bottom F24=More keys Bottom ! You can display all printers that start with specific characters. type WRKWTR and press Enter. 2.Print Jobs Work with Writers (Twinax Attached Printers) For CAT5 attached printers see Work With Writers (TCP/IP Printers) section in this chapter. or chapter 5. Printers. 1=Start 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 7=Display messages 8=Work with output queue Opt Device C1 C2 C3 DM P1 P2 P3 P4 Sts STR STR STR END MSGW END END END Sep *FILE *FILE *FILE *FILE Form Type *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL File QSYSPRT PI002RP PRINTER 6=Release User MSECOFR LUKE LISA User Data APCHECK GL105 Parameters for options 1. press Enter. The Work with All Printers screen displays: Work with All Printers Type options. type WRKWTR P* and press Enter. 9-8 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . 4. At a command line.

Displays any system messages related to the operation of this writer. This option should be used when there is a message status. (HLDWTR) Spool file will stop printing as soon as the printer buffer clears. (This option should NOT be used. To resume. Changes the physical attributes of the writer. Start (STRPRTWTR) at the Opt field. At the How to End field. Type 4 in Opt field and press F4. Releases writer which allows printing to resume from the first page.) Access the list of spool files in this printer/output queue. (WRKOUTQ) 4 = End (ENDWTR) 5 = Work with 6 = Release (RLSWTR) 7 = Display messages (DSPMSG) 8 = Work with output queue August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-9 . start the writer by typing 1.Print Jobs Work with All Printers Screen Definitions (Twinax Attached Printer) Options (Twinax Attached Printer): 1 = Start (STRPRTWTR) 2 = Change (CHGWTR) 3 = Hold (HLDWTR) Resumes or starts up writer. This (ENDWTR) terminates functioning of writer. This causes the writer to attach to the output queue and deliver listings to the printer.) Does not allow writer to escort listings from queue to printer. (Work with Printer Writer screen) Displays the printer information only if the printer is started. stops in midstream. type *IMMED and press Enter. (MSGW would display in Sts field.

) *RLS – Released The writer was released using option 6. This option should NOT be used. which is used for all print jobs from subsystem PRINTSBS. (This status will only display *CHG. Change. Subsystem QSPL needs to be started (STRSBS QSPL).Print Jobs Columns (Twinax Attached Printer): Opt Device Sts Allows entry of Option number(s) to complete desired task. Sep Form Type File User User Data 9-10 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . User-specified data information regarding file currently printing. A message will be issued for each form change. *CHG – Changed The writer was changed using option 2. usually DLDATAQ. (This status will only display as *RLS. will be the same as output queue and printer associated with each writer.) Defines the number of pages to print before a spool file to separate it from other spool files. Release. Defines data file name of spool file currently in writer.Message Waiting . each spooled file specifies its own number of separator pages. If *FILE displays. Possible values are: STR or *STR -Started END or *END – Ended Use option 1 to start HLD or *HLD – Held Use option 6 to release MSGW . or if it was created by a job it will have the name that the job creates.Use option 7 to see message(s) JOBQ – Job Queue – The writer is currently on the job queue. List of writers defined on system. Identifies the type of form that should be loaded on the printer. Status of writer. User ID of person who created the spool file.

For the Work with All Printers screen.Print Jobs Function Keys (Twinax Attached Printer): F3 = Exit F11 = View 2 Ends the current task and returns to the display from which the task was started. queue. and library the device is attached to. Returns the user to the previous screen. Returns screen to top of list of writers (if more than one screen) Moves screen to bottom of list of writers (if more than one screen) Gives a second screen of more available Function keys. Think of the screen as a bifold. View 1 displays writer. Use this key to see the View 1 displays. The F5 key will update the current screen's data. The most commonly used of those keys is F5 = Refresh. F12 = Cancel F17 = Top F18 = Bottom F24 = More Keys August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-11 .

2. 2. At a command line. type 7. next to the Device ID (printer ID) with a MSGW Status. 1. press Enter. To display ALL messages in the QSYSOPR message queue: • Or • Press Shift + SysReq. and press Enter. There are several ways to display messages for printers. type WRKWTR and press Enter. Display messages. 3. 1=Start 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 7=Display messages 8=Work with output queue Opt Device C1 C2 C3 DM P1 P2 P3 P4 Sts STR STR STR END END END END or command F18=Bottom F24=More keys Bottom Sep *FILE *FILE *FILE *FILE Form Type *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL File QSYSPRT PI002RP PRINTER 6=Release User MSECOFR LUKE LISA User Data APCHECK 7 MSGW GL105 Parameters for options 1. 6 ===> F3=Exit F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F17=Top b. The Work with All Printers screen displays. 9-12 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . At the Opt field. Work with All Printers Type options. 4. To display only the messages for a specific device (printer ID): a. then type 6 At a command line. type DSPMSG QSYSOPR and press Enter. Only messages for that device display.Print Jobs Printer Messages (Twinax Attached Printers) Printer messages are stored/located in the QSYSOPR message queue.

Print Jobs Some of the common messages that could display when investigating a MSGW status on the WRKWTR screen are: Load form type 'HDCK' device P1 writer P1 (HCGIR) Reply ________________________________ H C G I R are listed as possible responses.print first line on next form and allow alignment verification R . August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-13 .ignore request to change form type R .print first line on current form and allow alignment verification Normally. print first line and continue N . you would type I to continue printing on the aligned forms.cancel processing G .hold the file C . they are defined as: H . type G to begin printing the current file and press Enter.skip to next form. they are defined as: I .continue printing on aligned forms C . Verify alignment on device P1 (ICGNR) Reply ________________________________ I C G N R are listed as possible responses.search queue for same form currently being used and re-try In most cases you will change your form in the identified printer.begins printing the current file I .cancel processing G .

. : Verify alignment on printer TZ.. . More. . . . -. . The first line for the file is 5. . . . . . . . N -. Reply . . type an I. . . .To continue printing aligned forms skipping to the next form and printing the first line again. . . then press Enter. . Recovery . . . .Type H to hold the file and print the next file on the output queue. . . . : Message type . . . : Load form type 'HDCK' device P1 writer p1. (I G N R E C) Cause . : I -. . . . -. . : 99 16:52:08 Message . type a G.Print Jobs Examples of printer messages as they would display on the system: Message ID . . . . . . . More. : Date sent . . : Do one of the following: -.. . . : Additional Message Information CPA4002 Severity . . . . . . . : The forms may not be aligned correctly. .. .. . . . . . . . . Bottom F3=Exit F6=Print F11=Display message details F21=Select assistance level F12=Cancel 9-14 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . . . . . . . : The file on output queue P1 in library QUSRSYS requires form type 'HDCK' to be loaded on device P1. Type reply below. . . : dditional Message Information CPA3394 Severity .To print the first line again on the next form and to verify the alignment. . Recovery .Type I to ignore the request to change the form type and print the file on the currently loaded form type. : Date sent . . . . : Inquiry 04/18/00 Time sent .. or press Reset. . . Press Stop only if Start and Stop are two keys. . -. . . Possible choices for replying to message . : Inquiry 04/18/00 Time sent . . : A 99 16:51:13 Message . . . . .Type C to cancel the writer. . : Do one of the following and try the request again. 1. (H C G I R) Cause . . . : Message type . G -. G_________________________________________ Bottom F12=Cancel F3=Exit F6=Print F9=Display message details F21=Select assistance level Message ID . . . The form type for the file was all blanks when '' appears as the form type.Type G after the form type is loaded to begin printing the current file. Reply I Press Enter to continue.To continue printing aligned forms starting with the next line of the file. .

press Enter. Work with All Writers Type options. To resume. 4. This option should be used when MSGW displays in Status field. This terminates functioning of writer.. (WRKOUTQ) 4 = End (ENDWTR) 5 = Work with 6 = Release (RLSWTR) 7 = Display Messages 8 = Work with output queue August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-15 . Device RMT RMT RMT RMT PRT FV RMT RMT RMT RMT RMT RMT Parameters for options 2. Displays any system messages related to the operation of (DSPMSG) this writer. Releases writer which allows printing to resume from the first page. (HLDWTR) Spool file will stop printing as soon as the printer buffer clears. At the How to End field type *IMMED and press Enter. (Work with Remote Writer screen) Displays the printer information only if the printer is started. Access the list of spool files in this printer/output queue.) Does not allow writer to escort listings from queue to printer. Type 4 at the Opt field and press F4. 6 or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F22=Start printer writer F24=More keys Work with All Writers Screen Definitions (TCP/IP Printers) Options (TCP/IP Printers): 2 = Change (CHGWTR) 3 = Hold (HLDWTR) Changes the physical attributes of the writer.Print Jobs Work With Writers (TCP/IP Printers) At a command line. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with output queue Opt Writer BA BB BC FT FV JA JB JC JD JE JF Type 5=Work with Queue BA BB BC FT FV JA JB JC JD JE JF 6=Release Library QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS 7=Display messages Status STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR Form Type *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL More. 3. start the writer by typing STRRMTWTR xx [xx=printer ID] and press Enter.. (This option should NOT be used. The Work with All Writers screen displays. type WRKWTR *ALL and press Enter. stops in midstream.

Provides assistance when typing additional parameter values for an option or when using a command.Use option 6 to release *CHG . The name of the library where the output queue is located. A message will be issued for each form change. Possible values are: STR or *STR Started END or *END – Ended . This Status will only display *CHG. List of writers defined on the system (this will be the same as output queue and printer associated with each writer). type STRSBS QSPL. Status of writer.Changed The writer was changed using option 2. JOBQ -Job Queue The writer is currently on the job queue. The name of the outpout queue where the field is located. Return to the previous screen. PRT or RMT are the types for ARG systems.Print Jobs Columns (TCP/IP Printers): Opt Writer Type Allows entry of option number(s) to complete desired task. *RLS . this updates the current screen's data. HLD or *HLD Held . This option should NOT be used. PRT = printer writer twinax attached printer. Subsystem QSPL needs to be started.Use command STRRMTWTR to start the printer. Identifies the type of form to load on the printer. 9-16 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . Prompts for the Start Printer Writer command (STRPRTWTR) Displays a second screen of more available Function keys. Change. RMT= remote printer writer TCP/IP The name of the device where the output is produced. This Status will only display *RLS. Device Queue Library Status Form Type Function Keys (TCP/IP Printers): F3 = Exit F4 = Prompt F12 = Cancel F22= Start printer writer F24 = More keys Ends the current task and returns to the display from which the task was started. The type of writer this printer is. The most commonly used of those keys is F5 = Refresh. The device ID will be displayed for twinax attached printers – type will be PRT.Released The writer was released using option 6. Release.

next to the Device ID (printer ID) with a MSGW Status.. At the Opt field. Work with All Writers Type options. August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-17 . Display messages. 1. 4. 3. then type 6 At a command line.. press Enter.Print Jobs Printer Messages (TCP/IP Printers) Printer messages are stored/located in the QSYSOPR message queue. 6 or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F22=Start printer writer F24=More keys b. The Work with All Writers screen displays. Only the messages for that specific device display. type DSPMSG QSYSOPR and press Enter. There are several ways to display messages for printers. type 7. To display ALL messages in the QSYSOPR message queue: • Or • Press Shift + SysReq. type WRKWTR *ALL and press Enter. At a command line. 2. To display only the messages for a specific device (printer ID): a. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with output queue Opt Writer BA BB BC FT FV JA JB JC JD JE JF Type 5=Work with Queue BA BB BC FT FV JA JB JC JD JE JF 6=Release Library QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS 7=Display messages Status STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR Form Type *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL More. Device RMT RMT RMT RMT PRT FV RMT RMT RMT RMT RMT RMT Parameters for options 2. and press Enter.

hold the file C .print first line on next form and allow alignment verification R .search queue for same form currently being used and re-try In most cases you will change your form in the identified printer.continue printing on aligned forms C .Print Jobs Some of the common messages you may see when investigating a MSGW status on the WRKWTR *ALL screen are: Load form type 'HDCK' device P1 writer P1 (HCGIR) Reply ________________________________ H C G I R are listed as possible responses. they are defined as: H . they are defined as: I .print first line on current form and allow alignment verification Normally. you would type I to continue printing on the aligned forms.cancel processing G . Verify alignment on device P1 (ICGNR) Reply ________________________________ I C G N R are listed as possible responses.ignore request to change form type R . type G to begin printing the current file and press Enter. 9-18 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 .skip to next form.begins printing the current file I .cancel processing G . print first line and continue N .

. . More. . type a G. . . . : dditional Message Information CPA3394 Severity . .. G -. Type reply below. . . . . . . -. : Message type . . : Verify alignment on printer TZ.Type H to hold the file and print the next file on the output queue. . : Inquiry 04/18/00 Time sent . The first line for the file is 5. . .Type G after the form type is loaded to begin printing the current file. . . . Recovery . : The file on output queue P1 in library QUSRSYS requires form type 'HDCK' to be loaded on device P1. : Do one of the following and try the request again.To print the first line again on the next form and to verify the alignment. Reply I Press Enter to continue. .To continue printing aligned forms skipping to the next form and printing the first line again. N -.. (H C G I R) Cause . : The forms may not be aligned correctly. . . . . then press Enter. . . . ... 1. . . : Additional Message Information CPA4002 Severity . Bottom F3=Exit F6=Print F11=Display message details F21=Select assistance level F12=Cancel August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-19 . . . . More. -. Reply . G_________________________________________ Bottom F12=Cancel F3=Exit F6=Print F9=Display message details F21=Select assistance level Message ID . . . : Inquiry 04/18/00 Time sent . Press Stop only if Start and Stop are two keys. . .Type C to cancel the writer. . . . . : I -.Type I to ignore the request to change the form type and print the file on the currently loaded form type. . . . : Date sent . . . . . . . . .To continue printing aligned forms starting with the next line of the file. . Recovery . . . . : A 99 16:51:13 Message . . type an I. . (I G N R E C) Cause . . . : Load form type 'HDCK' device P1 writer p1. . . . . . . : 99 16:52:08 Message . . : Message type . . . . . . . . : Do one of the following: -. : Date sent . . . . . . or press Reset. .. The form type for the file was all blanks when '' appears as the form type.Print Jobs Examples of printer messages as they would display on the system: Message ID . . . Possible choices for replying to message . -. . .

0 .0 . the CPU % (percentage of central processing unit being used) in the upper left corner will display 0. Refresh. they show as indentations under the Subsystem/Job name. Press the Shift + Page Down keys to display additional subsystems [Page Down key on the PC keyboard].0 7=Display message Function PGM-CRPOLLCL PGM-XPMN3BCL PGM-XPMN3BCL PGM-XPMN3BCL Status DEQW ICFW DEQW DEQW DEQW DEQW DEQW DEQW More. displays. If you keep pressing F5. • 9-20 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 ..Subsystems Subsystems Work Active Job To display all the subsystems and jobs running on the AS/400: At a command line type WRKACTJOB and press Enter. during the last few minutes. use WRKSBSJOB to get to the subsystem that you want to work with.0 .0 .. To release resources used after using WRKACTOB command. Use caution when you’re troubleshooting a dealer whose CPU % is extremely high (over 80%). 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with spooled files Opt Subsystem/Job ___ DLCOMMSBS ___ POLLRAPID ___ EZFORMS ___ XPOINTMB ___ XPOINTMP ___ XPOINTMS ___ PRINTSBS ___ QBATCH ___ QCMN User QSYS QPGMR QSYS MSECOFR MSECOFR MSECOFR QSYS QSYS QSYS 5=Work with 6=Release 13=Disconnect . Work with Active Jobs CPU %: . the user must sign off the device. Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F5=Refresh F10=Restart statistics F11=Display elapsed data • • • • • • When you first enter this screen. the average percentage. Place your cursor in the CPU % column and press F16 to display which job is using the most CPU. To display an accurate current percentage.0 . press F5. press Enter. to show the percentage. If at all possible. press F10. If jobs are currently running in a subsystem.0 .0 . Just by being in WRKACTJOB you are contributing to the problem. Type SBS BCH SBS BCH BCH BCH SBS SBS SBS CPU % ..0 Elapsed time: 00:00:00 S101213G 04/19/00 11:19:41 Active jobs: 112 Type options.0 ..

3. press Enter. . . Work with Subsystem Jobs 04/15/00 Subsystem . . QCTL User whose jobs to display . . To work with Subsystem QCTL. . . At a command line: • Type WRKSBSJOB and press F4 Type WRKSBSJOB QCTL and press Enter. . . . *ALL *. *ALL. *PRINT Or • with Subsystem Jobs (WRKSBSJOB) F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display 2. Subsystem . . *ALL Output . . . . . . . . . * Name. . . : QCTL Type options. Work Type choices. . . shown in step 3. . 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 6=Release 7=Display message 8=Work with spooled files 13=Disconnect Opt Job User Type -----Status----Function DLBACKUP SUZY BATCH ACTIVE DLY-23:30:00 QPFRCOL QPGMR AUTO ACTIVE PGM-QPMLWAIT QPFRMON QPGMR BATCH ACTIVE QSYSSCD QPGMR BATCH ACTIVE PGM-QEZSCNEP W1 SUZY INTER ACTIVE CMD-WRKSBSJOB Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display schedule data F12=Cancel 81024601 17:56:06 August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-21 . . . . . . . The Work with Subsystem Jobs screen displays. . . . type QCTL and press Enter. *OUTQ Name. . . . . . . . . press Enter. The Work with Subsystem Jobs screen. displays. *JOBQ.Subsystems Work with System Console Subsystem To display all jobs currently processing or waiting to process in the system console subsystem (QCTL): 1. .

The job name of the job processing. Defines type of job running. 5 = Work with 6 = Release 7 = Display message 8 = Work with spooled files 13 = Disconnect Columns: Opt Job User Type Column to type any option number that was previously defined. It may be a workstation ID.g. USERID or QPGMR). but save your place to return to in a short period of time. To sign off. Used to resume processing of held jobs.Subsystems Work with Subsystem Jobs Screen Definitions Options: 2 = Change 3 = Hold 4 = End Allows changes to specific job parameters to be made.interactive job Batch . Accessed an additional screen that allows you to acquire specific information on a job.currently processing Held . Displays any system messages related to this job. Possible values include: Inter . Identifies and displays any print jobs associated with this job. These changes may be limited based on the job. User profile under which job is started (e. Use when the status is MSGW.stopped processing Identifies command (cmd) or program (pgm) currently running to process this job. This option should not be used unless directed to do so by an EDS Customer Support Representative. Stops processing of job but keeps information already defined. Status Function 9-22 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . Terminates processing of job and loses all information created. Possible values are: Active .batch job Status of job.

Returns to the previous screen. Displays the last command executed from command line. which allows it to be run again without re-typing.Subsystems Function Keys: F3 = Exit F4 = Prompt F5 = Refresh F9 = Retrieve F11 = Display Schedule Data F12 = Cancel Ends the current task and returns to the display from which the task was started. Displays the date and time a job is scheduled to run. Updates information on screen. August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-23 . Displays additional answers (if available) if pressed when cursor is in field.

. The Work with Subsystem Job. Work with. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with spooled files Opt Job A2 A4 A5 User Greg Pauline Greg QINTER 5=Work with 13=Disconnect Type INTER INTER INTER INTER INTER INTER INTER 6=Release 7=Display message Function PGM-PS1001CL GRP-SV00 GRP-SV00 PGM-SA0007CL GRP-Sl00 Bottom F9=Retrieve F11=Display schedule data 81024601 17:56:06 A6 Carol A8 Dale Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel -----Status----ACTIVE GROUP ACTIVE GROUP ACTIVE ACTIVE GROUP This screen is commonly used to determine if a job can be terminated to obtain a dedicated system. : Type options. *PRINT with Subsystem Jobs (WRKSBSJOB) Or • F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display 2. . . . and press Enter. . *ALL *. . Work with Subsystem Jobs 04/15/00 Subsystem . type 5. . At the Opt field for the selected job. . *JOBQ. displays. . . . . press Enter. . 3. QINTER User whose jobs to display . . The Work with Subsystems Jobs screen displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To work with the Subsystem QINTER. .Subsystems Work with Interactive Subsystem 1. . press Enter. 9-24 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . . * Name. Work Type choices. *OUTQ Name. At a command line: • Type WRKSBSJOB and press F4 Type WRKSBSJOB QINTER and press Enter. Subsystem . *ALL. . . type QINTER and press Enter. . shown in step 3. . *ALL Output .

Subsystems Work with Subsystem Jobs (WRKSBSJOB) Screen Definitions Subsystem Defines names of subsystem to be viewed.all user ID's Defines how information requested should be presented.specific user ID (for example. Displays the previous screen. Possible entries: Name . Shows help for prompt and associated display areas. QCTL) *ALL *JOBQ *OUTQ Allows you to define one user ID to show jobs for or use system default and see all user's jobs: Name .display on screen *PRINT . August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-25 . Displays additional defined function keys. Possible entries: * .create and print a spool file User Whose Jobs to Display Output Function Keys: F3 = Exit F4 = Prompt F5 = Refresh F12 = Cancel F13 = How to use this Display F24 = More Keys Ends the current task and returns to the display from which the task was started. (if available).specific subsystem (for example. Updates information on screen. MSECOFR) *ALL . Place the cursor at the field and press F4 to display a list of valid field entries from which to choose.

Subsystems Work with Subsystem Jobs Screen Definitions Options: 2 = Change 3 = Hold 4 = End Changes specific job parameters. The job name of the job processing (it could also be a workstation ID).batch job Status Status of job: Active . Sign off. Stops the job from processing. 9-26 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . This option should not be used unless directed by an EDS Customer Support Representative.interactive job Batch . Displays any system messages related to this job.stopped processing Identifies the command (cmd) or program (pgm) currently running to process this job. all job information is retained. The type of job running: Inter . Displays an additional screen that allows you to access specific information about a job. Identifies and displays any print jobs associated with this job. based on the job. USERID or QPGMR). 5 = Work with 6 = Release 7 = Display message 8 = Work with spooled files 13 = Disconnect Columns: Opt Job User Type Function Column to type any option number listed on the screen. but save your place to return to in a short period of time.currently processing Held . These changes could be limited. User profile (ID) that was signed on and started the job (for example. use when the Status is MSGW. Terminates processing of job and loses all information created. Resume processing of held jobs.

(if available). Displays the date and time a job is scheduled to run. Updates information on screen.Subsystems Function Keys: F3 = Exit F4 = Prompt F5 = Refresh F9 = Retrieve F11 = Display schedule data F12 = Cancel Ends the current task and returns to the display from which the task was started. Displays the last command executed from command line. Returns to the previous screen. which allows it to be run again without re-typing. August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-27 . Place the cursor at the field and press F4 to display a list of valid field entries from which to choose.

Display open files Work with Job System: Job: W1 User: SO3 Number: 039743 Select one of the following: 1. if active S1020872 14.Subsystems End a User's Job Two options from the Work with Job menu can be used to end a user’s job: • Option 14 . if active or on job queue Display call stack. if active Display library list. 16. Display open files. 3. You must wait for the job to finish. if so DO NOT end the job. 13. if active Display file overrides. . Ending a job with files other than DSP can cause the data files to be outof-sync. 4. if active Work with spooled files Display job log. 2. Display job status attributes Display job definition attributes Display job run attributes. Press Shift + PageDown to display the second screen of menu options [Press PageDown from a PC keyboard]. if active More . 10. . 12. if active Work with locks. F12=Cancel Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve Select option 14 to verify if any file type. 11. if active Display commitment control status. other than DSP is shown. 15. 9-28 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 .

. The user's job is ended.Subsystems • Option 41 .End job Work with Job Job: W1 User: SO3 System: S1020872 Number: 039743 Select one of the following: 17. W1________ S03_______ 205430 Name Name 000000-999999 *CNTRLD. press Enter. . . .*IMMED Delay time. 40. *SAME. . 30 *NO Maximum log entries Additional interactive jobs . . Number . . . *IMMED Seconds *NO. *GRPJOB. . .Ø . . . *ALL How to end . August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-29 . . 30. *NONE F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F13=How to use this display F10=Additional parameters F24=More keys Bottom F12=Cancel Change parameter at the How to end field to *IMMED (immediately) so the job will end before the user starts anything more. . . Job name . . . . . . if *CNTRLD . A message is sent that the job was ended and who ended the job. . . . . . . . Change the Maximum log entries field to Ø. . . . . Display communications status. . End Job (ENDJOB) Type choices. end the job by choosing option 41. . 43. . . . *NOMAX *NONE. . End job Hold job Release job Bottom F12=Cancel Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve After verifying file type is DSP. . . . 42. . . . Delete spooled files . *YES Number. . . . . if active All of the above Change job 41. User . . .

press Enter. *ALL Output . . Work Type choices. . . . At a command line: • Type WRKSBSJOB and press F4 Or • Type WRKSBSJOB QBATCH and press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 6=Release 7=Display message 8=Work with spooled files 13=Disconnect Opt Job PA0106CL User S01 Type BATCH -----Status----ACTIVE 81024601 17:56:06 Function PGM-PA1060CL Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F9=Retrieve F11=Display Schedule Data Bottom 9-30 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . . : QBATCH Type options. . . . . To work with the Subsystem QBATCH. . . press Enter. . . shown in step 3. . *ALL *. displays.Subsystems Work with Batch Subsystem 1. 3. *JOBQ. . . . . . . The Work with Subsystem Jobs screen. . 04/15/00 Subsystem . . . *OUTQ Name. QBATCH User whose jobs to display . Work with Subsystem Jobs and press Enter. . . * Name. *PRINT with Subsystem Jobs (WRKSBSJOB) F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display 2. . . . . type QBATCH The Work with Subsystems Jobs screen displays. . . . . . Subsystem . . *ALL. . . .

August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-31 .specific subsystem. MSECOFR) *ALL . Updates information on screen.Subsystems Work with Subsystem Jobs (WRKSBSJOB) Screen Definitions Subsystem Defines names of subsystem to be viewed. (for example QBATCH) *ALL *JOBQ *OUTQ Allows you to define one user ID to show jobs for or use system default and see all user's jobs: Name .all user ID's Defines how information requested should be presented. Shows help for prompt and associated display areas. Returns to the previous screen. Possible entries: * .create a spool file and print it User Whose Jobs to Display Output Function Keys: F3 = Exit F4 = Prompt F5 = Refresh F12 = Cancel F13 = How to use this display F24 = More Keys Ends the current task and returns to the display from which the task was started. Place the cursor at the field and press F4 to display a list of valid field entries from which to choose. (if available). (for example. Shows additional defined function keys.display on screen *PRINT . Possible entries: Name .specific user ID.

9-32 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . Resume processing of held jobs. These changes could be limited. but save your place to return to in a short period of time. Sign off. User profile (ID) that was signed on and started the job (for example. Identifies and displays any print jobs associated with this job. Displays any system messages related to this job.interactive job Batch . 5 = Work with 6 = Release 7 = Display message 8 = Work with spooled files 13 = Disconnect Columns: Opt Job User Type Function Column to type any option number listed on the screen. This option should not be used unless directed by an EDS Customer Support Representative. based on the job.stopped processing Identifies the command (cmd) or program (pgm) currently running to process this job. all job information is retained.currently processing Held . use when the Status is MSGW. Terminates processing of job and loses all information created.batch job Status Status of job: Active .Subsystems Work with Subsystem Jobs Screen Definitions Options: 2 = Change 3 = Hold 4 = End Changes specific job parameters. The type of job running: Inter . USERID or QPGMR). Stops the job from processing. Displays an additional screen that allows you to access specific information about a job. The job name of the job processing (it could also be a workstation ID).

(if available). Place the cursor at the field and press F4 to display a list of valid field entries from which to choose.Subsystems Function Keys: F3 = Exit F4 = Prompt F5 = Refresh F9 = Retrieve F11 = Display schedule data F12 = Cancel Ends the current task and returns to the display from which the task was started. which allows it to be run again without re-typing. Updates information on screen. Returns to the previous screen. Displays the date and time a job is scheduled to run. Displays the last command executed from command line. August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-33 .

type WRKSBMJOB and press Enter. . press Enter. At a command line.BATCH JOBS BATCH JOBS Work with Batch Jobs This is an alternative (to the previous command) to display jobs in the batch subsystem. . Identifies and displays any print jobs associated with this job. Displays an additional screen that allows you to access specific information about a job. . . 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 8=Work with spooled files Opt Job PA0106CL PA0106CL PA1380CL PA1400CL QSYSSCD QTGTELNETS QTFTP04559 QTLPD06818 User MSECOFR MSECOFR MSECOFR MSECOFR QPGMR QTCP QTCP QTCP Type BATCH BATCH BATCH BATCH BATCH BATCH BATCH BATCH S1024762 -----Status----OUTQ OUTQ OUTQ OUTQ OUTQ OUTQ OUTQ OUTQ Parameters or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel Bottom F9=Retrieve F11=Display schedule data Work with Submitted Jobs Screen Definitions Options: 2 = Change 3 = Hold 4 = End Changes specific job parameters. Stops the job from processing. all job information is retained. Work with Submitted Jobs System: Submitted from . Displays any system messages related to this job. use when the Status is MSGW. . 5 = Work with 6 = Release 7 = Display message 8 = Work with spooled files 9-34 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . . Resume processing of held jobs. This option should not be used unless directed by an EDS Customer Support Representative. based on the job. . Terminates processing of job and loses all information created. These changes could be limited. : *USER 6=Release 7=Display message Function Type options.

stopped processing Identifies the command (cmd) or program (pgm) currently running to process this job. The type of job running: Inter .interactive job Batch . Returns to the previous screen. Updates information on screen. August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-35 . which allows it to be run again without re-typing. Function Function Keys: F3 = Exit F4 = Prompt F5 = Refresh F9 = Retrieve F11 = Display schedule data F12 = Cancel Ends the current task and returns to the display from which the task was started.batch job Status Status of job: Active . User profile (ID) that was signed on and started the job (for example. Displays the date and time a job is scheduled to run. The job name of the job processing (it could also be a workstation ID). Place the cursor at the field and press F4 to display a list of valid field entries from which to choose.BATCH JOBS Columns: Opt Job User Type Column to type any option number listed on the screen.currently processing Held . Displays the last command executed from command line. (if available). USERID or QPGMR).

type WRKJOBQ and press Enter. View job schedule entries for a selected job queue. . . Delete the job queue. Clear all jobs from the specified job queues. Resume processing of held jobs. press Enter. Command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F24=More keys Work with All Job Queues Screen Definition Options: 3 = Hold 4 = Delete 5 = Work with 6 = Release 8 = Work with job schedule entries 14 = Clear Places the job queue on hold.BATCH JOBS Work with Job Queues To display all job queues defined on your system and their status: At a command line. 9-36 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . Access additional screen to display all jobs in selected queue. 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Work with 8=Work with job schedule entries 6=Release 14=Clear Opt Queue PCSJOBQ PSJOBQ QBASE QBATCH QCMN QFNC QINTER QPGMR QSNADS QSPL QS36EVOKE QS36MRT Library CSLIBR PSLIBR QGPL QGPL QGPL QGPL QGPL QSYS QGPL QGPL QGPL QGPL Jobs 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Subsystem DLCOMMSBS PRINTSBS QBATCH QINTER QPGMR OSNADS QSPL QBATCH QINTER Status RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS RLS More . Work with All Job Queues Type options.

Area defined to process job. Returns to the previous screen. Updates information on screen. Current standing of queue: RLS . If blank. Defines the database library that contains the output queue Number of jobs in holding area waiting for processing. All job holding areas in your computer.BATCH JOBS Columns: Opt Queue Library Jobs Subsystem Status Allows entry of above option number(s) to complete desired task. (if available). Place the cursor at the field and press F4 to display a list of valid field entries from which to choose. able to process HLD .held.released. August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-37 . Displays additional Function keys. no jobs in this queue will be processed. the queue is held Function Keys: F3 = Exit F4 = Prompt F5 = Refresh F12 = Cancel F24 = More Keys Ends the current task and returns to the display from which the task was started.

C. F. B. E. D. C.MONITORING SYSTEM ACTIVITY . WRKSPLF *ALL and press Enter. B. system? Which of the following commands will display only the spool files within the output queue for printer P1? _____ _____ _____ _____ A. WRKSPLF *ALL WRKOUTQ P1 WRKOUTQ WRKWTR P1 3.EXERCISE Part One . B.EXERCISE MONITORING SYSTEM ACTIVITY . Print device Number of copies Form type Priority Output queue All of the above 9-38 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . WRKSPLF and press F4. WRKWTR and press Enter. D. A. C. B. Identify the following items which can be changed regarding a spool file: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ A. Which of the following commands will display all the spool files on your _____ _____ _____ _____ 2. Which of the following commands will display all of the writers? _____ _____ _____ _____ A.Print jobs 1. WRKSPLF WRKOUTQ WRKWTR WRKWTR *ALL 4. D. WRKOUTQ and press F4. C. D.

D. True False If true. C. For day-to-day operations. backup or power down. If the top of the form is set properly for P1.EXERCISE 5. Work with Job Queues Work with Output Queues Work with Spool Files Work with Interactive Subsystem Work with Batch Subsystem Work with Writers ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ 7. what is the most appropriate response to the printer message: "VERIFY ALIGNMENT ON DEVICE P1 (ICGNR)" _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ I C G N R August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-39 . What is the command to execute the following? A. _____ C. what should you do? 6. _____ B. B. what should be the status of any of the writers? _____ A. HLD RLS 8. _____ B. You should check the writers to see if they are actively printing before doing an IPL. STR END MSGW 9. F. E. what should be the status of any output queue? _____ A. For day-to-day operations.MONITORING SYSTEM ACTIVITY .

D. ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ 9-40 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . (NOTE: Not all are to be used) _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ A.MONITORING SYSTEM ACTIVITY . If the following message displays: "LOAD FORM TYPE 'HDCK' DEVICE P1 WRITER P1 (HCGIR)" Place the following items in order of execution. F. view message in qsysopr hit printer answer G to print 1 line yell at printer load forms press Enter 11.EXERCISE 10. List the steps to display a spool file on printer P5. E. What is the command to view spool files on the AS/400 for User Betty? _______________________________________ 12. B. C. ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ 13. List the steps to hold a spool file that is to be printed on P2. ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ 14. List the steps to delete a spool file that is on printer P4 and the Sts is HLD.

____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ 16. How do you know if a writer is attached to the output queue? ____________________ ____________________ 17.EXERCISE 15.MONITORING SYSTEM ACTIVITY . List the steps to change a spool file on printer P3. What is the command to display all writers that start with C? ____________________ ____________________ August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-41 . How do you attach a writer to the output queue? ____________________ ____________________ 18.

_____ B. What subsystem does an interactive job process in? ____________________ 2. _____ True _____ False 5. WRKSBSJOB QINTER WRKSBSJOB QBATCH List the steps to end an interactive job. You can end any job no matter what type of files the job is using. ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ 4. Dealer complains that the system is running really slow.EXERCISE Part Two . 3.Subsystems 1. What command could you use to see if there is a job using a large percentage of the CPU? _______________________________ 9-42 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . Which command allows you to work with interactive jobs? _____ A.MONITORING SYSTEM ACTIVITY .

EXERCISE Part Three . what should be the status of all the job queues? _____ A _____ B. List the steps to display all the job queues. What command do you use to determine the status of a job queue? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 3. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 2. HLD RLS August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-43 .MONITORING SYSTEM ACTIVITY .Batch Jobs 1. For day-to-day operations.

4. D (WRKWTR *ALL) for TCP/IP printers. B.Print Jobs 1. You could also see all spool files using option A if you define *ALL as the user and then press Enter. c. WRKJOBQ WRKOUTQ WRKSPLF WRKSBSJOB QINTER WRKSBSJOB QBATCH WRKWTR B. 10. 9-44 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . only the information for that printer will show. f. A-1 B . B. 8. 7. I . d. A. WRKOUTQ would show all output queues but by adding the parameter P1.not used C-3 D . e. F. 5. C (WRKWTR) for twinax attached printers. b.not used E-2 F-4 2. 3.Exercise Part One . 6.The rest of the file will print without skipping and without repeating.EXERCISE Solutions to Monitoring System Activity . Wait until they have completed their printing or you will loose data. 9. a. True.MONITORING SYSTEM ACTIVITY .

Press Enter.. Press Enter. Press Enter. Type WRKWTR. 13. Type WRKOUTQ P4 Press Enter. Press Enter. Type 4 in front of file to delete. Type WRKOUTQ P5 Press Enter. Make changes. The name of the writer displays in the writer column of the Work with All Output Queue screen. Type 3 in front of file to be held. Type 5 in front of file to display. 12. 14. August 2000 Monitor System Activity 9-45 . Press Enter. writer will attach to output queue. Type WRKOUTQ P3 Press Enter. Press Enter. When started. 15. Press Enter again to confirm. 17. WRKSPLF Betty Type WRKOUTQ P2 Press Enter. Type 2 in front of spool file to change. Type WRKWTR C* 18. Press Enter.EXERCISE 11. Note: Status cannot be WTR for spool file if spool file is to be changed.MONITORING SYSTEM ACTIVITY . Type 1 in front of writer to start. 16.

Press Enter. Press Enter. 3. False. 5.EXERCISE Part Two . 3.Subsystems 1. Press Enter. Change maximum log entries to Ø. 2. Change how to end parameter to *IMMED.Batch Jobs 1. Press Enter. Type WRKJOBQ Press Enter. 2. Verify there are only DSP files.MONITORING SYSTEM ACTIVITY . 9-46 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . WRKJOBQ B. WRKACTJOB then F16 on the CPU% field 4. Part Three . Type 41 to end. Only end jobs with file type DSP. Type 14. Press Enter. Type 5 in front of job to end. Type WRKSBSJOB QINTER Press Enter. QINTER A.

................................................ 15 Change Password .......................... 16 Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments ............................................. 5 Commands to Manipulate IBM User Profiles ............................................................... 30 SOLUTIONS TO SECURITY ............................................................................. 2 Physical .................... 14 Change a user profile ...................... 22 Change a User Profile ............................................... 33 August 2000 Security 10-i ............... 4 IBM User Classes/Special Authority ........ 28 SECURITY – EXERCISE PART 1 ............... 3 IBM SECURITY................................................................................ 26 Delete a User Profile..... 19 IBM SECURITY SCREENS................................................................................................................................................................. 1 System Security.... 32 SECURITY – EXERCISE PART 2 ........................................................ 2 Software ................................................... 24 Change User Profile Screen Definitions........................................................................... 6 Create User Profile (CRTUSRPRF) Screen Definitions ......................................................................................... 6 Create/Copy/Change/Delete DEALERLINE XL User Profiles ..................................................................................... 5 Several Initial Menus and Libraries ................................................................ 20 Create a User Profile ........................................... 20 Create User Profile Screen Definitions ....10 Security Table of Contents OVERVIEW ......................... 4 Initial Profiles ......................................................................................................... 11 Set Initial Menu / Library After Sign On..........EXERCISE.................. 17 Workstation Printer Assignments.................................. 5 IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS ..........................................................

Table of Contents This page intentionally left blank. 10-ii System Administrator Tasks August 2000 .

IBM Security Screens August 2000 Security 10-1 .Software • IBM Security .Commands to Manipulate IBM User Profiles • DEALERLINE XL Security .Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments .Physical .Initial Profiles .IBM User Classes/Special Authority .Several Initial Menus and Libraries .OVERVIEW Security OVERVIEW • System Security .Enter/Update/Delete DEALERLINE XL Profiles .

If a user calls and requests you add some sort of security to his/her profile. the prior system save tapes(s) could be stored off-site. If you are not sure you’re speaking with an authorized person. All sensitive documents need to be secure. he/she will receive an error message. THIS IS CRITICAL. In general.System Security System Security Security controls who is allowed to see and use the information on the system. This is your clue that the person you’re speaking with is probably not an authorized person. You can very politely explain the system administrator must make changes to a user profile. you want to make sure you’re speaking with the system administrator. Copies of all keys to the CPU and monitors should be maintained in a locked area. The original key should remain in the keylock. 10-2 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . The current system save tape(s) could be stored on-site. Where are these located? Are they signed off when not in use? Again. System Save tapes should be stored in two different locations. these need to be secured so that not only hardware is safe but also the documents being printed. One of the DEALERLINE nightly backup tapes should be kept off-site also. you do not want just anyone to walk away with a check or statement. The storage of your backup tapes could mean the difference between being able to restore your data or not. At no time should you just go ahead and change someone’s security without being certain the person you’re speaking with is the System Administrator! Physical There are several types of physical security to consider when installing a computer system. or another user’s profile. Backup tapes should be stored off-site or in a fireproof safe on-site. These issues include: System Workstation Printer Forms Keys Backup Tape Storage The CPU should be located in a secured area where only authorized personnel may access it. the best thing to do would be to walk the individual through the procedure to make the change. If this individual doesn’t have authority to make changes to user profiles. security (physical or software) determines who has access to what.

August 2000 Security 10-3 . It can also limit access to each company and to DEALERLINE XL security profiles. It determines who can sign on to the AS/400 and what commands they can execute.System Security Software There are two types of software defined security: • • IBM security is defined in the operating system. DEALERLINE XL application defined security identifies what tasks in which areas of which applications a user may work.

cancel. Allows the user the ability to work with I/O system configuration (needed to apply EOD updates) 10-4 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . and free storage space for all programs and files. display. release. stop and start active subsystems (needed for daily backup with power down). *SPLCTL also allows the user to start and end writers (needed for daily backup). Security functions to add/delete/change user profiles (needed to apply EOD updates) Allows the user to save.IBM SECURITY IBM SECURITY IBM User Classes/Special Authority Default Authorities for User Classes USER CLASS *ALLOBJ *SECADM *SAVSYS *JOBCTL *SERVICE *SPLCTL *IOSYSCFG SECOFR SECADM PGMR SYSOPR USER X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X *ALLOBJ *SECADM *SAVSYS *JOBCTL *SERVICE *SPLCTL *IOSYSCFG - Allows the user access to all programs and files (needed for daily backup). Allows the use of on-line diagnostic tools to fix system problems. hold. start writers. Allows the user to perform all spool functions. restore. and clear all jobs. Allows the user to change.

IBM SECURITY Initial Profiles During the DEALERLINE load. the following initial profiles are set up: LIMIT CAPABILITIES LIBRARY/MENU *NO *NO *PARTIAL *YES *YES *YES *YES INITIAL NAME MSECOFR SAUSER BLUSER1 PRUSER1 SMUSER1 PRMNGR SLUSER1 DESCRIPTION Master Security System Operator BUSINESSLINE XL Manager PARTSLINE XL Default User SERVICELINE XL Default User PARTSLINE XL Manager SALESLINE XL User SALIBR/DMM000 SALIBR/DMM000 BLLIBR/GLM00 PRLIBR/PRM00 SVLIBR/SVMAIN PRLIBR/PRMU1 SLLIBR/SLMAIN Several Initial Menus and Libraries MENU LIBRARY DMM000 DMM001 APM00 ARM00 GLM00 PAM00 PRM00 PRLIBR SVMAIN SLMAIN DESCRIPTION SALIBR BLLIBR BLLIBR BLLIBR BLLIBR PALIBR SVLIBR SLLIBR DEALERLINE XL Main Menu BUSINESSLINE Main Menu Accounts Payable Menu Accounts Receivable Menu General Ledger Menu Payroll Menu PARTSLINE XL Main Menu SERVICELINE XL Main Menu SALESLINE XL Main Menu Commands to Manipulate IBM User Profiles CRTUSRPRF DSPUSRPRF DLTUSRPRF WRKUSRPRF CHGUSRPRF RSTUSRPRF CHGPWD Create user profile Display user profile Delete user profile Work with user profile Change user profile Restore user profile Change user password August 2000 Security 10-5 .

23. 7. 2.IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS Create/Copy/Change/Delete DEALERLINE XL User Profiles To create a DEALERLINE user profile from DEALERLINE: 1. SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Electronic Data Systems Copyright (C) 1994 All rights reserved. 2. Selection or command: ==> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 Main Menu 3. 10-6 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Main Menu DMM005 Select one of the following: 1. Security Restore Labels Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments Forms Formatting Print Work . 3. 9. 5. and press Enter. Backups Communications 3. 4. 8. Or Press F3 until the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu displays. 9. Type 3. The System Administration Main Menu displays. System Administration. type GO DMM000 and press Enter. Security. At a command line. 7.Station Printer Assignments Name and Address Menu DEALERLINE Main Menu Sign Off Reset Remote Dial Connection 23. BUSINESSLINE PARTSLINE SDS PARTS SERVICELINE REPORTLINE SALESLINE GM DEALER COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS RAPID DEALERLINE XL Version Sign Off 6. 11. 90. 8. Selection or command: ==> F3=EXIT F4=PROMPT F9=RETRIEVE F12=CANCEL F13=INFORMATION ASSISTANT F16=AS/400 MAIN MENU 2. DEALERLINE XL Main Menu DMM000 Select one of the following: 1. 5. and press Enter. 24. 6. 13. Type 6.

In this example. type the option number and press Enter. . type the user ID to add and press Enter. . BLUSER1 ________ DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE OF OF OF OF OF SOUTHFIELD SOUTHFIELD SOUTHFIELD SOUTHFIELD SOUTHFIELD 3 Copy To New User ID. next to the User ID to access. Default Company Number-Name . 5. type 3 to copy an existing user profile and press Enter. BUSINESSLINE Manager 01 PARTSLINE Default User 01 F12=Cancel PARTSLINE Manager 01 System Operator 01 SERVICELINE User 01 F3=Exit Roll Up/Down At the Copy To New User ID field. At the Opt field.IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS The Work with User Security screen displays. SA1025S1 J3 DEALERLINE APPLICATION SECURITY Work with User Security 3/8/93 9:50:45 Type Option Then Press Enter 1 = Add Opt 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 7=Dir Entry 8=User Profiles User ID BLUSER1 PRUSER1 PRMNGR SAUSER1 SMUSER1 User Name BUSINESSLINE Manager PARTSLINE Default User PARTSLINE Manager System Operator SERVICELINE User Default Company Number-Name 01 01 01 01 01 DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE OF OF OF OF OF SOUTHFIELD SOUTHFIELD SOUTHFIELD SOUTHFIELD SOUTHFIELD 3 F3=Exit Roll Up/Down 4. August 2000 Security 10-7 . The Copy To Prompt window displays: SA1025S1 J3 DEALERLINE APPLICATION SECURITY Work with User Security 3/8/93 9:50:45 Type Option Then Press Enter 1 = Add Opt 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete Copy To Prompt 5=Display 7=Dir Entry 8=User Profiles User ID BLUSER1 PRUSER1 PRMNGR SAUSER1 SMUSER1 User Name Selected User ID .

*LIBL. The DEALERLINE application security screen displays. Verify the Special authority (authorities) is correct for the profile you are creating. press Enter. and press F10. *LIBL. (See page 4 for Special Authority definitions. *SYSVAL *SYSVAL. If The IBM User ID is added. 10-8 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . press Field Exit. *CRTDFT SA0030CL NAME. *NONE *NO *NO. *INTERMED. *YES *ENABLED *ENABLED.. *YES SERVICE CASHIER F3=EXIT F4=PROMPT F5=REFRESH F13=HOW TO USE THIS DISPLAY F10=ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS F24=MORE KEYS F12=CANCEL • the user ID being added is to have the same security as the user ID that was copied. *NONE SALIBR NAME.. CReate User Profile Type choices. • If the user ID being added has to have the security changed or verified. This will NOT erase the original value at the Special authority field.*GRPPRF MORE.. *PARTIAL. *CURLIB DMM000 NAME. *NOMAX *SYSVAL... Press Enter. *CURLIB *NO *NO.. *YES 1-366. *TYPEAHEAD KILOBYTES. DBLIBR NAME. *USRPRF. *SYSOPR. *S36 *SYSVAL. *CURLIB NAME.) If you need to add Special authorities. then Enter. type + (plus sign) at the field. *NOMAX 0-9 NAME NAME. *NO. change the USER PASSWORD and change the TEXT DESCRIPTION field for a new profile. type the USER PASSWORD and TEXT DESCRIPTION field for a new profile. *LIBL. *BASIC. *NONE..IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS 6. *NO. F13=How to use this display F5=Refresh F12=Cancel 7. *ALLOBJ *SYSVAL. *SIGNOFF *LIBL NAME. PRESS ENTER. After you’ve added all the Special authority (authorities) necessary. *SYSVAL. it will display on the next screen). *NO. or the Space bar. CREATE USER PROFILE (CRTUSRPRF) TYPE CHOICES. *SYSVAL. press the Shift and ArrowUp key.. USER PROFILE USER PASSWORD SET PASSWORD TO EXPIRED STATUS USER CLASS ASSISTANCE LEVEL CURRENT LIBRARY INITIAL PROGRAM TO CALL LIBRARY INITIAL MENU LIBRARY LIMIT CAPABILITIES TEXT 'DESCRIPTION' JOY NAME *USRPRF NAME. *NONE *USRPRF.*NONE. *DISABLED *USER *USER. Additional Parameters Special authority > + for more values Special environment > Display sign-on information > Password expiration interval > Limit device sessions > Keyboard buffering > Maximum allowed storage > Highest schedule priority > Job description > Library > Group profile > Owner > F3=ExitT F4=Prpomt F24=More keys (CRTUSRPRF) ALLOBJ *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *NOMAX ‘1’ DLJOBD SALIBR *NONE *USRPRF *USRCLS. *PGMR. *YES. The Create User Profile (CRTUSRPRF) screen displays.

other than the system printer. *WRKSTN.. *LIBL. press Enter.. *BREAK. *DFT Severity code filter > 0 0-99 Print device Output queue Library Attention program F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys F5=Refresh > P2 > *DEV > *SYSVAL F12=Cancel Name. *LIBL. type N to restrict a user to one company. at Allowed into All Companies (Y/N). Create User Profile (CRTUSRPRF) Type Choices.. *WRKSTN. the default values for the Print device and Output queue need to be changed. *SYSVAL Name. *ALL... For multiple company users.Fixed Assets ... At the Output queue field.General Ledger DCS/400 .... Group authority type. The Assigned Default Company identifies the primary company used. the user can change this when accessing each option....... Additional parameters display.. Verify the User ID and User Name are correct (if not make revisions now)... *DEV Name.. or press Shift + ArowUp keys to advance to the next screen. *CURLIB Name. Press Enter.Accounts Payable . *PGP Supplemental groups..Answerbacks .. *ASSIST BOTTOM F13=How to use this display a. *CURLIB Delivery > NOTIFY *NOTIFY.. *USE. *NONE Message queue > *USRPRF Name..> *PRIVATE *PRIVATE... type N c. *HOLD.... At the Print device field.Accounts Receivable .... ! Do not type the Printer ID of the system printer! The IBM User ID is added. d.. e. For multiple company stores. Locate the Application Name and allow the user access by typing X in the correct column. See steps 8a and 8b... The Job Classification Security Level limits screen access within different applications.IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS 8... GENERAL MANAGER Allowed Into All Companies (Y/N) N Job Classification Security Level 1 Reports X X X X X X X Maintenance X X X X X X X Entry X X X X X X X Inquiry X X X X X X X + a. August 2000 Security 10-9 . for all other users. type *DEV b. *NONE + for more values Accounting code > *BLANK Document Password. *NONE. If this user needs to have print screens print at a specific printer. f. SMITH.. Group authority > *NONE *NONE. To deny access. b. leave it blank.> *NONE Name... Type Y to allow access to all companies. Type Y for the system administrator and their backup.. *SYSVAL. 9. type the Printer ID of the printer that print screens are to print at.Communications . * CHANGE.Setup & Installation F3=Exit F12=Cancel Roll Up/Down User Name EDWARD D.> *NONE Name. The Security Officer (Y/N) field defines access to the security setup.. The DEALERLINE APPLICATION SECURITY screen displays: SA1025S2 J3 DEALERLINE APPLICATION SECURITY Work with User Security 5/08/00 9:55:56 User ID SMITH Security Officer (Y/N) N Assigned Default Company 1 Application Name BUSINESSLINE . *USRPRF Library Name.

GENERAL MANAGER Allowed Into All Companies (Y/N) N Job Classification Security Level 1 Application Name REPORTLINE SALESLINE/400 . SMITH. SMITH. SA1025S2 J3 DEALERLINE APPLICATION SECURITY Work with User Security 5/08/00 9:55:56 User ID SMITH Security Officer (Y/N) N Assigned Default Company 1 User Name EDWARD D. leave it blank. GENERAL MANAGER Allowed Into All Companies (Y/N) N Job Classification Security Level 1 Reports X Maintenance X Entry X Inquiry F3=Exit F12=Cancel Roll Up/Down 10.IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS SA1025S2 J3 DEALERLINE APPLICATION SECURITY Work with User Security 5/08/00 9:55:56 User ID SMITH Security Officer (Y/N) N Assigned Default Company 1 Application Name .Answerbacks .Reportline .Communications .Payroll Accounting Payroll Type . To deny access. Locate the Application Name and allow the user access by typing X in the correct column. or press Shift + ArowUp keys to advance to the next screen.Credit Bureau . GENERAL MANAGER Allowed Into All Companies (Y/N) N Job Classification Security Level 1 Reports X X X X X X X X Maintenance X X X X X X X X Entry X X X X X X X X Inquiry X X X X X X X X + . or press Shift + ArowUp keys to advance to the next screen.Setup & Installation F3=Exit F12=Cancel Roll Up/Down Reports X X X X X X X Maintenance X X X X X X X Entry X X X X X X X Inquiry X X X X X X X + h.Transactions F3=Exit F12=Cancel Roll Up/Down g. To deny access.Transactions PAYROLL PARTSLINE RAPID/400 User Name EDWARD D.Setup & Installation .Prospecting .AS/400 Parts . Locate the Application Name and allow the user access by typing X in the correct column. Press Enter to save the new user profile. SMITH. leave it blank.Vehicle Inventory .GMAC MAPS . 10-10 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 .SERVICELINE XL User Name EDWARD D.Finance & Insurance . SA1025S2 J3 DEALERLINE APPLICATION SECURITY Work with User Security 5/08/00 9:55:56 User ID SMITH Security Officer (Y/N) N Assigned Default Company 1 Application Name SERVICELINE XL .

intermediate or advanced. Based on where the user is accessing from. *SYSVAL. The status of the user profile should be *Enabled. based on user needs.SLMAINCL. SLMAINCL is found in SLLIBR and SVMAINCL is found in SVLIBR. Leaving the *SYSVAL default will use the system defined value.. *DISABLED *USER. and for SERVICELINE XL users – SVMAINCL. The number of days is defined in system values. There are four choices: For all ID's use SA0030CL. Type the user password. Defines to the system the level of help or assistance needed. A Disabled user cannot sign on. Defines library user will function in. Use one of the IBM user classes defined on page 4. Choices are basic. check if the status is Disabled. *YES *ENABLED.. *NONE *NO. Limit Capabilities Text Description August 2000 Security 10-11 . *CRTDFT NAME. *NONE NAME. NAME. DMM000 is most commonly used for Initial Menu. This value should be DBLIBR. USER PROFILE USER PASSWORD SET PASSWORD TO EXPIRED STATUS USER CLASS ASSISTANCE LEVEL BURT *USRPRF *NO *ENABLED *USER *SYSVAL NAME NAME. *BASIC.. *USRPRF. *NO will not limit them. If the user receives message: User XXX cannot sign on. First menu the user will see and the library it is located in. *SIGNOFF CURRENT LIBRARY INITIAL PROGRAM TO CALL LIBRARY INITIAL MENU LIBRARY LIMIT CAPABILITIES TEXT 'DESCRIPTION' F3=EXIT F4=PROMPT F5=REFRESH F13=HOW TO USE THIS DISPLAY DBLIBR SA0030CL SALIBR DMM000 *SALIBR NAME. *PARTIAL. SA0030CL is in SALIBR.. Library to find initial program. Leaving the *NO default will allow password changes. *PGMR. If *USRPRF value is left here. *LIBL. location or whatever text the system administrator requires. *YES will restrict user's use of the command line. PRESS ENTER. Free form definition area to describe user. but their command knowledge may. job title. *LIBL.IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS Create User Profile (CRTUSRPRF) Screen Definitions CREATE USER PROFILE (CRTUSRPRF) TYPE CHOICES. *YES forces the user to change their password every so many days. the system uses your User Profile entry as the password. except for SALESLINE XL users . Base this entry on specific user needs. *YES GENERAL MANAGER F10=ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS F24=MORE KEYS F12=CANCEL User Profile User Password Set Password to Expire Status User Class Assistance Level Current Library Initial Program to Call Library Initial Menu/Library User ID name can only be modified using the Change (CHGUSRPRF) procedure. but not force them. Display job log for more information. *INTERMED. *SYSOPR. it is likely the library attached to the initial menu is wrong. If the user receives message: Job ending immediately. *CURLIB *NO *NO. *CURLIB NAME.

. *TYPEAHEAD KILOBYTES. *NONE *USRPRF. *SYSVAL. *YES. *NO. *NONE. 10-12 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . If the user is a SERVICELINE XL user the value should be SVJOBD which is an acronym for SERVICELINE ADVISOR JOB DESCRIPTION. press Shift + Arrow Up keys to display the next screen.. *YES 1-366. then press Shift + ArrowUp keys to display the next screen. the value should be SLJOBD which is an acronym for: SALESLINE JOB DESCRIPTION. *NO. press F10. • If the user is a SALESLINE XL user. the value should be SVLIBR. PRESS ENTER. The value should read SALIBR. Special authority > + for more values Special environment > Display sign-on information > Password expiration interval > Limit device sessions > Keyboard buffering > Maximum allowed storage > Highest schedule priority > Job description > Library > Group profile > Owner > F3=ExitT F4=Prpomt F24=More keys *USRCLS *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *NOMAX 3 DLJOBD SALIBR *NONE *USRPRF *USRCLS. based on the authority the user requires.IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS After completing this screen. After completing this screen.*NONE. *NOMAX 0-9 NAME NAME... *NOMAX *SYSVAL. CREATE USER PROFILE (CRTUSRPRF) ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS TYPE CHOICES. *CURLIB NAME. • Library Library location of DEALERLINE job descriptions. *ALLOBJ F5=Refresh F12=Cancel *SYSVAL. For a SALESLINE XL user the value should read SLLIBR and for a SERVICELINE XL user. *S36 *SYSVAL. F13=How to use this display Use the default values on this screen except: Special Authority Job Description Type the values required.*GRPPRF MORE. *LIBL. *NO. Additional Parameters. The value for this should be DLJOBD which is an acronym for: DEALERLINE JOB DESCRIPTION. *SYSVAL.

.......> *EXCLUDE Use the default values for this screen – press Enter to save information........ *PGP Name...................... Sort Sequence > Library............. *CHANGE............. *SYSVAL.. August 2000 Security 10-13 .> + for more values Locale.... Name.. *GEN *ALL..... *PRIVATE..... *SYSVAL...... *CLKWD. *HEX...> + for more values User ID number .. *SYSVAL Name.. The user profile is created..... *USE. *LIBL......... Should read *DEV if a printer device has been defined...... *SYSVAL.. *HEX. and *WRKSTN if no printer device is defined.... *USRPRF Name..> Language ID... *SYSVAL. Authority........ *LIBL........ *CURLIB *NOTIFY... * CHANGE.......... Group authority > Group authority type.......... press Enter.> Locale job attributes.> Coded character set ID.... *WRKSTN..........> Home Directory..... press Shift + Arrow Up keys to display the next screen........ *DFT 0-99 Name.... Create User Profile (CRTUSRPRF) Type Choices.. *DEV Name.... *EXPERT............> User options . *SYSVAL... *GEN 1-4294967294....... *USE< *EXCLUDE Bott F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display Name.......> Message queue > Library Delivery > Severity code filter > Print device > Output queue > Library Attention program > F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys F5=Refresh *NONE *PRIVATE *NONE *BLANK *NONE *USRPRF NOTIFY 0 P2 *DEV *SYSVAL F12=Cancel *NONE. *ALL. *WRKSTN... *NONE Name. *NONE Name. *LIBL..........> Supplemental groups...... After completing this screen... 1-4294967294...... *ASSIST F13=How to use this display Use the default values on this screen except: Print Device Output Queue Defines printer output location for this user...... *CURLIB *SYSVAL. *NONE..> Country ID .... *CCSID....IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS Create User Profile (CRTUSRPRF) Type Choices. *HEX... press Enter.. *BREAK... *CURLIB Name....> Group ID number ..... *NONE...> *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *NONE *GEN *NONE *USRPRF *NONE......> + for more values Accounting code > Document Password...... *HOLD.....

SERVICELINE SVMAINCL SVLIBR DMM000 SALESLINE SLMAINCL SLLIBR DMM000 Initial Program Initial Library Initial Menu INITIAL LIBRARY Job Description Library SALIBR SVJOBD SVLIBR SALIBR OR *LIBL SLJOBD SLLIBR 10-14 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . the user profile will need to be changed). often want to go directly to that application’s main menu after they sign on. For a BUSINESSLINE or PARTSLINE Main Menu: Have the customer display the menu they want automatically displayed after sign on. (If they want a SALESLINE OR SERVICELINE main menu. then press F23.IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS Set Initial Menu / Library After Sign On Customer’s that work in one particular application SALESLINE. BUSINESSLINE. PARTSLINE etc. This is easy to do if the user wants to go to a BUSINESSLINE or PARTSLINE Main Menu.

*CURLIB NAME. User profile > GARY Name F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F13=How to use this display F10=Additional parameters F24=More keys F12=Cancel 2. *SAME. *BASIC. *LIBL. *SIGNOFF CURRENT LIBRARY INITIAL PROGRAM TO CALL LIBRARY INITIAL MENU LIBRARY LIMIT CAPABILITIES TEXT 'DESCRIPTION' NAME. type CHGUSRPRF and press F4. *SAME. *SYSVAL. *NO. *SAME. *LIBL. *YES *SAME. Type the name of the User profile to change and press Enter. *PARTIAL.. *YES 'DEFAULT USER PROFILE SETUP' F12=CANCEL DBLIBR SA0030CL SALIBR DMM000 *LIBL F3=EXIT F4=PROMPT F5=REFRESH F10-ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS F13=HOW TO USE THIS DISPLAY F24=MORE KEYS 3. *SAME. At a command line. *NO. *NONE NAME. *CURLIB *NO *SAME. press Enter. NAME. *NONE *SAME. *CRTDFT NAME. Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) Type choices.. *USER. The Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) screen displays: Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) TYPE CHOICES. August 2000 Security 10-15 . USER PROFILE USER PASSWORD SET PASSWORD TO EXPIRED STATUS USER CLASS ASSISTANCE LEVEL > GARY *SAME *NO *ENABLED *USER *SYSVAL NAME NAME. *DISABLED *SAME. Change parameters as needed.IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS Change a user profile 1. *SYSOPR. PRESS ENTER... *SAME. *ENABLED.

. . . Current password New password . . . . . . press Enter. . . . . . . . _______ New password (to verify) F3=Exit F12=Cancel 2. . : Type choices. . . . . . . . . _______ . _______ 04/18/00 . The Change Password screen displays: Change Password Password last changed . . . . . .IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS Change Password 1. . . . At a command line. 10-16 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . . . Type the Current Password. . then type the New password two times and press Enter. . . type CHGPWD and press Enter. . . .

9. 6. SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Main Menu DMM005 Select one of the following: 1. ! The Hand Check printer is assigned in BUSINESSLINE XL. 3. System Administration Menu. and press Enter. From the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu. 11. Selection or command: ==> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 Main Menu 3 Type 7. 13. 2. The S/O and R/O Invoices are assigned through SERVICELINE XL. Enter/Update Dealer Systems Assignments. 7. 8. 24. Backups Communications Security Restore Labels Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments Forms Formatting Print Work . and press Enter.Station Printer Assignments Name and Address Menu DEALERLINE Main Menu Sign Off Reset Remote Dial Connection 23. August 2000 Security 10-17 .IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments To Enter/Update Dealer System assignments: 1. At a command line. type 6. type GO DMM000 and press Enter. 5. 2.

......P6 #1 Hand Check Printer............ If it is necessary to define printers by workstation ID.....IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS ACSSYS-01 Initial Heading DEALERLINE TRAINING CO........... ! 6. 1 (1.... Or • If no printer assignment needs to be changed for a specific workstation... Workstation Printer Assignments..P3 Cash Receipts Printer.......... or 2) (main printer) (do NOT change this one) Normal Print Assignment (printer assignments) Purchase Order.... The Workstation Printer Assignments screen displays..... press F7............... Continue through the remaining screens for each company. Press Enter.... Modify the printer assignments as needed and press Enter......P1 Parts: Invoicing......... continue to the next section.P6 Normal Print Assignment Purchase Order... Press Enter to display the next screen: Initial Heading DEALERLINE CO.............P1 Security. Cash Receipts Printer..... or an Installer.................. This option should not be used unless instructed by an EDS Customer Support Representative...................... 5.... Work Order..... 10-18 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 ...........P1 SOS: Audit Report. The Workstation Printer Assignments should be used only if instructed by an EDS Customer Support Representative.P1 S/O Invoice.......... End Job.P3 SOS: #2 #3 #4 Picking.......01 Normally 01 for single company (main company) Default System Printer.........P6 #1 Hand Check Printer..P1 CMD-7 End Job 4..P1 S/O Invoice.Y Y/N (more than one company) Default Company Number.P1 Audit Report...P1 #2 #3 #4 Picking.................P1 CMD-7 End Job 7..... #16 ..... press F7 to display the Workstation Printer Assignments screen (see the next subsection)...(1) (company heading) Default Company Number......01 Default System Printer.. #01 Multiple Company.... Complete one of the following: • If a printer assignment needs to be changed for a specific workstation...P1 Parts: Invoicing......... Work Order.....

. #2 Hand Check Printer.......01 Workstation ID ... .. Complete the remaining fields and press Enter.. or an Installer.01 Workstation ID ... SOS: #3 #4 Picking.A5 AD015-02 Workstation Printer Assignments Purchase Order. This option define printers by their Workstation ID.. .. ....... . Work Order...... . August 2000 Security 10-19 ...A5 CMD-2 NEXT COMPANY CMD-7 End Job Type the Company Number and the Workstation ID........... .IBM AND DEALERLINE XL SECURITY SCREENS Workstation Printer Assignments The Workstation Printer Assignments should be used only if instructed by an EDS Customer Support Representative.. .. press F7. ........ ........... .. .. . . . . S/O Invoice.. .. . ..... CMD-2 NEXT CO# CMD-7 END JOB CMD-3 NEXT WORKSTATION CMD-4 DELETE CMD-9 CO# SEARCH 3.. ... ... .. 1.. ... Cash Receipts Printer. .. ...... If a printer assignment needs to be changed for a specific workstation: Workstation Printer Assignments Enter Company Number and Workstation ID AD015-01 Company Number...... .. . and press Enter. End Job.... Audit Report.. The next Workstation Printer Assignments screen displays: Workstation Printer Assignments Company Number..... . . After the job completes.... 2. Parts: Invoicing..

*CRTDFT NAME.. *SYSVAL. After completing the fields on this screen. PRESS ENTER. *USRPRF.. *NO. *NO. At a command line. *NONE *USRPRF.*NONE. *LIBL. *TYPEAHEAD KILOBYTES. *YES *ENABLED. type CRTUSRPRF and press Enter.. Additional Parameters. *CURLIB NAME. *INTERMED. NAME.. *SYSVAL. *BASIC.*GRPPRF MORE.. Then press Shift + ArrowUp keys at the same time to display the next screen. *YES GENERAL MANAGER F10=ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS F24=MORE KEYS F12=CANCEL 2.. *LIBL. *YES 1-366. ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS Special authority > + for more values Special environment > Display sign-on information > Password expiration interval > Limit device sessions > Keyboard buffering > Maximum allowed storage > Highest schedule priority > Job description > Library > Group profile > Owner > *USRCLS *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *NOMAX 3 DLJOBD SALIBR *NONE *USRPRF *USRCLS. *SYSOPR. *YES. *LIBL. *CURLIB *NO *NO. *NOMAX *SYSVAL. *S36 *SYSVAL. *SIGNOFF CURRENT LIBRARY INITIAL PROGRAM TO CALL LIBRARY INITIAL MENU LIBRARY LIMIT CAPABILITIES TEXT 'DESCRIPTION' F3=EXIT F4=PROMPT F5=REFRESH F13=HOW TO USE THIS DISPLAY DBLIBR SA0030CL SALIBR DMM000 SALIBR NAME. *NO. *SYSVAL. CREATE USER PROFILE (CRTUSRPRF) TYPE CHOICES. *CURLIB NAME. *NOMAX 0-9 NAME NAME. *NONE *NO. 10-20 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . *PGMR. *ALLOBJ *SYSVAL. CREATE USER PROFILE (CRTUSRPRF) TYPE CHOICES. PRESS ENTER.. *NONE. F3=ExitT F4=Prpomt F24=More keys F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display 3. *DISABLED *USER. After completing the fields on this screen.. USER PROFILE USER PASSWORD SET PASSWORD TO EXPIRED STATUS USER CLASS ASSISTANCE LEVEL BURT *USRPRF *NO *ENABLED *USER *SYSVAL NAME NAME. press Shift + ArrowUp keys at the same time to display the next screen. *PARTIAL.IBM SECURITY SCREENS IBM SECURITY SCREENS Create a User Profile To setup an IBM User Profile: 1. press F10. *NONE NAME.

*ALL..... 1-4294967294.....> + for more values Accounting code > Document Password... press Shift + ArrowUp keys at the same time to display the next screen............ August 2000 Security 10-21 ........... Name....... * CHANGE.IBM SECURITY SCREENS Create User Profile (CRTUSRPRF) Type Choices.. Group authority > Group authority type.> Message queue > Library Delivery > Severity code filter > Print device > Output queue > Library Attention program > F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys F5=Refresh *NONE *PRIVATE *NONE *BLANK *NONE *USRPRF NOTIFY 0 P2 *DEV *SYSVAL F12=Cancel *NONE....... press Enter to save the information.> Coded character set ID.. *LIBL...... Create User Profile (CRTUSRPRF) Type Choices.. *USE.. Sort Sequence > Library.> *EXCLUDE ! 4. *NONE Name..... *ASSIST F13=How to use this display 3....... *CCSID.> Supplemental groups.> + for more values Locale.. *SYSVAL...... *HEX. *HEX..........> User options ........... *GEN 1-4294967294... *DEV Name.. *BREAK. *LIBL........ *WRKSTN.......> + for more values User ID number ........ Authority... *CHANGE. *SYSVAL...> Group ID number ...... *GEN *ALL......... *HOLD.. *EXPERT............ *USE< *EXCLUDE Bottom F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display Name.. press Enter..... *CLKWD... *HEX............. *NONE...... *SYSVAL.> Language ID. *CURLIB *NOTIFY... *LIBL................ press Enter..........> Home Directory. *NONE......... *PGP Name.. *NONE Name.> Locale job attributes....... *DFT 0-99 Name.. *WRKSTN.. After completing the fields on this screen....... Use the defaults on this screen....... Defaults should ALWAYS be used on this screen. *PRIVATE.. *SYSVAL.. *USRPRF Name. *CURLIB *SYSVAL........... *CURLIB Name.. *SYSVAL.....> Country ID ........ *SYSVAL Name..............> *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *NONE *GEN *NONE *USRPRF *NONE...

check if the status is Disabled. Leaving the *SYSVAL default will use the system defined value. and for SERVICELINE XL users – SVMAINCL. Display job log for more information. Based on where the user is accessing from. Free form definition area to describe user. Status User Class Assistance Level Current Library Initial Program to Call Library Initial Menu/Library Limit Capabilities Text Description 10-22 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . based on user needs. Base this entry on specific user needs.IBM SECURITY SCREENS Create User Profile Screen Definitions First screen User Profile User Password Set Password to Expire User ID name can only be modified using the Change (CHGUSRPRF) procedure. If user receives message: User XXX cannot sign on. DMM000 is most commonly used for Initial Menu. Type the user password. Use one of the IBM user classes defined on page 4. There are four choices: For all ID's use SA0030CL. job title. Library to find initial program. Leaving the *NO default will allow password changes. Defines to the system the level of help or assistance needed. The number of days is defined in system values. location or whatever text the system administrator requires. *YES will restrict user's use of the command line. *NO will not limit them. but their command knowledge may. First menu the user will see and the library it is located in. A Disabled user cannot sign on. the system uses your User Profile entry as the password. SA0030CL is in SALIBR. *YES forces the user to change their password every so many days. intermediate or advanced. If user receives message: Job ending immediately. except for SALESLINE XL users SLMAINCL. The status of the user profile should be *Enabled. This value should be DBLIBR. but not force them. Defines library user will function in. SLMAINCL is found in SLLIBR and SVMAINCL is found in SVLIBR. it is very likely the library attached to the initial menu is wrong. Choices are basic. If *USRPRF value is left here.

The value should read SALIBR. Should read *DEV if a printer device has been defined. the value should be SVLIBR. and *WRKSTN if no printer device is defined.IBM SECURITY SCREENS Second screen Use the default values on this screen except: Special Authority Job Description Type the values required. based on the authority the user requires. For a SALESLINE XL user the value should read SLLIBR and for a SERVICELINE XL user. The value for this should be DLJOBD which is an acronym for: DEALERLINE JOB DESCRIPTION. Third screen Use the default values on this screen except: Print Device Output Queue Defines printer output location for this user. August 2000 Security 10-23 . the value should be SLJOBD which is an acronym for: SALESLINE JOB DESCRIPTION. Library Library location of DEALERLINE job descriptions. • If the user is a SALESLINE XL user. • If the user is a SERVICELINE XL user the value should be SVJOBD which is an acronym for: SERVICELINE ADVISOR JOB DESCRIPTION.

Type the name of the User profile to change and press Enter. *LIBL. press F10. *DISABLED *SAME. *NO. F3=EXIT F4=PROMPT F5=REFRESH F10-ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS F13=HOW TO USE THIS DISPLAY F24=MORE KEYS F12=CANCEL 2. User profile > GARY Name F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F13=How to use this display F10=Additional parameters F24=More keys F12=Cancel 2. *CURLIB NAME. *NONE *SAME. PRESS ENTER.. Additional Parameters. *BASIC. *NO. *SAME. *YES *SAME.. *CRTDFT NAME. press Enter. *CURLIB *NO *SAME. *NONE NAME. 10-24 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . *SYSOPR. NAME. The Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) screen displays: Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) TYPE CHOICES. *ENABLED. At a command line. *SAME. *SAME. type CHGUSRPRF and press F4. *USER. After completing the fields on this screen.. *PARTIAL.. USER PROFILE USER PASSWORD SET PASSWORD TO EXPIRED STATUS USER CLASS ASSISTANCE LEVEL > GARY *SAME *NO *ENABLED *USER *SYSVAL NAME NAME. *SAME. Then press Shift + ArrowUp keys at the same time to display the next screen. *SIGNOFF CURRENT LIBRARY INITIAL PROGRAM TO CALL LIBRARY INITIAL MENU LIBRARY LIMIT CAPABILITIES TEXT 'DESCRIPTION' DBLIBR SA0030CL SALIBR DMM000 *LIBL NAME. Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) Type choices. *LIBL. *SAME. *YES 'PARTS MANAGER ' MORE.IBM SECURITY SCREENS Change a User Profile 1. *SYSVAL.

*CURLIB Name. *BREAK. Name. *SYSVAL. press Shift + ArrowUp keys at the same time to display the next screen. *ASSIST Name.. *ALL.. Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) Type Choices. *USRPRF Name. *LIBL. *DFT 0-99 Name.. press Enter..... ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS Special authority > + for more values Special environment > Display sign-on information > Password expiration interval > Limit device sessions > Keyboard buffering > Maximum allowed storage > Highest schedule priority > Job description > Library > Group profile > Owner > *ALLJOB *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *SYSVAL *NOMAX 3 DLJOBD SALIBR *NONE *USRPRF *USRCLS. *HOLD.. After all changes to the user profile are made.. *NOMAX *SYSVAL. *TYPEAHEAD KILOBYTES.. *EXPERT BOTTOM F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display > *SYSVAL > *NONE 4. *WRKSTN. *SYSVAL. August 2000 Security 10-25 . *NONE..... *NOMAX 0-9 NAME NAME... press Enter..IBM SECURITY SCREENS Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) TYPE CHOICES. *YES 1-366. *CURLIB *NOTIFY. *LIBL. *LIBL. *YES. *SYSVAL. * CHANGE. *USE.*NONE. *NONE. *NO. *CURLIB *NONE.. *NONE *USRPRF. *SYSVAL Name.*GRPPRF MORE.. F3=ExitT F4=Prpomt F24=More keys F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display 3. *NO. *ALLOBJ *SYSVAL. + for more values > *NONE > ' ' > *USRPRF > > > > NOTIFY 0 P2 *DEV *NONE. *S36 *SYSVAL.. PRESS ENTER. *LIBL. *CLKWD. *CURLIB NAME. After completing the fields on this screen. *DEV Name. Group authority Accounting code Message queue Library Delivery Severity code filter Print device Output queue Library Attention program Library User options ..... *NO. *WRKSTN.

location or whatever text the system administrator requires. Base this entry on specific user needs. This value should be DBLIBR. *YES forces the user to change their password every so many days. check to see if the status is disabled. job title. If *USRPRF value is left here. Display job log for more information. Choices are basic. A Disabled user cannot sign on. Leaving the *SYSVAL default will use the system defined value. but not force them. Defines library user will function in. the system uses your User Profile entry as the password. If user receives message: User XXX cannot sign on. Leaving the *NO default will allow password changes. Free form definition area to describe user. Type the user password. Status Assistance Level Current Library Initial Menu/Library Text Description 10-26 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 .IBM SECURITY SCREENS Change User Profile Screen Definitions First screen User Profile User Password Set Password to Expire User ID name can only be modified using the Change (CHGUSRPRF) procedure. DMM000 is most commonly used for the Initial Menu. The status of the user profile should be *Enabled. If user receives message: Job ending immediately. it is very likely the library attached to the initial menu is wrong. First menu the user will see and the library it is located in. Defines to the system the level of help or assistance needed. intermediate or advanced. The number of days is defined in system values.

August 2000 Security 10-27 . Library Library location of DEALERLINE job descriptions.IBM SECURITY SCREENS Second screen Use the default values on this screen except: Special Authority Job Description Type the values required. Third screen Use the default values on this screen except: Print Device Output Queue Defines printer output location for this user. based on the authority the user requires. For a SALESLINE XL user the value should read SLLIBR and for a SERVICELINE XL user. • If the user is a SERVICELINE XL user the value should be SVJOBD which is an acronym for: SERVICELINE ADVISOR JOB DESCRIPTION. the value should be SVLIBR. the value should be SLJOBD which is an acronym for: SALESLINE JOB DESCRIPTION. and *WRKSTN if no printer device is defined. Should read *DEV if a printer device has been defined. The value for this should be DLJOBD which is an acronym for: DEALERLINE JOB DESCRIPTION. The value should read SALIBR. • If the user is a SALESLINE XL user.

7. Security. Type 6. 2. and press Enter. 9. Selection or command: ==> 6 F3=EXIT F4=PROMPT F9=RETRIEVE F12=CANCEL F13=INFORMATION ASSISTANT F16=AS/400 MAIN MENU 6. SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION Main Menu DMM005 Select one of the following: 1. The System Administration Main Menu displays. 10-28 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . 23. DEALERLINE Main Menu Sign Off Selection or command: ==> 3 F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel F13=Information Assistant F16=AS/400 Main Menu 3 Type 3. 8. 3. 2. 13. 90. 9. Backups Communications 3. type GO DMM000 and press Enter. System Administration. BUSINESSLINE PARTSLINE SDS PARTS SERVICELINE REPORTLINE SALESLINE GM DEALER COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS RAPID DEALERLINE XL Version Sign Off Electronic Data Systems Copyright (C) 1994 All rights reserved.IBM SECURITY SCREENS Delete a User Profile To delete a user profile: 1. 6. 11. 7.Station Printer Assignments Name and Address Menu Reset Remote Dial Connection 23. SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION 2. DEALERLINE XL Main Menu DMM000 Select one of the following: 1. and press Enter. 24. Security Restore Labels Enter/Update Dealer System Assignments Forms Formatting Print Work . At a command line. 8. 4. 5. 5.

SA1025S1 J3 DEALERLINE APPLICATION SECURITY Work with User Security 04/18/00 9:50:45 Type Option Then Press Enter 1 = Add Opt 2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=Display 7=Dir Entry 8=User Profiles User ID TSMITH PRUSER1 PRMNGR SAUSER1 SMUSER1 User Name Tina Smith Business Office PARTSLINE Default User PARTSLINE Manager System Operator SERVICELINE User Default Company Number-Name 01 01 01 01 01 DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE DEALERLINE OF OF OF OF OF SOUTHFIELD SOUTHFIELD SOUTHFIELD SOUTHFIELD SOUTHFIELD 4 F3=Exit Roll Up/Down 4. 5. At the Opt field. type 4 and press Enter.IBM SECURITY SCREENS The Work with User Security screen displays. The following screen displays: SA1025S1 J3 DEALERLINE APPLICATION SECURITY Confirm Delete of Authorized Users 04/18/00 9:50:50 Press Enter To Confirm Your Choices For 4=Delete Press F12 To Return to Change Your Choices User ID TSMITH User Name Tina Smith Business Manager Default Company Number-Name 01 DEALERLINE OF SOUTHFIELD F3=Exit F12=Cancel Roll Up/Down 6. next to the User ID to delete. ! A user profile can also be deleted by using the following IBM commands: WRKUSRPRF or DLTUSRPRF August 2000 Security 10-29 . Press Enter to confirm the delete. or F12 to cancel.

D. A DEALERLINE XL Security Profile / ID does not: A. Allow a user to sign onto the AS/400 Define OS/400 functionality Define DEALERLINE XL application access 10-30 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 .SECURITY – EXERCISE PART 1 SECURITY – EXERCISE PART 1 1. DMM000 MAIN GLM00 SLMAIN ___ General Ledger Menu ___ DEALERLINE XL Main Menu ___ AS/400 Main Menu ___ SALESLINE XL Main Menu 4. 2. How would you execute the following. B. 2. C. 3. 4. DBLIBR SALIBR QSYS 3. B. Match the screen numbers with their names: 1. DBLIBR SALIBR QSYS QUSRSYS 5. C. An IBM Security profile / ID does not: A. C. Create a user profile Display a user profile Delete a user profile Work with a user profile The Current library field for an IBM user profile should have a value of: A. B. Allow a user to sign onto the AS/400 Define OS/400 functionality Define DEALERLINE XL application access 6. assuming your User ID has authority: A. D. DEALERLINE XL profiles are located in which library? A. B. C. C. B.

To list all IBM user profiles. 8. The security officer field in DEALERLINE XL security allows that user to access the security option. at a command line. Identify the initial program to call and the library for each of the listed applications: Initial Program SALESLINE XL PARTSLINE XL Payroll Library ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ August 2000 Security 10-31 . ____ ____ True False 9. type: ____ ____ A. DSPUSRPRF and press Enter. B.SECURITY – EXERCISE PART 1 7. WRKUSRPRF *ALL and press Enter.

EXERCISE 1. 8. 7. 3.Solutions to Security . 6. DSPUSRPRF displays one user profile at a time. 9. 5. True SLMAIN PRM00 PAM00 SLLIBR PRLIBR PALIBR 2.Exercise SOLUTIONS TO SECURITY . All DEALERLINE XL data is in DBLIBR C A and B A. CRTUSRPRF DSPUSRPRF DLTUSRPRF WRKUSRPRF A 1B 2C 3A 4D A. 4. 10-32 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 .

_____ B. C. display and release others output. B." can delete. *USER *SYSOPR *SECADM *PGMR Which user class is allowed to add/delete/change any IBM user profile? (Assume each user class has all their default special authorities. IBM user profiles are located in which library? _____ _____ _____ _____ A. C. hold. D. The current library field in an IBM user profile should have a value of: _____ A. _____ B. A. B. B. C. _____ True _____ False 4. DBLIBR SALIBR QSYS QUSRSYS 5. How would you execute the following? (Assume you have the authority. Create a user profile Display a user profile Delete a user profile Work with a user profile ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ 6. D.SECURITY – EXERCISE PART 2 SECURITY – EXERCISE PART 2 1. *SECADM *SECOFR *PGMR 3.) _____ A. _____ C. _____ C. D. The majority of dealership personnel will be user class: _____ _____ _____ _____ 2.) A. DBLIBR SALIBR QSYS August 2000 Security 10-33 . The user class "*USER" with system authorities "*ALLOBJ" and "*SAVSYS.

DMM000 MAIN GLM00 SLMAIN _____ General Ledger Menu _____ DEALERLINE XL Main Menu _____ AS/400 Main Menu _____ SALESLINE XL Main Menu 10. B. Allow a user to sign-on to the AS/400 Define OS/400 functionality Define DEALERLINE XL application access 12. An IBM Security Profile/ID does not: _____ A. _____ C. 2. C. The initial program field in an IBM user profile for BUSINESSLINE XL value of: _____ A. DLJOBD in DBLIBR DLJOBD in SALIBR DLJOBD in QSYS users should have a 8. _____ C. A DEALERLINE XL Security Profile/ID does not: _____ A. Match the screen names with their titles. 1. 4. Allow a user to sign-on to the AS/400 Define OS/400 functionality Define DEALERLINE XL application access 13. 3. The limit capabilities parameter in IBM security limits command line access. DBLIBR SALIBR QSYS QUSRSYS 11. _____ B. _____ B. _____ C. _____ C. _____ B. _____ B. The job description field in an IBM user profile should have a value of: _____ A. SA30CL in DBLIBR SA0030 in SALIBR SA0030CL in SALIBR 9. _____ True _____ False 10-34 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 .SECURITY – EXERCISE PART 2 7. DEALERLINE XL profiles are located in which library? _____ _____ _____ _____ A. D.

User receives error message – “Job ending immediately. Company access is defined in: _____ A. User receives error message – “User XXX cannot sign on” – What would you do to correct this? August 2000 Security 10-35 .SECURITY – EXERCISE PART 2 14. Default printers can be set differently for each company. To list all IBM user profiles. _____ True _____ False 17. _____ B. _____ B.” What would you do to correct this? ________________________________________________________ 20. and press Enter. Identify the initial menu and library for each of the listed applications: Initial Menu Library _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ _____________ SALESLINE XL PARTSLINE XL Payroll 19. The security officer field in DEALERLINE XL security allows that user ID to access the security option. IBM Security Profile DEALERLINE XL Security Profile 16. at any command line type: _____ A. WRKUSRPRF *ALL DSPUSRPRF 15. Display job log for more information. _____ True _____ False 18.

Refuse to make the change. Just go ahead and make the change. User calls in and wants you to make some changes to his/her user profile or another user’s profile. How would you make changes to DEALERLINE security? 24. C. What would you do? A. because you suspect the caller is lying to you. Ask if the caller is the system administrator and walk him/her through the change if he/she says yes they are. B. and our customers would never lie to us. because your job is to take care of the customer no matter what. How would you make changes to IBM security? _____________________________________________________________________ 10-36 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 .SECURITY – EXERCISE PART 2 21. 22. What is the difference between DEALERLINE and IBM security? 23.

DSPUSRPRF will display one user profile at a time. All user profiles are stored in the IBM system library. False. 14. then press [ENTER]. August 2000 Security 10-37 . 12. instead of a "3" to copy. type "5" to display.SECURITY – EXERCISE PART 2 Solutions to Security . 8. In front of ID to copy. 4. True. 13. A. B.Exercise 1. Type new user ID and press [ENTER]. Only *SECOFR can change everything. and "2" to change (work with user profile). From the DEALERLINE XL Main Menu. type "3" to copy and press [ENTER]. 9. C. A and B. 15. B. C. Define DEALERLINE XL parameters and press [ENTER]. The same procedure can be followed. "4" to delete. A. 7. it has been found that this is the most widely used class. B. IBM Commands can also be used to perform these procedures. Select option 3 for Security and press [ENTER]. C. 3. 10. select option 6 for System Administration and press [ENTER]. Remember all DEALERLINE XL data is in DBLIBR. you will need *SPLCTL authority. 11. 6. A. Define IBM parameters and press [ENTER]. by using the Enter/Update Dealer Systems Assignments option. 2c. 4d. 5. 1b. True. 3a. 16. A. Due to the definition of the user class. 2. however. To complete this.

True. 22. while DEALERLINE security pertains to the applications. IBM security is for system functions. 24. Go into the user profile and check the library that is attached to the initial menu. 21. Go into the user profile and check the status to make sure user isn’t disabled. SLMAIN SLLIBR PRMØØ PRLIBR PAMØØ PALIBR 19.Exercise (continued) 17. 18.SECURITY – EXERCISE PART 2 Solutions to Security . 23. Place an 8 next to the user profile in Work with User Security or use the following IBM commands: WRKUSRPRF or CHGUSRPRF . Place a 2 to change next to the user profile in Work with User Security. 10-38 System Administrator Tasks August 2000 . A. 20.

.................... 1 OVERVIEW ..... 2 Parallel Attached Printer ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1 TERMINAL TYPES AND PRINTER CONNECTIONS . 2 TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER SETUPS ........................ 3 TCP/IP Printers ...................................... 9 August 2000 Printers 11-i ......................................................... 4 TCP/IP PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................... 2 Serial Printer .................11 Printers Table of Contents PRINTERS ... 3 TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING.....................................

Table of Contents This page intentionally left blank. 11-ii System Administration August 2000 .

PRINTERS PRINTERS OVERVIEW This chapter will cover the different types of terminals and printers used by EDS and basic printer issues for both Twinax attached printers and TCP/IP printers. August 2000 Printers 11-1 .

110). and needs an I/P address (an example of an I/P address is 10. A terminal is also referred to as a ‘DUM’ terminal – A ‘DUM’ terminal has no processor of it’s own and receives all of it’s information from the AS400. floppy drive. P.129. EDS uses TCP/IP and TWINAX ATTACHED workstations and printers – the difference between the two is how the devices communicate with the AS/400. The base on the newer IBM terminals will have connections for the power cord.C.C. A TCP/IP device communicates thru a network controller which would create a virtual device description. and pigtail. Parallel printers are physically connected (slaved) to a Terminal or PC.TERMINAL TYPES AND PRINTER CONNECTIONS TERMINAL TYPES AND PRINTER CONNECTIONS Printers can be Parallel or Serial (Stand Alone). tape drive. An example would be port 1 address 5. gray or beige in color and is approx. P. 11-2 System Administration August 2000 . 2. To determine what workstation a printer is parallel to: 1. keyboard. The back of the terminal or PC has a parallel printer port and this is where the parallel cable is connected to from the printer. A ‘DUM’ terminal will have 24 function keys on the keyboard. (Parallel cable for a Laser printer can have a maximum length of 10 ft ONLY). Leave the printer powered on and signoff the workstation you believe the printer is parallel to.’s can be used to emulate to the AS400 (DEALERLINE). The connectors on the parallel cable are about 2 inches wide and are rectangular in shape. A parallel printer connected to a PC will share the PC’s address. TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER SETUPS Parallel Attached Printer Parallel attached printers receive all of their information from the terminal or PC they are physically connected to – the printer address must be set up in the terminal (DUM) the printer is physically connected to.’s (Personal Computer) will have 12 function keys on the keyboard. then power the workstation back on. the printer should initialize/response as if it was just powered on. The printer is connected to the terminal or PC by a bi-directional parallel cable which is usually black. The newer IBM terminals have a base that looks like a processor. A TWINAX ATTACHED printer communicates thru a workstation controller card. Power off the workstation.82. floppy drive or tape drive. and the monitor will be connected to a processor which has a CD drive. a mouse. and has a controller address with a port/address. and hard drive. monitor cable. 6ft to 25ft in length. but this base will never have a CD drive.

TCP/IP Printers A TCP/IP printer needs an I/P address (Internet Protocol) – an example of an I/P address is 10.82. this card allows the printer to communicate with the AS/400.129.110 TCP/IP Printers are considered a NETWORK printer. The cable connection for a serial printer will either be a twinax cable or twisted pair cable. (This Stand Alone printer would use CAT5 cable and be connector thru a hub. the exception would be a printer attached to an external LAN adapter card such as a Mark Net Pro card. August 2000 Error! No text of specified style in document. TCP/IP Stand Alone printer CABLE will ALWAYS be CAT5 to a hub. The twinax cable has about a ½ inch wide round silver connector and is either connected to a pigtail. Laser printers will have a menu option on the control panel that allows an I/P address to be configured and will also have an I/O card installed.TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER SETUPS Serial Printer (Stand Alone) Serial Printers receive their printer address and information from a serial card or I/O card.) Usually a TCP/IP printer is a Laser printer. The twisted pair cable will be connected to a balun which is a 6 inch cable that on one side has a twinax connector on it. T-connector or may be connected directly into a twinax connector on the printer. and the other side has a RJ45 end on it. 11-3 .

The Work with All Printers screen displays. type WRKWTR and press Enter. 3. here are a list of questions that will walk you through troubleshooting basic printer problems. 2. 1=Start 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 5=Work with 7=Display messages 8=Work with output queue Opt Device P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 Sts MSGW STR STR HLD STR END STR STR END Sep *FILE *FILE *FILE *FILE *FILE *FILE *FILE Form Type *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL File QSYSPRT 6=Release User MSECOFR User Data FX511B Bottom Parameters for options 1. press Enter. 6 or command ===> F3=Exit F11=View 2 F12=Cancel F17=Top F18=Bottom • • F24=More keys Is the writer started? (STR would display in the Sts field) Is the writer held? (HLD would display in the Sts field) Is the writer in Message Waiting? (MSGW would display in the Sts field) Is the writer ended? (END would display in the Sts field) • • 11-4 System Administration August 2000 . To assist you. 4. • One of the most common problems is your printout NOT printing. Look at the printer: Is the printer powered on? Is there paper loaded? Is the paper jammed? Is the printer on-line or ready? Use command WRKWTR: 1. Work with All Printers Type options. At a command line.TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING The following commands and procedures are used for basic TWINAX ATTACHED printer troubleshooting.

Power off the printer Sign off of terminal that printer is attached to. End Writer (ENDWTR) Type choices. Power off terminal that printer is attached to.print head will move back and forth . 1. .paper will back out and then reload . *IMMED Name. .a laser printer’s control panel will go thru tests and than the control panel will display READY Power on terminal that printer is attached to. . . . . *SYSVAL.If status is VARY ON PENDING. printer will again initialize. . *ALL *CNTRLD. Power on printer Wait for printer to initialize (below are the most common ways printers initialize) . 4.WRKWTR xx* (xx = printer ID) OR WRKWTR .TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING • If TWINAX ATTACHED printer still is not printing after verification of the previous steps. 13. 9. Prior to terminal going to sign on screen. . 7. . 3.Type 4 to left of printer to end printer.Type *IMMED at When to end writer field and press Enter. . Make sure paper is loaded and printer is on-line or ready. End writer: . . 6. Writer . (TWINAX ATTAHCED PRINTER). . *PAGEEND F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys F5=Refresh F12=Cancel Bottom F13=How to use this display 2. > PA When to end writer . press Enter. press F4 . . 11-5 . *IMMED. 11. . Parrallel printer connected to a DUM terminal Resetting a PARALLEL printer connected to a DUMB (DUM) terminal. complete one of the following sections depending on if TWINAX ATTACHED printer is parallel or serial (stand alone). 8. Verify printer has a VARIED ON status (wrkcfgsts *dev xx) xx=printer ID . 5. verify parallel cable is secure at both ends (connection at terminal and printer) Start printer (WRKWTR) Send job to printer Answer printer message (WRKWTR) August 2000 Error! No text of specified style in document. 12. . . . 10. .

The following screen displays: 6. Power off printer Wait about 1 minute and than Power printer back on . If the READY & ON-LINE status lights are NOT on. If the above screen DOES NOT display (status window is all black). 7. 5. continue to step 8. contact ARG CUSTOMER SUPPORT for help with additional troubleshooting 11-6 System Administration August 2000 . 2. 3. minimize this screen and return to your AS400 session. This printer should now be working.TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING Parrallel printer connected to a PC using Client Access Resetting a PARALLEL printer connected to a PC using CLIENT ACCESS.) Double click printer ICON from desktop (usually ICON is labeled the same as printer ID). 4. (TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER) 1. Close any open printer sessions (these may be running minimized on task bar. • • If the READY & ON-LINE status lights are green. verify the READY & ON-LINE status lights are Green.paper should be loaded and printer must be on-line or ready status. If the above screen DOES display.

10. Then re-select Communication selection from tool bar. confirm the printer status. If Check mark DOES NOT appear. by selecting the Communication selection from the tool bar as displayed below. Verify Check mark appears next to Autoconnect.TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING 8 If the status window is all black. 11-7 . minimize this screen and return to your AS400 session. click on option Autoconnect. If the READY & ON-LINE status lights are NOT on. • • If the READY & ON-LINE status lights are green. August 2000 Error! No text of specified style in document. Click on option Connect. Contact ARG CUSTOMER SUPPORT for help with additional troubleshooting. 9. The Status screen displays again and the READY & ON-LINE lights should be green. This printer should now be working. 11.

3. . > PA When to end writer . . . . *ALL *CNTRLD.WRKWTR xx* (xx = printer ID) OR WRKWTR .print head will move back and forth . Writer . . .TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING Serial (Stand Alone) printer Resetting a SERIAL (Stand Alone) printer. . Power off the printer Wait about 1 minute. 5. *PAGEEND F3=Exit F4=Prompt F24=More keys F5=Refresh F12=Cancel Bottom F13=How to use this display 2. 4. .paper will back out and then reload .a laser printer’s control panel will go thru tests and than the control panel will display READY Make sure paper is loaded and printer is on-line or ready. . *SYSVAL. .Type 4 to left of printer to end printer. then power the printer back on. . verify parallel cable is secure at both ends (connection at terminal and printer) Start printer (WRKWTR) Send job to printer Answer printer message (WRKWTR) 11-8 System Administration August 2000 . *IMMED. End writer: . . . Wait for printer to initialize (below are the most common ways printers initialize) . press Enter. 9.Type *IMMED at When to end writer field and press Enter. . 8. *IMMED Name. . (TWINAX ATTACHED PRINTER) 1. 6.If status is VARY ON PENDING. . End Writer (ENDWTR) Type choices. 7. . Verify printer has a VARIED ON status (wrkcfgsts *dev xx) xx=printer ID . . press F4 .

TCP/IP PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING TCP/IP PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING The following commands and procedures are used for basic TCP/IP printer troubleshooting. • One of the most common problems is your printout NOT printing. here are a list of questions that will walk you through troubleshooting basic printer problems. To assist you. 11-9 . Look at the printer: Is the printer powered on? Is there paper loaded? Is the paper jammed? Is the printer on-line or ready? August 2000 Error! No text of specified style in document.

b. press Enter. 4. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=End 8=Work with output queue Opt Writer BA BB BC FT FV JA JB JC JD JE JF Type RMT RMT RMT RMT PRT RMT RMT RMT RMT RMT RMT Device 5=Work with Queue BA BB BC FT FV JA JB JC JD JE JF 6=Release Library QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS QUSRSYS 7=Display messages Status STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR STR Form Type *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL *ALL More.TCP/IP PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING Use command WRKWTR: At a command line. Press F5 to refresh the Work with All Writers screen c. 6 or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F12=Cancel F22=Start printer writer F24=More keys FV Does the Printer ID display under the Writer column? If the Printer ID does not display: a.. d. Work with All Writers Type options. Parameters for options 2. Verify the printer ID shows up on Work with All Writers screen.. type WRKWTR *ALL and press Enter. 3. The Work with All Writers screen displays. please contact EDS CUSTOMER SUPPORT HARDWARE. 11-10 System Administration August 2000 . The following questions can be answered from using the WRKWTR *ALL command: • • • Is the writer started? (STR would display in the Sts field) Is the writer held? (HLD would display in the Sts field) Is the writer in Message Waiting? (MSGW would display in the Sts field) STRRMTWTR *ALL command can be used to start STRRMTWTR xx (xx=printer ID) OR a TCP/IP printer. If the printer ID does NOT show up on Work with All Writers screen. From a command line type STRRMTWTR *ALL and press Enter.

then the control panel displays READY 5. . . . . Description. . . 11-11 . . . . : *IP Internet address . . . . Answer printer message (WRKWTR *ALL) 9. . Start printer (STRRMTWTR xx) xx=printer ID or (STRRMTWTR *ALL) 7.68. : 10.113 Destination type .TCP/IP PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING • If TCP/IP printer still is not printing after verification of the previous steps. . . Make sure paper is loaded and printer is on-line or ready 6. . . . 10. . . . next to the correct printer ID and press Enter. . . Resetting a TCP/IP SERIAL (Stand Alone) printer. . . August 2000 Error! No text of specified style in document. . Send job to printer 8. . .a laser printer’s control panel will go thru tests. Type 8. . Verify that the AS/400 physically see’s printer by PINGING the printer’s IP (Internet Address) address.113 1. 3. . continue with step 10. End writer (WRKWTR *ALL) Power off the printer Wait about 1 minute and than power printer back on Wait for printer to initialize (below are the most common ways printers initialize) . . 2. . . : QSYSOPR Library . : *LIBL Connection type . : *YES The Internet address in this example is 10.print head will move back and forth . . . . . 4. • To find the IP (Internet address) address of the printer: a. . At a command line type WRKOUTQ xx * (xx = printer ID ) and press Enter (asterisk * must be typed after printer ID) b. Page down once to locate the Internet Address (IP) Example: Queue for writer messages . . . . . : *OTHER Host print transform . . . .186. . . . c.68.186.paper will back out and than reload . . If printer DOES NOT print. . . . continue with the following steps. . . . .

TCP/IP PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING • Another way to find the IP (Internet address) address of the printer is to display the TCP/IP Host Table Entries.28. Work with TCP/IP interfaces Work with TCP/IP routes Change TCP/IP attributes Work with TCP/IP port restrictions Work with TCP/IP remote system information S1024606 10. 1=Add 2=Change 4=Remove Opt Internet Address 10. 3.158.AUBURN. type CFGTCP and press Enter. Work with TCP/IP host table entries 11. d.COM JG JF JE JD JC F6=Print list F12=Cancel F17=Position to e. Type 10..158.158.28. Merge TCP/IP host table 12. Configure related tables 22. at a command line type ‘xx. To ping the printer’s IP Address.132 10.153 10.158.48 PING 11.SNA.186. The Configure TCP/IP screen displays CFGTCP Configure TCP/IP System: Select one of the following: 1. The Work with TCP/IP Host Table Entries screen displays Work with TCP/IP Host Table Entries System: S1024606 Type options.187..155 10.156 More.186.COM SCHAUM01. and press Enter.73 10.xxx. 2.158. Configure TCP/IP applications 21.186.74 10. To display the TCP/IP Host Table Entries: a. Configure point-to-point TCP/IP Selection or command ===> F3=Exit F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel c.186.IBM. b.187.186.154 10. Work with TCP/IP host table entries. F3=Exit F5=Refresh Name 5=Display Host 7=Rename DA Q4 Q7 Q8 Q9 S1024606.SNA.187.28.28.SNA.187.COM DUNDEE01.158.152 10. The internet address in this example for printer DA is 10.48 10.AUBURN. press Enter.xxx. Change TCP/IP domain information 20.66 10.131 10.187.IBM.AUBURN.28.28.28. At a command line.75 10.186. 5.187.76 10.187.158.IBM.186.xxx’ and press enter (x’s = internet address) 11-12 System Administration August 2000 . 4.

14. return to step 10 and 11 to verify PING procedure works for printer If still no green light. replace this CAT5 cable. If message ‘Connection Verification…’ is received continue with step 13. If still no green light. please contact EDS CUSTOMER SUPPORT HARDWARE. August 2000 Error! No text of specified style in document. Start printer (STRRMTWTR xx) xx=printer ID or (STRRMTWTR *ALL) Send job to printer. disconnect CAT5 cable and reconnect cable. Answer printer message (WRKWTR *ALL). 13. A green light should be on where the cable is connected to the printer. 11-13 . If printer is powered on. additional troubleshooting is required.TCP/IP PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING 12. If no green light. verify CAT5 cable is secure on the back of the printer. • • • • • If error message ‘No response from host…’ displays. 15. verify the printer is powered on. If green light is on.

TCP/IP PRINTER TROUBLESHOOTING This page intentionally left blank. 11-14 System Administration August 2000 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful